Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Students can Download Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Plus One Botany Mineral Nutrition One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which one of the following roles is not characteristic of an essential element?
(a) being a component of biomolecules
(b) changing the chemistry of soil
(c) being a structural component of energy-related chemical compounds
(d) activation or inhibition of enzymes
Answer:
(b) changing the chemistry of soil

Question 2.
Which one of the following statements can best explain the term critical concentration of an essential element?
(a) essential element concentration below which plant growth is retarded.
(b) essential element concentration below which plant growth becomes stunted.
(c) essential element concentration below which plant remains in the vegetative phase.
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) essential element concentration below which plant growth becomes stunted.

Question 3.
During protein synthesis subunits of ribosomes are combined due to the presence of the particular element. Name it.
Answer:
Magnesium

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 4.
Deficiency symptoms of an element tend to appear first in young leaves.
It indicates that the element is relatively immobile. Which one of the following elemental deficiency would show such symptoms?
(a) sulphur
(b) Magnesium
(c) Nitrogen
(d) Potassium
Answer:
(a) sulphur

Question 5.
With regard to the Biological Nitrogen Fixation by Rhizobium in association with soybean, which one of the following statement/statements does not hold true.
(a) Nitrogenase may require oxygen for its functioning
(b) Nitrogenase is MO- Fe protein
(c) Leg-hemoglobin is a pink coloured pigment.
(d) Nitrogenase helps to convert N2 gas into two molecules of ammonia.
Answer:
(a) Nitrogenase may require oxygen for its functioning

Question 6.
Name the free-living microorganisms which can fix nitrogen.
Answer:
Azotobactor and Rhodospirillum

Question 7.
In what form do plants absorb molebdenum from the soil.
Answer:
Molybdate ions MoO22+

Question 8.
Mineral requirements of plants is explained by a method in the nutrient solution is Called ………. and it was demonstrated by ……….. for the first time.
Answer:
Hydroponics,Julius von sachs

Question 9.
Find the odd one out.
Boron, Copper, Zinc, Phosphorous
Answer:
Phosphorous

Question 10.
A plant cell when kept in a certain solution got plasmolysed. What was the nature of the solution?
Answer:
Hypertonic Solution.

Question 11.
Plants can be cultivated in water. Name the type of cultivation.
Answer:
Hydroponics

Question 12.
Find the odd one among the following Carbon, Manganese, potassium, Nitrogen
Answer:
Manganese

Question 13.
A farmer adds Azotobacter culture to the soil before sowing maize. Which mineral element is being replenished?
Answer:
Nitrogen

Question 14.
In the diagram below, Label the cell Ain Nostoc
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition img1
Answer:
Heterocyst

Question 15.
Which one of the following statements can best explain the term critical concentration of an essential element?
(a) essential element concentration below which plant growth is retarded.
(b) essential element concentration below which plant growth becomes stunted.
(c) essential element concentration below which plant remains in the vegetative phase.
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(a) essential element concentration below which plant growth is retarded.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 16.
Deficiency symptoms of an element tend to appear first in young leaves. It indicates that the element is relatively immobile. Which elemental deficiency would show such symptoms?
Answer:
Sulphur or calcium

Question 17.
From where do plants receive hydrogen?
Answer:
Water absorbed by plants.

Plus One Botany Mineral Nutrition Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Give example for

  1. Free-living N2 fixing bacteria.
  2. Symbiotic N2 fixing bacteria.

Answer:

  1. Acetobacter, Nitrococcus
  2. Rhizobium

Question 2.
Crop plants cannot grow well in the nitrogen-deficient soil while plants like Drosera and Nepenthes show vigorous growth.

  1. Justify the statement
  2. Mention any two deficiency shown by such crop plants.

Answer:
1. These plants are insectivorous plants. They capture and feed on insects in order to maintain the N2 content of their body.

2. Two deficiency shown by such crop plants

  • Stunted growth
  • Chlorosis

Question 3.
Study the relation of the given pair and fill up the blanks:

  1. Potassium: Stomatal movement:………… Constituent of chlorophyll
  2. ………………: pollen germination Zinc: biosynthesis of auxin.
  3. Ion exchange: Passive absorption ………….: Active absorption
  4. Protoplasmic streaming theory: De Vries: ………….Active absorption

Answer:

  1. Mg
  2. Boron
  3. Carrier concept
  4. Munch

Question 4.
Plants can be grown in defined nutrient solution in the absence of soil.

  1. Name the technique.
  2. Who demonstrated the technique for the first time?

Answer:

  1. Hydroponics
  2. Julius von sachs

Question 5.
How is nitrogenase enzyme protected?
Answer:
In leguminous plants, the enzyme nitrogenase is protected from Oxygen by the pigment leghaemoglobin.

Question 6.
The functional roles of certain essential elements are given below. Identify the element based on the function.

  1. Essential for the formation of Chlorophyll.
  2. Involved in the pollen germination.

Answer:

  1. Mg
  2. Boron

Question 7.
Explain the scientific reason for growing legume crops prior to cereal crops.
Answer:
Increase the fertility of the soil. Biological N2 fixation.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 8.
Name the pink coloured pigment present in the root nodules? Write its role in N2 fixation?
Answer:
Leghemoglobin is an oxygen scavenger. It creates anaerobic condition for the action of nitrogenase enzyme to fix N2.

Question 9.
Give example for the following taking part in biological nitrogen fixation.

  1. Free-living N2 fixing bacteria
  2. Free-living N2 fixing cyanobacteria
  3. Symbiotic N2 fixing bacteria.
  4. Symbiotic N2 fixing cyanobacteria

Answer:

  1. Azotobacter, Clostridium
  2. Nostoc, Anabaena, Oscillatonia.
  3. Rhizobium leguminosarum
  4. Nostoc, Anabaena

Question 10.
Prepare a flow chart which shows the conversion of N2 to ammonia in biological N2 fixation.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition img2

Question 11.
A pigment similar to hemoglobin is present in leguminous plants. Name the pigment and write its role.

OR

How is nitrogenase enzyme protected?
Answer:
Leghemoglobin which is the scavenger of 02. Nitrogenase enzyme needs oxygen-free condition.

Question 12.
Observe the figure given below and answer the following questions.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition img3

  1. Name this technique.
  2. Write two uses of this technique.

Answer:

  1. Hydroponics
  2. uses
    • Used as kitchen garden,
    • Used to study jdeficiency symptoms.

Question 13.
For the normal growth of plants it requires minerals. Write two examples of micro and macro elements.
Answer:

  • Macro – N, P
  • Micro-Boron, copper

Question 14.
In a survey done in an agricultural area the crops in the area shows various symptoms.

  • Chlorosis
  • Necrosis
  • Delay flowering.

Name the elements whose deficiency causes these symptoms.
Answer:

  • N, P, K, Mg
  • Chlorosis – N, K, Mg, S, Fe, Mn, etc.
  • Necrosis – K, Mg, Ca and Cu Delay flowering – N, S, and Mo

Question 15.
Iron is not a structural component of chlorophyll but its deficiency causes yellowing of leaves. Give reason.
Answer:
Iron activates catalise enzyme in the formation of chlorophyll.

Question 16.
Amides are derivatives of amino acids in which the hydroxyl group is replaced by the amino group (NH2)
a) How are asparagine and glutamine formed.
b) Amides contain more than amino acids.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition img4

Question 17.
In a survey done in an agricultural area the crops in the area shows various symptoms.

  • Chlorosis
  • Necrosis
  • Delay flowering

Name the elements whose deficiency causes these symptoms.
Answer:

  • N, P, K, Mg
  • Chlorosis – N, K, Mg, S, Fe, Mn, etc.
  • Necrosis – K, Mg, Ca and Cu
  • Delay flowering – N, S, and Mo

Question 18.
A farmer supplies Nitrogen fertilizer to pea plants.

  1. Is there any necessity to supply Nitrogen fertilizer?
  2. Justify your answer with reason.

Answer:

  1. No
  2. Symbiotic N2 fixation

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 19.
Name the respecive mineral nutrient element that

  1. Forms the core constituent of the ring structure of chlorophyll
  2. Activates carboxylases
  3. Forms the components of nitrogenase
  4. Synthesises middle lamella of plant cell.

Answer:

  1. Magnesium
  2. Manganese
  3. Molybdenum and iron
  4. Calcium

Question 20.
Observe the relationship between the first pair and fill in the blanks.
Posassium: Opening and closing of stomata::
Boron: …………
Answer:
Boron: Pollen germination/ pollen tube growth

Question 21.
State whether True or False.

  1. Potassium plays an important role in opening and closing of stomata.
  2. The movement of ions is usually called flux.
  3. In an LHC (Light-Harvesting complex), Chlorophyll b is the reaction center.
  4. The first stable product in calvin cycle is 3-PGA.

Answer:

  1. True
  2. True
  3. False
  4. True

Question 22.
A few inorganic elements are given. Match them with their specific functions.

ElementsFunction
1. Potassiuma. Absorption and translocation
2. Magnesiumb. Pollen germination
3. Molybdenumc. Opening and closing of Stomata
4. Borond. Maintain ribosome structure

Answer:

ElementsFunction
1. PotassiumOpening and closing of stomata
2. MagnesiumMaintain ribosome structure
3. MolybdenumAbsorption and translocation
4. BoronPollen germination

Question 23.
Pick the suitable minerals from the list, for following processes?

  1. Synthesis of auxin
  2. Pollen germination
  3. Photolysis of water
  4. Nitrogen metabolism

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition img5
Answer:

  1. Zn
  2. B
  3. Mn
  4. Mo

Question 24.
Rhizobium leguminosarum cannot do N2 fixation outside root nodules. Give reasons.
Answer:
Rhizobium can fix atmospheric N2 only if the symbiotic relationship with leguminose plant is established.

Question 25.
What type of conditions are created by leghaemoglobin in the root nodule of a legume?
Answer:
It acts as 02 scavenger that means it helps in preventing the combining of 02 with nitrogenase.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 26.
Leguminous plants can be cultivated in between rice cultivation. Why?
Answer:
Because it increases the fertility of soil (enrich N2 content) for next year rice cultivation.

Question 27.
Match the element with its associated functions/ roles.

A. Boroni. Splitting of H2O to liberate o2 during photosynthesis
B. Manganeseii. needed for the synthesis of auxins
C. Molybdenumiii. component of nitrogenase
D. Zinciv. Pollen germination
E. Ironv component of ferredoxin

Answer:

  1. A – iv
  2. B – i
  3. C – iii
  4. D – ii
  5. E – v

Question 28.
To get maximum yeild a farmer added exess amount of manganese-containing fertiliser. The plants showed some deficiency symptoms. Can you give the reason for this?
Answer:
Excess of the micronutrient -Mn causes Toxicity because it prevent the uptake of Iron, Magnesium, and calcium. This results in deficiency symptom.

Question 29.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition img6

  1. Identify the phenomenon?
  2. A pink coloured protein protects nitrogenase from oxygen. Name that protein.

Answer:

  1. Ammonification
  2. Leghemoglobin

Question 30.

AB
MagnesiumOpening and closing of stomata
CalciumSplitting of water
PotassiumMiddle lamella
ChlorineChlorophyll

Answer:

AB
MagnesiumChlorophyll
CalciumMiddle lamella
PotassiumOpening and closing of stomata
ChlorineSplitting of water

Question 31.

  1. Name the oxygen-binding pigment found in the root nodule of plants like pea and bean.
  2. What is the normal colour of this pigment?

Answer:

  1. Leghemoglobin
  2. Pink-colored

Question 32.
How the presence of magnesium fulfills the requirements of the essentiality of elements from growth and development of plants?
Answer:

  1. It is a constituent of chlorophyll molecule and is essential for photosynthesis.
  2. It cannot be replaced by any other element for the same function.
  3. It is also required as a co-factor by many enzymes involved in cellular respiration and other metabolic pathways.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 33.
Nitrogen fixation is shown by prokaryotes and not eukaryotes. Comment?
Answer:
In prokaryotes, photosynthetic autotrophs (cyanobacteria) like nostoc and Anabaena have special N2 fixing cell which helps in N2 fixation.

Question 34.
How is sulphur important for plants? Name the amino acids in which it is present.
Answer:
Sulphur, besides being present in some amino acids essential for protein synthesis, is also a constituent of several coenzymes, vitamins, and ferrodoxin which are involved in some biochemical pathways.

Question 35.
How do some bacteria carry out nitrification? What are such bacteria called?
Answer:
Such types of bacteria convert ammonia into nitrates and obtain energy for their activities. They are called chemosynthetic autotrophs.

Question 36.
Name the respective mineral nutrient elements of plants that:

  1. Is needed in the synthesis of auxins
  2. Is a constituent of ferredoxin
  3. Forms the core constituent of the ring structure of chlorophyll
  4. forms the components of nitrogenase and nitrate reductase

Answer:

  1. Zinc
  2. Sulphur
  3. Magnesium
  4. Molybdenum

Question 37.
Why do plants of legume family contain more protein than the other plants?
Answer:
Plants in legume family bears root nodules which bear symbiotic nitrogen-fixing bacteria i.e rhizobium

Question 38.
Nepenthes carries out photosynthesis and still traps insects. Why?
Answer:
Nepenthes grow in nitrogen-deficient soils so these trap, digest and absorb amino acids from the insects supplementing their nitrogen supply.

Question 39.
Mycorrohiza is a mutualistic association. How do the organisms involved in this association gain from each other?
Answer:
It is an association of root and fungi in which surface area of root is increased and more minerals can be absorbed. Fungus get nutrients and sugar from the plant.

Question 40.
Carnivorous plants like Nepenthes and Venus flytrap have nutritional adaptations. Which nutrient do they especially obtain and from where?
Answer:
In these, insect body is digested and plant gets Nitrogen as nutrients.

Question 41.
How are organisms like Pseudomonas and Thiobacillus of significance in nitrogen cycle?
Answer:
Pseudomonas and Thiobacillus carry out denitrification process wherein the nitrate present in the soil is reduced to nitrogen thus contributing to the atmospheric nitrogen.

Question 42.
Think of a plant which lacks chlorophyll. From where will it obtain nutrition? Give an example of such a type of plant.
Answer:
This case is observed in total parasites. In such plants they absorb food, water, and minerals from host. Eg cuscuta.

Question 43.
Nitrogen is essential element for plants and is found in abundance as atmospheric nitrogen. But most plants unable to use it. Why is it so and in what form do plants utilize them?
Answer:
Most plants cannot use it because atmospheric nitrogen is inert in its nature. Nitrogen fixers in soil can convert nitrogen gas into nitrates or nitrite or ammonium forms. These compounds enter the plants as nutrients through the roots and are assimilated as organic nitrogen.

Question 44.
How insectivorous plants fulfill their nitrogen requirements?
Answer:
Insectivorous plants fulfill their nitrogen requirements from insects and small animals trapped by their leaves(a pitcher).

Question 45.
All elements that are present in a plant need not be essential to its survival. Give reasons.
Answer:
The Criteria for essentiality are

  1. The element must be necessary for supporting normal growth and reproduction
  2. In the absence of elements, the plants do not complete their life cycle or set the seeds.
  3. The element must be directly involved in the metabolism of the plant.
  4. The requirement of the element must be specific and not replaceable by another.

Question 46.
Why is that in certain plants deficiency symptoms appear first in younger parts of the plant while in others they do so in mature organs?
Answer:

  • If the elements are actively mobilized, the older part of plant show deficiency symptoms.
  • If they are not mobilized, the deficiency symptoms are first observed in younger regions.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 47.
Mineral elements are re-exported from one place to other or some are immobile and deficiency symptoms observed

  1. Which is the part of the plant show deficiency symptoms in the former?
  2. Name the mineral element is immobile and which part of the plant shows deficiency symptoms?

Answer:

  1. Older regions because minerals are remobilised from older regions into younger regions.
  2. Ca, Deficiency symptoms are noticed in younger tissues because it forms the structural part.

Plus One Botany Mineral Nutrition Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Give the technical term for the following.

  1. Leaf yellowing
  2. death of tissues
  3. soilless cultivation

Answer:

  1. chlorosis
  2. Necrosis
  3. Hydroponics

Question 2.
Plants pick up nitrogen from the soil in the form of ammonia ions or nitrate ions, ammonia being the main product of biological nitrogen fixation. From the above view answer the following.
a) Which soil bacteria convert ammonia to NO2 – and NO3.
b) Draw a schematic diagram of progressive reduction of one molecule of nitrogen in the presentee of enzyme nitrogenase to yield two molecule of ammonia.
c) Name the enzyme for nitrogen assimilation in plants.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition img7

Question 3.
Macro and micronutrients are required in particular amount for plants.

  1. What will be the moderate increase of micronutrient affect the plants
  2. Name the micronutrient helps in pollen germination
  3. What is the concentration of macro and micronutrients required for plants?

Answer:

  1. It cause toxicity to plants and affect the uptake and utilisation of macronutrients
  2. Boron
  3. Macronutrients – Excess 10 millimole /kilogram of dry matter
    Micronutrients – Less than 10 millimole /kilogram of dry matter

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 4.
During formation of nitrate in plants, different steps occur.

  1. Name the steps leading to the conversion of atmospheric nitrogen to nitrate
  2. Which is the reductive and oxidative steps?
  3. Name the pigments and Enzymes that are required and the steps they act on.

Answer:

  1. Nitrogen fixation, Nitrification
  2. Nitrogen fixation—reductive process, Nitrification—Oxidative process
  3. pigment—Leghaemoglobin, Enzyme— Nirogenase Pigments and enzymes acts on Nitrogen fixation step

Question 5.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition img8

  1. Name the process
  2. Which enzyme catalyses the process
  3. How the enzyme in the process is protected from oxygen in root nodules?

Answer:

  1. N2 fixation
  2. Nitrogenase
  3. Due to the presence of pigment Leghemoglobin. It acts as the scavenger of oxygen.

Plus One Botany Mineral Nutrition NCERT Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
‘All elements that are present in a plant need not be essential to its survival’. Comment.
Answer:
The criteria for essentially of an element are given below:

1. The element must be absolutely necessary for supporting normal growth and reproduction. In the absence of the element, the plants do not complete their life cycle or set the seeds.

2. The requirement of the element must be specific and not replaceable by another element. In other words, deficiency of any one element cannot be met by supplying some other element.

3. The element must be directly involved in the metabolism of the plant. All elements that are present in a plant do not fulfill these criteria hence cannot be essential for plant survival.

Question 2.
Why is purification of water and nutrient salts so important in studies involving mineral nutrition using hydroponics?
Answer:
In 1860, Julius von Sachs, a prominent German botanist, demonstrated, for the first time, that plants could be grown to maturity in a defined nutrient solution in complete absence of soil. The essence of all these methods involves the culture of plants in a soil-free, defined mineral solution. These methods require purified water and mineral nutrient salts.

Purification of water and nurtient salt is important to rule out other influencing factors. The presence of pure nutrients will give clearcut scientific results. This will help in making a sound basis for the right prediction.

Question 3.
What are the steps involved in the formation of a root nodule?
Answer:
Steps in the development of root nodules:
1. Rhizobium bacteria contact a susceptible root hair, divide near it.

2. Upon successful infection of the root hair cause it to curl

3. Infected thread carries the bacteria to the inner cortex. The bacteria get modified into rod-shaped bacteriods and cause inner cortical and pericycle cells to divide. Division and growth of cortical and pericycle cells lead to nodule formation.

4. A mature nodule is complete with vascular tissues continuous with those of the root.

Plus One Botany Mineral Nutrition Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
1. Farmers in a particular region were concerned that premature yellowing of leaves of a pulse crop might cause a decrease in the yield. Which treatment could be most beneficial to obtain maximum seed yield?
(a) Frequent irrigation of the crop
(b) Treatment of the plants with cytokinins along with a small dose of nitrogenous fertilizer
(c) Removal of all yellow leaves and spraying the remaining green leaves with 2, 4, 5- thchlorophenoxy acetic acid
(d) Application of iron and magnesium to promote synthesis of chlorophyll
Answer:
(d) Application of iron and magnesium to promote synthesis of chlorophyll

Question 2.
For nitrogen fixation, useful pigment is
(a) nitrogenase
(b) hemoglobin
(c) myoglobin
(d) leghaemoglobin
Answer:
(d) leghaemoglobin

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 3.
Plants cultivated in nutrient solution without soil is called
(a) somatic hybridization
(b) tissue culture
(c) hydroponics
(d) suspension culture
Answer:
(c) hydroponics

Question 4.
The process of decay of dead organic matter is known as
(a) denitrification
(b) nitrification
(c) nitrogen fixation
(d) ammonification
Answer:
(d) ammonification

Question 5.
Zn, Mo, Fe, Cu are
(a) trace elements
(b) non-essentials
(c) macronutrients
(d) both a and b
Answer:
(a) trace elements

Question 6.
An essential element is that which
(a) improves health of the plant
(b) is irreplaceable and indispensable for the growth of plants
(c) is found in plant ash
(d) is available in the soil
Answer:
(b) is irreplaceable and indispensable for the growth of plants

Question 7.
N2 +8e +8H +16ATP → 2NH3+2H+ + 16ADP + 8e The above equation refers to
(a) amnionification
(b) nitrification
(c) nitrogen fixation
(d) denitrification
Answer:
(c) nitrogen fixation

Question 8.
Micronutrients are
(a) as important as macronutrients but are required in small amount
(b) less important than macronutrients
(c) called micro as they play only a minor role in plant nutrition
(d) required greater than 10m mole/Kg of dry matter
Answer:
(a) as important as macronutrients but are required in small amount

Question 9.
Which element is located at the centre of the porphyrin ring in chlorophyll?
(a) Potassium
(b) Manganese
(c) Calcium
(d) Magnesium
Answer:
(d) Magnesium

Question 10.
Which element is required for the germination of pollen grains?
(a) Boron
(b) Calcium
(c) Chlorine
(d) Potassium
Answer:
(a) Boron

Question 11.
Select the correct statement.
(a) Legumes are incapable of fixing nitrogen
(b) Legumes fix nitrogen through bacteria living fruits
(c) Legumes fix nitrogen only by bacteria present in root nodules
(d) frankia forms symbiotic association with algae
Answer:
(c) Legumes fix nitrogen only by bacteria present in root nodules

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 12.
Chlorosis is caused due to deficiency of
(a) magnesium
(b) calcium
(c) boron
(d) manganese
Answer:
(a) magnesium

Question 13.
Enzyme nitrogenase is responsible for
(a) nitrification
(b) nitrogen fixation
(c) nitrite reduction
(d) nitrate reduction
Answer:
(b) nitrogen fixation

Question 14.
Maximum percentage of which element occurs in plant ash?
(a) Magnesium
(b) Zinc
(c) Potassium
(d) Calcium
Answer:
(d) Calcium

Question 15.
Which of the following metals causes bone cancer
(a) Lead
(b) Cobalt
(c) Uranium
(d) strontium90
Answer:
(d) strontium90

Question 16.
Premature leaf fall is due to deficiency of
(a) phosphorus
(b) nitrogen
(c) calcium
(d) potassium
Answer:
(a) phosphorus

Question 17.
The function of leg haemoglobin during biological nitrogen fixation in root nodules of legumes is to
(a) convert atmospheric nitrogen to ammonia
(b) convert ammonia to nitrite
(c) transport oxygen for activity of nitrogenase
(d) protect nitrogenase from oxygen
Answer:
(d) protect nitrogenase from oxygen

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Mineral Nutrition

Question 18.
Which of the following gene is responsible for biological nitrogen fixation?
(a) Nitrogenase
(b) N if gene
(c) Yeast alanine tRNA synthetase
(d) RNA synthetase
Answer:
(b) N if gene

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Students can Download Chapter 8 Database Management System Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Plus Two Computer Application Database Management System One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Select the property which is desirable for a database.
(a) Redundancy
(b) Inconsistency
(c) Integrity
(d) Complexity
Answer:
(c) Integrity

Question 2.
Pick the odd man out.
(a) Create
(b) Select
(c) Update
(d) Insert
Answer:
(a) Create

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 3.
______is the ability to modify a schema definition in one level without affecting the schema definition in the next higher level.
Answer:
Data Independance.

Question 4.
For accessing data from a database, provides an interface with programming languages.
Answer:
SQL (or DML)

Question 5.
Give an example for RDBMS package.
Answer:
Packages such as Oracle, My SQL, etc.

Question 6.
Name the key that acts as a candidate key but not a primary key.
Answer:
Alternate key

Question 7.
With the help of_______the process of storing, retrieving and modifying date are greatly simplified.
Answer:
DBMS

Question 8.
If______is controlled , DBMS can guarantee that database is never inconsistent.
Answer:
Redundancy.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 9.
The property of a DBMS that guarantees that the database is never inconsistent.
Answer:
Redundancy.

Question 10.
______and_____are the two types of integrity checks.
Answer:
Range checks, Value checks.

Question 11.
Which component of DBMS provides interfaces with programming Languages.
Answer:
DML

Question 12.
The level of database abstraction that describes how the data is actually stored in the storage medium.
Answer:
Physical level.

Question 13.
The level of database abstraction that describes what data are stored in the database.
Answer:
Logical level.

Question 14.
Data Base Administrators (DBA) are more concerned with level______of Abstraction.
Answer:
Logical level.

Question 15.
The programmers are connected with______level of abstraction.
Answer:
Logical level.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 16.
The teller at a bank sees only that part of the database that has information on customer accounts. Which level of Database abstraction he is at?
Answer:
View level.

Question 17.
As part of project work, Ashish defines the type of data and the relationship among them. He is at_______level of database abstraction.
Answer:
Logical.

Question 18.
_______is the other name for logical level.
Answer:
Conceptual level

Question 19.
If the modifications made on storage format does not affect the structure of data, then we achieve______data independence.
Answer:
Physical data independence.

Question 20.
Pick the odd one out.
(a) net work model
(b) hybrid model
(c) relational model
(d) hierarchical model
Answer:
(b) Hybrid model.

Question 21.
“I am a data model. My records can have more than one parent record” Who am I?
Answer:
Network model.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 22.
Name the language that enables user to access or manipulate data as organized by RDBMS.
Answer:
DBML

Question 23.
ADatabaseAdministratorisableto modify the structure a programmer changes data types and length of a database without affecting certain fields in a database of a bank and the program. Identify the data independence associated in it.
Answer:
Logical data Independence.

Question 24.
Name the language that used to define a database scheme.
Answer:
DDL

Question 25.
Name the person who has central control over the database and programs in DBMS
(a) Naive user
(b) Programmer
(c) Database Administrator
(d) System Analyst
Answer:
(c) Database Administrator.

Question 26.
Oracle DBMS package is based on______model.
Answer:
Relational

Question 27.
Match the following.

AB
(a) Relation(i)  Field
(b) Tuple(ii)  Table
(c) Atribute(iii)  Record

Answer:
(a) – (ii), (b) – (iii), (c) – (i).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 28.
Name the Relational operation which selects certain columns from the table while discarding others.
Answer:
Project.

Question 29.
How to define the Domain of a column ‘subject 1’ of MARKS relation.
Answer:
Range of values from 0 to 100.

Question 30.
State whetherTrue or False. A view is a kind of table whose contents are taken from other tables.
Answer:
True

Question 31.
State True or False. A view can be queried, inserted into, updated and deleted from.
Answer:
True.

Question 32.
Name an efficient way to provide only required data to users hiding other data from the database.
Answer:
View

Question 33.
Pick the key which can not be used to uniquely identify a tuple on a relation:
(Candidate Key, Primary Key, Alternate Key, Super Key, None of these)
Answer:
None of these.

Question 34.
π(pi) Greek letter is used to denote________operation in relational algebra.
Answer:
Project.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 35.
Which relational Algebra operation returns all possible combinations of tuples from two relations.
Answer:
Cartesian product.

Question 36.
Pick the odd one out.
(Select, Cartesian product, Union, intersection)
Answer:
Select – unary operator.

Question 37.
What will be the cardinality of the resultant table if after the following operation if the cardinality of STUDENT is 5 and INSTRUCTOR is 3?
Answer:
15

Question 38.
Consider two relations FOOTBALL AND CRICKET, How to get the names of players play only cricket not also FOOTBALL.
Answer:
CRICKET – FOOTBALL

Question 39.
Why we call a Foreign Key so?
Answer:
It is a candidate Key in another table, A foreigner.

Question 40.
_______is range of values from which actual values are appearing in a given columns are drawn.
Answer:
Domain

Question 41.
Name the table that does not contain data of its own, but is derived from a base table.
Answer:
view

Question 42.
Name a way to uniquely identify a tuple in a relation.
Answer:
By using primary key.

Question 43.
Give two Unary operations performed on a relation in Relational Algebra.
Answer:
Select, Project

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 44.
Data redundancy is not a desirable property. But All redundancy can not or should not be eliminated. Do you agree with this statement. Justify.
Answer:
Yes. Because sometimes there can be technical or business reasons for maintaining several distinct copies of same data.

Question 45.
Anju is able to do all the internal operations in a DBMS. What type of user is she? What are the other type of users?
Answer:
DBA, Other type users are Appl Prograammer and Naive users.

Question 46.
Which of the following statements are true?

  1. DBMS facilitates storage, retrieval, and management of databases.
  2. We must keep more copies of the same data in databases.
  3. Data inconsistency is eliminated in DBMS.
  4. DBMS allows sharing of data, but does not ensure security.

Choose the correct option from the following:
(a) Both 1 and 3 are true
(b) Statements 1, 3 and 4 are true
(c) Statements 1, 2 and 4 are true
(d) All statements are true
Answer:
(a) Both 1 and 3 are true

Question 47.
Which of the following refers to duplication of data in files?
(a) Data redundancy
(b) Data inconsistency
(c) Data integrity
(d) Data security
Answer:
(a) Data redundancy

Question 48.
The following are some responsibilities of database users. Which of them belong to Database Administrator?

  1. Design the conceptual schema of the database.
  2. Develops programs to interact with the database.
  3. Interacts with the database through queries.
  4. Ensures authorised and secured access of data

(a) Both 1 and 3
(b) Except 2 and 3
(c) 1, 2 and 4
(d) All the four
Answer:
(b) Except 2 and 3

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 49.
Which of the keys in a relation do not allow null values? Choose the most appropriate option from the following.
(a) Primary key
(b) Candidate key
(c) Both primary key and candidate key
(d) Either primary key or candidate key
Answer:
(c) Both primary key and candidate key

Question 50.
Choose the level of database abstraction that describes what data is stored in the database and what relationships exist among them.
(a) External
(b) Logical
(c) Physical
(d) View
Answer:
(b) Logical

Question 51.
Which of the following operations can extract the specified columns of a table?
(a) Selection
(b) Projection
(c) Intersection
(d) Set Difference
Answer:
(b) Projection

Plus Two Computer Application Database Management System Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The schema of a table is EMPLOYEE(emp_code, emp_name, designation, salary). Write down the relational expressions for the following:

  1. To get the name and designation of all employees.
  2. To get the details of employees whose salary is above 25000.
  3. To get the names of employees who designation is Manager.
  4. To get the details of Managers with salary less than 25000.

Answer:

  1. πname, designation (EMPLOYEE)
  2. σsalary>25000 (EMLOYEE)
  3. πname( σdesignation=”Manager”(EMPLOYEE))
  4. σdesignation = “Manager” and salary < 25000 (EMLOYEE).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 2.
Data sharing is an essential feature of DBMS. How data sharing reduces the data inconsistency in a database? Data sharing is an essential feature of DBMS. How data sharing reduces the data inconsistency in a database?
Answer:
Instead of storing more than one copy of the same data, it stores only one copy. This can be shared by several users. If redundancy occurs there is a chance to inconsistency. If redundancy is removed then inconsistency cannot occur.

Question 3.
Pick the odd one out and justify your answer:
(a) Column
(b) Attribute
(c) Field
(d) Tuple
Answer:
(d) Tuple. The other three terminologies indicate the same characteristic of a table.

Question 4.
Suppose a table (relation) contains the details of customers in a bank. Which attribute of the customer will be set as primary key for the table? Give reason for your opinion.
Answer:
Account number can be set as primary key since account number is different for different customers. That is it is unique hence it can be set as primary key.

Question 5.
How many distinct tuples and attributes are there in a relation with cardinality 22 and degree 7. Answer:

  • Cardinality is the number of rows (tuples)
  • Hence number of tuples is 22
  • Degree is the number of coloums (attributes)
  • Hence number of attributes 7

Question 6.
Distinguish primary key and alternate key.
Answer:

  1. Primary key: It is a set of one or more attributes used to uniquely identify a row Alternate
  2. key: A candidate key other than the primary key.

Question 7.
Write an example for relational data model.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 1

Question 8.
Observe the following table and choose the correct match from the following options:

Column AColumn B
(1) Cardinality(A) Row of a table
(2) Degree(B) Table
(3) Relation(C) Number of rows
(4) Tuple(D) Number of columns
(E) Attribute

(a) 1 → B, 2 → D, 3 → E, 4 → C
(b) 1 → C, 2 → D, 3 → E, 4 → A
(c) 1 → C, 2 → D, 3 → B, 4 → A
(d) 1 → D, 2 → C, 3 → B, 4 → E
Answer:
(c) 1 → C, 2 → D, 3 → B, 4 → A

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 9.
Consider the table with the following fields Name, RollNumberand Mark for a set of students. Suggest a field among them, which is suitable for primary key. Justify your answer.
Answer:
field RollNumberis suitable for the primary key. The name and mark can have same values so they are not suitable for the primary key.

Question 10.
Raju is confused with the statement ‘logical data independence is more difficult to achieve than physical data independence’. How can you help Raju to understand the statement.
Answer:
Because Appl. Programs heavily dependent on the logical structure of data. So any change in structure means chance of rewriting Appl. Programs.

Question 11.
Match the following.

                  AB
(a) DBA(i) querying and updation
(b) Application programmer(ii) ensures consistency
(c) Naive users(iii) defines conceptual view

Answer:
(a) – (ii), (b) – (iii), (c) – (i)

Question 12.
Match the following.

AB
(a) Hierarchical model(i) data as tables
(b) Network model(ii) Network as storage medium
(c) Relational model(iii) Child record can have more than one parent
(iv) Tree structure

Answer:
(a) – (iv), (b) – (iii), (c) – (i)

Question 13.
Your friend tells you that only relational model is used nowadays as DBMS. Will you agree with that? Justify.
Answer:
Yes. Other two models are complex. In RDMS, no redundancy and relationships can be formed easily.

Question 14.
The telephone number of Gokul is entered in Library file as 802111 and in admission register file as 802171.

  1. Can you correlate this problem with a concept in DBMS
  2. Can you propose a solution to avoid this.

Answer:

  1. Consistency problem
  2. Remove data redundancy.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 15.
What is a DBMS?
Answer:
A DBMS is used to store large volume of data and it is used to retrieve data whenever needed, edit the existing data, update the data and it is possible to delete also.

Question 16.
“View provides an excellent way to access data from data.” Do you agree with this statement? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Yes. Views can have data from more than one table, view can be queried, inserted into, deleted from and updated like a normal table.

Question 17.
A relation is given below.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 2
Mark the following:
Tuple, Attributes, Cardinality, Degree
Answer:

  • Tuple- It is the Rows
  • Attributes – It is the columns
  • Cardinality – 3(Number of Rows)
  • Degree – 4 (Number of Columns)

Question 18.
State whetherTrue or False.

  1. Primary key cannot be composite key.
  2. Only a candidate key can become a Primary Key.
  3. Foreign key of a table is a candidate key in another table.
  4. Super key uniquely identifies a row in a relation.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True
  3. True
  4. True

Question 19.
Explain the meaning of following operations.
Answer:
select the tuples whose department is sales and who have salary >5000.

Question 20.
Two relations are given below.
FOOTBALL

NameAge
Jose23
Raju22

CRICKET

NameAge
Jomon22
Raju22

Is it possible to find the players those who play both FOOTBALL AND CRICKET by applying any of the Relational Algebra Operations? Explain.
Answer:
Intersection operation.
FOOTBALL ∩ CRICKET.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 21.
How will you differentiate Primary key and Super Key? Answer:
Answer:

  • primary key- one of the candidate keys chosen to uniquely identifies the rows of a table.
  • Super key – Combination of a Primary key with any other attribute or group of attributes.

Question 22.
Cardinality of a table T1 is 10 and of table, T2 is 8 and the two relations are union compatible. If the cardinality of result T1 ∪ T2 is 13, then what is the cardinality of T1 ∩ T2? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Cardinally of table T1 is 10 means it has 10 rows Cardinally of table T2 is 8 means it has 8 rows Normally T1 ∪ T2 is 10 + 8 = 18 But Here T1 ∪ T2 is 13 means after eliminating duplication of 5 rows this happened. This means 5 rows are common. That is T1 ∩ T2 is 5.

Question 23.
Cardinality of a table T1 is 10 and of table, T2 is 8 and the two relations are union compatible.

  1. What will be the maximum possible cardinality of T1 ∪ T2?
  2. What will be the minimum possible cardinality of T1 ∩ T2?

Answer:
1. Degree(CD) -the number of Columns is the Degree
Cardinality (RC)-: the number of Rows is the Cardinality
T1 ∪ T2 = Sum of cardinalities of Table 1 and Table 2
i.e. T1 ∪ T2 = 10 + 8 = 18.

2. T1 ∩ T2 is the common rows(tuples) in T1 and T2 If there is no common tuples then T1 n T2 is 0 hence the cardinality is 0.

Plus Two Computer Application Database Management System Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
For catering to the needs of users, a database is implemented through three general levels. Name the three levels and discuss them.
Answer:

  1. Physical Level is the lowest level.lt describes how the data is actually stored in the storage medium. At physical level complex low-level data structures are described in detail.
  2. Logical level describes what data are stored in the database and what relationships exist among data. Here database is described in terms of simple structures. Records are defined in this level. Programmers work at this level.
  3. View level is the highest level of data abstraction. It is concerned with the way in which the users view the database. It describes only part of the database.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 2.
Consider the following table and write relational algebra operations for the following DEPOSIT.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 3

  1. To display those tuples from DEPOSIT relation where amount is greater than 25,000.
  2. To display only AccNo. and Amoun to fall depositors.

Answer:

  1. σamount >25000 (Deposit)
  2. πAccNo, amount (deposit)

Question 3.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 4
Show the output of the following relational operations.

  1. R1 – R2
  2. R1 ∩ R2
  3. R1 ∪ R2

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 5

2.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 6

3.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 7

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 4.
Developers hide the complexity of Database system three several levels of abstraction. What are they?
Answer:

  1. Physical – (how data)
  2. logical – (what data)
  3. view level – (view data)

1. Physical Level is the lowest level. It describes how the data is actually stored in the storage medium. At physical level complex low-level data structures are described in detail.

2. Logical level describes what data are stored in the database and what relationships exist among data. Here database is described in terms of simple structure. Records are defined in this level. Programmers work at this level.

3. View level is the highest level of data abstraction. It is concerned with the way in which the users view the database. It describes only part of the database.

Question 5.
How data are organized in a database.
Answer:

  1. Field: Smallest unit of data. Eg: RolINo, Name.
  2. Record: Collection of related fields. Eg: The information of a particular student.
  3. File: Collection of related records. Eg: The informations of 10 students.

Question 6.
Salih check his account details using an ATM machine.

  1. Identify the levels of abstraction associated with this?
  2. Specify other levels.

Answer:

  1. View level
  2. Logical level, Physical level

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 7.
Match the following.

AB
(1) Database Administrator(a) Not concerned with or even aware of details of the DBMS
(2) Application Programer(b) Person who has a central control over definition and DBMS
(3) Users(c) Computer professionals who interact with the DBMS through Application programs

Answer:
(1) – (b), (2) – (c), (3) – (a)

Question 8.
Match the following.

AB
DomainTable
TupleNo. of rows in a relation
AttributeNo. of columns in a relation
CardinalityRows in a relation
DegreeA pool of values
RelationColumn in a Table

Answer:

AB
DomainA pool of values
TupleRows in a relation
AttributeColumn in a Table
CardinalityNo. of rows in a relation
DegreeNo. of columns in a relation
RelationTable

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 9.
Explain the major components of DBMS.
Answer:
Components of DBMS:

  1. Databases – It is the main component.
  2. Data Definition Language (DDL) – It is used to define the structure of a table.
  3. Data Manipulation Language (DML) – It is used to add, retrieve, modify and delete records in a database.
  4. Users – With the help of programs users interact with the DBMS.

Question 10.
Categorise the users of DBMS and write their functions.
Answer:
Users of Database:

  1. Database Administrator: It is a person who has a central control over the DBMS.
  2. Application Programmer: These are computer professionals who interact with the DBMS through programs.
  3. Naive users: He is an end user. He does not know the details of DBMS.

Question 11.
A table with three columns is given below. For each relational operation given in the 1st column find the best matches from 2nd and 3rd columns.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 8
Answer:

  1. Select → c) σ → (ii)
  2. Union → d) ∪ → (iv)
  3. Set difference → b) → (i)

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 12.
Observe the given table BOOK and write down the outputs of the following relational expressions:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 9
Answer:
1. This query returns all the tuples(rows) that contain BPB in column Publisher.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 10

2. This query returns the column Book_Title with price<200.
Book Title

  • Computer Fundamentals
  • C++ Programming
  • Mystery of Chemistry

Plus Two Computer Application Database Management System Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Cardinality of a table A is 10 and of table, B is 8 and the two relations are union compatible.

  1. What will be the maximum possible cardinality of (A ∪ B) and (A ∩ B)?
  2. What will be the minimum possible cardinality of (A ∪ B) and (A ∩ B)?

Give justifications for your answers.
Answer:
There are two possibilities:

  1. Both relations contain different tuples (rows).
  2. The 8 tuples (rows) of table B are same as that of table A.

Case 1.
If both relations contain different tuples then the maximum possible cardinality of A ∪ B is 10 + 8 = 18.

Case 2.
If 8 tuples of table B are same as that of table A then the maximum possible cardinality of A ⊂ B is 8.

Case 3
If 8 tuples of table B are same as that of table then the minimum possible cardinality of A ∪ B is 10.

Case 4.
If both relations contain different tuples then the minimum possible cardinality of A ∩ B is 0.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 2.
There are different data models of which one is currently used in all business transactions. Specify it and discuss in detail.
Answer:
Relational data model is currently used in all business transactions. It is based on the concept introduced by E F Codd. It is composed of one or more tables. Tables are made up of rows and columns.

Here tables are called relations, rows are called tuples and the columns are called attributes. The advantages of this model is neither data redundancy nor complexity. Eg:

CustomerAddress
GitaAdd1
LataAdd 2
RamAdd3

Question 3.
You have to present a seminar on the topic “Keys in RDBMS”. Prepare the seminar report.
Answer:
1. Candidate Key:
It is a set of attributes that uniquely identifies a row. There may be more than candidate key and may be a combination of more than one attribute.

2. Primary Key:
A primary key is one of the Candidate Keys. It is a set of one or more attributes that can uniquely identify tuples in a relation.

3. Alternate Key:
The Candidate key that is not the primary key is called the alternate key.

4. Super Key:
A combination of a primary key with any other attribute or group of attributes is called a super key.

5. Foreign Key:
A single attribute or a set of attributes, which is a candidate key in another table, is called foreign key.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 4.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 11
Consider the relations STUDENT and GRADE given above and predict the output of the following relational operations in table format.

  1. σ (STUDENT)
    Score > 80
  2. π (STUDENT)
    RegNo, Score
  3. σ (GRADE)
    RegNo <103
  4. σ (GRADE)
    Grade = ‘B+’
  5. πRegNo, Name( σScores >70(STUDENT))

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 12

2.

RegNoScores
10170
10268
10394
10487
10577

3.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 13

4.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 14

5.

RegNoName
103Ruksana
104Nancy
105Anu

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 5.
Explain any 4 Relational Algebra Operations.
Answer:
A. SELECT operation:
SELECT operation is used to select tuples in a relation that satisfy a selection condition. Greek letter σ (sigma) is used to denote the operation. Syntax,
σcondition (relation)
eg. σsalary < 10000 (EMPLOYEE) – selects tuple whose salary is less than 10000 from EMPLOYEE relation.

B. PROJECT operation:
PROJECT operation selects certain columns from the table and discards the other columns. Greek letter π(pi) is used to denote PROJECT operation. Syntax,
πcondition (relation)
eg. πname, salary (EMPLOYEE) displays only the name and salary of all employees.

C. UNION operation:
This operation returns a relation consisting of all tuples appearing in either or both of the two specified relations. It is denoted by U. duplicate tuples are eliminated.

Union operation can take place between compatible relations only, i.e., the number and type of attributes in both the relations should be the same and also their order.

e.g. SCIENCE ∪ COMMERCE gives all the tuples in both COMMERCE and SCIENCE.

D. INTERSECTION operation:
This operation returns a relation consisting of all the tuples appearing in both of the specified relations. It is denoted by n. It can takes place only on compatible relations, e.g. FOOTBALL ∩ CRICKET returns the players who are in both football and cricket teams.

Question 6.
Why should you choose a database system instead of simply storing data in conventional files?
Answer:
Advantages of DBMS over conventional files:
1. Data Redundancy:
It means duplication of data. DBMS eliminates redundancy. DBMS does not store more than one copy of the same data.

2. Inconsistency can be avoided:
If redundancy occurs there is a chance to inconsistency. If redundancy is removed then inconsistency cannot occur.

3. Efficient data access:
It stored huge amount of data. efficiently and can be retrieved whenever a need arise.

4. Data can be shared:
The data stored in the database can be shared by the users or programs.

5. Standards can be enforced:
The data in the database follows some standards. Eg: a field ‘Name’ should have 40 characters long. Some standards are ANSI, ISO, etc.

6. Security restrictions can be applied:
The data is of great value so it must be kept secure and private. Data security means the protection of data against accidental or intentional disclosure or unauthorized destruction or modification by unauthorized person.

7. Integrity can be maintained:
It ensures that the data is to be entered in the database is correct.

8. Crash recovery:
Some times all or a portion of the data is lost when a system crashes. A good DBMS helps to recover data after the system crashed.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 7.
We have admission register, attendance register, marks register, etc. in our school to keep various details of students. Briefly describe how DBMS can replace these registers by stating any five merits.
Answer:
Advantages of DBMS:
1. Data Redundancy:
It means duplication of data. DBMS eliminates redundancy. DBMS does not store more than one copy of the same data.

2. Inconsistency can be avoided:
If redundancy occurs there is a chance to inconsistency. If redundancy is removed then inconsistency cannot occur.

3. Data can be shared:
The data stored in the database can be shared by the users or programs.

4. Standards can be enforced:
The data in the database follows some standards. Eg : a field ‘Name’ should have 40 characters long. Some standards are ANSI, ISO, etc.

5. Security restrictions can be applied:
The data is of great value so it must be kept secure and private. Data security means the protection of data against accidental or intentional disclosure or unauthorized destruction or modification by unauthorized person.

6. Integrity can be maintained:
It ensures that the data is to be entered in the databse is correct.

7. Efficient data access:
It stored huge amount of data efficiently and can be retrieved whenever a need arise.

8. Crash recovery:
Some times all or a portion of the data is lost when a system crashes. A good DBMS helps to recover data after the system crashed.

Plus Two Computer Application Database Management System Let Us Assess Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Who is responsible for managing and controlling the activities associated with the database? (1 Mark)
(a) Database administrator
(b) Programmer
(c) Native user
(d) End user
Answer:
(a) Database administrator

Question 2.
In the relational model, cardinality is the (1 Mark)
(a) number of tuples
(b) number of attributes
(c) number of tables
Answer:
(a) number of tuples

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 3.
Cartesian product in relational algebra is (1 Mark)
(a) a Unary operator
(b) a Binary operator
(c) a Ternary operator
(d) not defined
Answer:
(b) a Binary operator

Question 4.
Abstraction of the database can be viewed as (1 Mark)
(a) two levels
(b) four levels
(c) three levels
(d) one level
Answer:
(c) three level

Question 5.
In a relational model, relations are termed as (1 Mark)
(a) tuples
(b) attributes
(c) tables
(d) rows
Answer:
(c) tables

Question 6.
In the abstraction of a database system the external level is the (1 Mark)
(a) physical level
(b) logical level
(c) conceptual level
(d) view level
Answer:
(d) view level

Question 7.
Related fields in a database are grouped to form a (1 Mark)
(a) datafile
(b) data record
(c) menu
(d) bank
Answer:
(b) data record

Question 8.
A relational database developer refers to a record as (1 Mark)
(a) criteria
(b) relation
(c) tuple
(d) attribute
Answer:
(c) tuple

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 9.
An advantage of the database management approach is (1 Mark)
(a) data is dependent on programs
(b) data redundancy increases
(c) data is integrated and can be accessed by multiple programs
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(c) data is integrated and can be accessed by multiple programs

Question 10.
Data independence means (1 Mark)
(a) data is defined separately and not included in programs
(b) programs are not dependent on the physical attributes of data
(c) programs are not dependent on the logical attributes of data
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (b) and (c)

Question 11.
Key to represent relationship between tables is called (1 Mark)
(a) primary key
(b) candidate Key
(c) foreign Key
(d) alternate Key
Answer:
(c) foreign key

Question 12.
Which of the folowing operations is used if we are interested only in certain columns of a table? (1 Mark)
(a) PROJECTION
(b) SELECTION
(c) UNION
(d) SELECT
Answer:
(a) PROJECTION

Question 13.
Which of the following operations need the participating relations to be union compatible? (1 Mark)
(a) UNION
(b) INTERSECTION
(c) SET DIFFERENCE
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 14.
Which database level is closest to the users? (1 Mark)
(a) External
(b) Irttemal
(c) Physical
(d) Conceptual
Answer:
(a) View level (External)

Question 15.
The result of the UNION operation between R1 and R2 is a relation that includes (1 Mark)
(a) all the tuples of R1
(b) all the tuples of R2’
(c) all the tuples of R1 and R2
(d) all the tuples of R1 and R2 which have common columns
Answer:
(c) All the tuples of R1 and R2 (eliminating the duplication)

Question 16.
A file manipulation command that extracts some of the records from a file is called (1 Mark)
(a) SELECT
(b) PROJECT
(c) JOIN
(d) PRODUCT
Answer:
(a) SELECT

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 17.
An instance of relational schema R (A, B, C) has distinct values of A including NULL values. Which one of the following is true? (1 Mark)
(a) A is a candidate key
(b) A is not a candidate key
(c) A is a primary key
(d) Both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(a) A is a candidate key

Question 18.
How many distinct tuples are there in relation instance with cardinality 22? (1 Mark)
(a) 22
(b) 11
(c) 1
(d) none
Answer:
(a) 22

Question 19.
A set of possible data values is called (1 Mark)
(a) Attribute
(b) Degree
(c) Tuple
(d) Domain
Answer:
(d) Domain

Question 20.
Why should you choose a database system instead of simply storing data in conventional files? (5 Mark)
Answer:
Advantages of DBMS over conventional files:
1. Data Redundancy:
It means duplication of data. DBMS eliminates redundancy. DBMS does not store more than one copy of the same data.

2. Inconsistency can be avoided:
If redundancy occurs there is a chance to inconsistency. If redundancy is removed then inconsistency cannot occur.

3. Efficient data access:
It stored huge amount of data efficiently and can be retrieved whenever a need arise.

4. Data can be shared:
The data stored in the database can be shared by the users or programs.

5. Standards can be enforced:
The data in the database follows some standards. Eg: a field ‘Name’ should have 40 characters long. Some standards are ANSI, ISO, etc.

6. Security restrictions can be applied:
The data is of great value so it must be kept secure and private. Data security means the protection of data against accidental or intentional disclosure or unauthorized destruction or modification by unauthorized person.

7. Integrity can be maintained:
It ensures that the data is to be entered in the database is correct.

8. Crash recovery:
Some times all or a portion of the data is lost when a system crashes. A good DBMS helps to recover data after the system crashed.

Question 21.
Explain the different levels of data abstraction in DBMS? (3 Mark)
Answer:
Levels of Database Abstraction:

  1. Physical Level (Lowest Level): It describes how the data is actually stored in the storage medium.
  2. Logical Level (Next Higher Level): It describes what data are stored in the database.
  3. View Level (Highest level): It is closest to the users. It is concerned with the way in which the individual users view the data.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 22.
How are schema layers related to the concepts of logical and physical data independence? (3 Mark)
Answer:
Data Independence:
It is the ability to modify the scheme definition in one level without affecting the scheme definition at the next higher level.

  1. Physical Data Independence: It is the ability to modify the physical scheme without causing application programs to be rewritten.
  2. Logical Data Independence: It is the ability to modify the logical scheme without causing application programs to be rewritten.

Question 23.
Consider the instance of the EMPLOYEE relation shown in the following table. Identify the attributes, degree, cardinality, and domain of Name and Emp_code. (3 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 15
Answer:

  1. Attributes: These are column names, i.e, Emp_Code, Name, Department, Designation, and Salary.
  2. Degree(CD): The number of Columns is the Degree i.e Degree is 5(Here 5 columns).
  3. Cardinality (RC): the number of Rows is the Cardinality.

i.e. Cardinality is 4(Here 4 rows)
Domain is the pool of possible values. Domain of Name is a String(Sudheesh, Dhanya,
Fathima, Shajan.etc). Domain of Emp_Code is a number (1000,1001,1002, 1003, etc).

Question 24.
Identify primary key, candidate keys and alternate keys in the instance of EMPLOYEE relation in Question 23. (3 Mark)
Answer:
Candidate key: It is used to uniquely identify the row.

  1. Emp_code and Emp_Code + Department (Composite) are the candidate keys:
    Primary key: It is a set of one or more attributes used to uniquely identify a row.
  2. Emp_code is the primary key:
    Alternate key: A candidate key other than the primary key.

We set Emp_code as the primary key then Emp_code+ Department is the alternate key.

Question 25.
Consider the instance of the STUDENT relation shown in the following table Assume Reg_no as the primary key. (3 Mark)

  1. Identify the candidate keys and alternate keys in the STUDENT relation
  2. How are the primary key and the candidate key related?

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 16
Answer:

  1. Reg_no and Reg_no+Batch are the candidate keys. We set Reg_no as the primary key hence Reg_no+Batch is the alternate key
  2. Candidate Key: It is a set of attributes that uniquely identifies a row. There may be more than candidate key and may be a combination of more than one attribute.
  3. Primary Key: A primary key is one of the Candidate Keys. It is a set of one or more attributes that can uniquely identify tuples in a relation.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 26.
What is a database? Describe the advantages and disadvantages of using DBMS. (5 Mark)
Answer:
A Database is a collection of large volume of data.
Advantages of DBMS:
1. Data Redundancy: It means duplication of data. DBMS eliminates redundancy. DBMS does not store more than one copy of the same data.

2. Inconsistency can be avoided: If redundancy occurs there is a chance to inconsistency. If redundancy is removed then inconsistency cannot occur.

3. Efficient data access: It stored huge amount of data efficiently and can be retrieved whenever a need arise.

4. Data can be shared: The data stored in the database can be shared by the users or programs.

5. Standards can be enforced: The data in the database follows some standards. Eg: a field ‘Name’ should have 40 characters long. Some standards are ANSI, ISO, etc.

6. Security restrictions can be applied: The data is of great value so it must be kept secure and private. Data security means the protection of data against accidental or intentional disclosure or unauthorized destruction or modification by unauthorized person.

7. Integrity can be maintained: It ensures that the data is to be entered in the database is correct.

8. Crash recovery: Some times all ora portion of the data is lost when a system crashes. A good DBMS helps to recover data after the system crashed.

Question 27.
What is data independence? Explain the difference between physical and logical data independence. (3 Mark)
Answer:
Data Independence: It is the ability to modify the scheme definition in one level without affecting the scheme definition at the next higher level.

  1. Physical Data Independence: It is the ability to modify the physical scheme without causing application programs to be rewritten.
  2. Logical Data Independence: It is the ability to modify the logical scheme without causing application programs to be rewritten.

Question 28.
Enforcement of standard is an essential feature of DBMS. How are these standards applicable in a database? (3 Mark)
Answer:
There is a standard BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) in the field of Gold and ISBN (International Standard Book Number) in the field of publication. Similarly here is also some standards like ANSI(American National Standards Institute), ISO (International Organization for standardization), etc.. For example a filed “Name” should have 40 characters is a standard.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 29.
Cardinality of a table T1 is 10 and of table, T2 is 8 and the two relations are union compatible. If the cardinality of result T1 ∪ T2 is 13, then what is the cardinality of T1 ∩ T2? Justify your answer. (3 Mark)
Answer:
Cardinalty of table T1 is 10 means it has 10 rows Cardinalty of table T2 is 8 means it has 8 rows Normally T1 ∪ T2 is 10 + 8 = 18 But Here T1 ∪ T2 is 13 means after eliminating duplication of 5 rows this happened. This means 5 rows are common. That is T1 ∩ T2 is 5.

Question 30.
Cardinality of a table T1 is 10 and of table, T2 is 8 and the two relations are union compatible.

  1. What will be the maximum possible cardinality of T1 ∪ T2?
  2. What will be the minimum possible cardinality of T1 ∩ T2? (3 Mark)

Answer:
1. Degree(CD): the number of Columns is the Degree.
Cardinality (RC)-: the number of Rows is the Cardinality
T1 ∪ T2 = Sum of cardinalities of Table1 and Table2
i.e. T1 ∪ T2 = 10 + 8 = 18.

2. T1 ∩ T2 is the common rows(tuples) in T1 and T2 If there is no common tuples then T1 ∩ T2 is 0 hence the cardinality is 0.

Question 31.
Consider the relations, City (city_name, state) and Hotel (name, address, city_name). Answer the following queries in relational algebra (5 Mark)

  1. Find the names and address of hotels in Kochi.
  2. List the details of cities in Kerala state.
  3. List the names of the hotels in Thrissur.
  4. Find the names of different hotels.
  5. Find the names of hotels in Kozhikode or Munnar.

Answer:

  1. πname, address (σCity_name = “Kochi” (Hotel))
  2. πcity_name (σstate = “Kerala” (City))
  3. πname (σcity_name = “Thrissur” (Hotel))
  4. πname (Hotel)
  5. πname(σcity_name = “Kozhikode” V city_name = “Munnar” (Hotel)).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 32.
Using the instance of the EMPLOYEE relation shown in question 23, write the result of the following relational algebra expressions. (5 Mark)

  1. σDepartments=“Sales”(EMPLOYEE).
  2. σsalary> 20000 ∧ Department = “Sales” (EMPLOYEE).
  3. σSalary>20000 ∨ Department = “Sales” (EMPLOYEE).
  4. πname, salary (EMPLOYEE).
  5. πname, salaryDesignations=“Manager” (EMPLOYEE)).
  6. πname, DepartmentDesignation = “Clerk” salary > 20000(EMPLOYEE)).

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 17

2.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 18

3.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 19

4.

NameSalary
Sudheesh25000
Dhanya25000
Fathima12000
Shajan13000

5.

NameSalary
Sudheesh25000
Dhanya25000

6. No rows selected.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 33.
Consider the instance of the BORROWER and DEPOSITOR relations shown in following figure which stores the details of customers in a Bank. Answer the following queries in relational algebra. (5 Mark)

  1. Display the details of the customers who are either a depositor or a borrower.
  2. Display the name of customers who are both a depositor and a borrower.
  3. Display the details of the customers who are d positors but not borrowers.
  4. Display the name and amount of customer who is a borrower but not depositor.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 20
Answer:
1.

Acc_NoName
AC 123Albin
AC105Shabana
AC116Vishnu
AC 108Aiswarya
AC 103Rasheeda
AC 106Vishnu

2.

Acc_NoName
AC123Albin
AC108Aiswarya

3.

Acc_NoName
AC 105Shabana
AC116Vishnu

4.

NameAmount
Rasheeda25000
Vishnu25000

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 34.
Consider the instance of the CUSTOMER and BRANCH relations shown in the following table. Write the Cartesian Product of the two relations. (3 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 21
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 22
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System - 23

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Students can Download Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases Questions and Answers, Plus One zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Plus One Breathing and Exchange of Gases One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Respiration in insects is called direct because
(a) The tissues exchange O2/ CO2 directly with the air in the tubes.
(b) The tissues exchange O2/ CO2 directly with coelomic fluid.
(c) The tissues exchange O2/ CO2 directly with the air outside through body surface.
(d) Tracheal tubes exchange O2/ CO2 directly with the haemocoel which then exchange with tissues.
Answer:
(d) Tracheal tubes exchange O2/ CO2 directly with the haemocoel which then exchange with tissues.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 2.
Mark the true statement among the following with reference to normal breathing
(a) Inspiration is a passive process where as expiration is active
(b) Inspiration is a active process where as expiration is passive
(c) Inspiration and expiration are active processes
(d) Inspiration and expiration are passive processes
Answer:
(b) Inspiration is a active process where as expiration is passive

Question 3.
Inspiration and expiration are passive processes A person breathes in some volume of air by forced inspiration after having a forced expiration. This quantity of air taken in is
(a) Total lung capacity
(b) Tidal volume
(c) Vital capacity
(d) Inspiratory capacity
Answer:
(c) Vital capacity

Question 4.
Incidence of Emphysema – a respiratory disorder is high in cigarette smokers. In such cases
(a) The alveolar walls are found damaged
(b) The plasma membrane is found damaged
(c) The bronchioles are found damaged
(d) The respiratory muscles are found damaged
Answer:
(b) The plasma membrane is found damaged

Question 5.
Respiratory process is regulated by certain specialized centres in the brain. One of the following listed centres can reduce the inspiratory duration upon stimulation.
(a) Medullary inspiratory centre
(b) Pneumotaxic centre
(c) Apneustic centre
(d) Chemosensitive centre
Answer:
(b) Pneumotaxic centre

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 6.
CO2 + H2O → H2CO3 → HCO3 + H+
These all the reactions that takes place in accordance with respiration.

  1. Where these reactions takes place
  2. Which is the enzyme present here?

Answer:

  1. In blood
  2. Carbonic anhydrase

Question 7.
Fill in the table with appropriate heading values.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 1
Answer:

  1. a – Blood (Deoxygenated)
  2. b – Blood (oxygenated)
  3. c – 40
  4. d – 45

Question 8.
In the following diagram A represents Total lung capacity and B represents Vital capacity and then C represents what?
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 2
Answer:
C – Residual volume

Question 9.
Name the biological principle involved in the exchange of gas between lungs and blood.
(Transmittance, Osmosis, Diffusion, Incorporation)
Answer:
Diffusion

Question 10.
What is the percentage of oxygen transported by Haemoglobin in the form of Oxyhaemoglobin? (67%, 97%, 32%, 50%)
Answer:
97%

Plus One Breathing and Exchange of Gases Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Complete the flow chart showing inspiration

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 3
Answer:

  1. A – Nasal opening
  2. B – Nasopharynx
  3. C – Trachea
  4. D – Bronchiole

Question 2.
Oxyhaemoglobin → Oxygen + Hb

  1. Where does this process takes place?
  2. What are the factors that influence O2 dissociation curve?

Answer:

  1. In tissues
  2. pO2, pCO2, H+ concentration, temperature.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 3.
The given diagram shows the exchange of gases between alveolus and alveolar capillary.

  1. Identify X and Y.
  2. Name the Physical Process involved in gas exchange.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 4
Answer:

  1. X – CO2, Y – O2
  2. Diffusion

Question 4.
Bardiagram showing oxygen transport is shown below.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 5

  • Name the two methods of oxygen transport.
  • How much of oxygen is transported in method 1 and method 2.

Answer:

  • Methods of oxygen transport
    1. O2 is transported by RBC in the blood (oxyhaemoglobin).
    2. O2 is transported in a dissolved state through plasma.
  • About 97% of O2 is transported as oxyhemoglobin and remaining 3% is carried in a dissolved state through the plasma.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 5.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 6
From this diagram prepare a table which show the pressure difference in various regions in respiration.
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 7

Question 6.
Match the following.

PrawnSkin
CockroachLungs
ViperGills
EarthwormTrachea

Answer:

PrawnGills
CockroachTrachea
ViperLungs
EarthwormSkin

 

Question 7.
‘Emphysema’ is a term linked with ‘Respiratory system’. What is emphysema?
Answer:
Emphysema is respiratory system disorder in which alveolar walls are damaged due to which respiratory surface is decreased. Cigarette smoking is one of the major cause of emphysema.

Question 8.
Draw a flow chart showing the air passage in the human respiratory system.
(Trachea, nasal cavity, nasopharynx, bronchi, nostrils, alveoli, bronchioles, larynx)
Answer:
Nostrils → nasal cavity → nasopharynx → larynx alveoli ← branchioles ← bronchi ← Trachea.

Question 9.
Study the graph and answer the following questions.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 8

  1. What is represented by the graph?
  2. Find out the pressure at which Haemoglobin is 50% saturated with O2?

Answer:

  1. Oxygen dissociation curve
  2. 28 mm Hg

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 10.

  1. Name the structural and functional unit of lungs.
  2. Why the lungs replaces the skin in Mammals as respiratory organ.

Answer:

  1. Alveoli
  2. Lungs contain millions of alveoli which serves to store oxygen and it is richly supplied with blood capillaries. These alveolar surface area exceeds the skin.

Question 11.
The pO2 in cell cytoplasm is always lower than the capillary blood while pCO2 is greater. How do you account for this?
Answer:
In the cell cytoplasm, as a result of metabolism the CO2 accumulates and oxygen content is reduced. So pO2 in cell cytoplasm is always lower than the capillary blood.

Question 12.
A dog expires CO2. How can you correlate the relationship between the dog and grazing cattle in terms of CO2.
Answer:
Dog expires CO2 to atmosphere and it is utilised by grass during photosynthesis and that grass is utilised by cattle.

Question 13
Observe the pie diagram given below and answer the following questions.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 9
Figure showing the percentage of carbon dioxide transport.

  1. What are the three methods of CO2 transport mentioned by the letters P, Q, R?
  2. If the amount of Haemoglobin in the blood of a patient is very low. What changes you expect in the processes?

Answer:

  1. Methods of CO2 transport
    • P – Carbamino haemoglobin in combination with amino group of protein.
    • Q – Carbonic acid dissolved in plasma
    • R – as bicarbonates
  2. Reduce the formation of carbaminohaemoglobin and formation of bicarbonates also reduces.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 14.
Find the odd one in each group in Column Awrite in Column B and write the reason in Column C.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 10
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 11

Question 15.
Analyse the concept map given below and if have mistakes reconstruct it.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 12
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 13

Question 16.
A person exhaled nearly more than 3000ml of air during a breathing exercise. How do you justify that act?
Answer:
During breathing excercise one can exhale the air nearly of his vital capacity which averages to 3500ml. During normal respiration only tidal volume (500ml) is exhaled.

Question 17.
In orderto give the awareness about healthy practices to reduce respiratory disorders, prepare a pamphlet.
Answer:

  • Bronchitis, Bronchial asthma, Emphysema, Pneumonia, occupational lung disease are some respiratory disorders.
  • Stop cigarette smoking to prevent emphysema, bronchitis and bronchial asthma.
  • Use protective clothes and gears in work places to prevent occupational lung diseases.
  • Regular health check-up, use of antibiotic drugs and bronchodilator drugs by the advice of doctor.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 18.
The venous blood in the lungs has a pCO2 of 46mm Hg. Should the alveolar pCO2 exceeds or be less than 46mm Hg to result in diffusion of CO2 from the blood into alveolus?
Answer:
The alveolar pCO2 must be less than 46mm Hg. Then only there will be difference in the partial pressure and diffusion occurs from the higher concentration to a lower concentration.

Question 19.
Human respiration is controlled by intercostal muscles in the ribs and diaphragm. Justify this statement.
Answer:
The human respiration is controlled by the contraction and relaxation of intercostal muscles in the ribs. Due to the contraction the thoracic space increases and the atmospheric air comes inside to maintain the pressure.

When intercostal muscles relax the thoracic volume reduces and due to high pressure the air expels outward. This is known as expiration.

Question 20.
Observe the figure explaining difference in partial pressure of oxygen in different parts of body.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 14

  1. Explain the importance of partial pressure of oxygen in the gas exchange.
  2. What may be the partial pressure of oxygen in the tissue for effective gas transport?

Answer:

  1. Difference in the partial pressure of oxygen in the alveolar air and in the blood results in the exchange of gases by simple diffusion.
  2. The partial pressure of oxygen in the tissue is less than 90mm Hg.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 21.
While analysing the blood of normal healthy person, it has been found that the amount of HCO3 ions in his venous blood is much higher than his arterial blood. How do you account for this increase of HCO3 ions.
Answer:
The amount of CO2 in venous blood is much higher than that of arterial blood. Since major portion of CO2 is transported through blood as HCO3 ions. The amount of HO3 remains high in venous blood.

Question 22.
Place the following in the correct order.
Lungs expand, rib rise, air enters lungs, external intercostal muscle contract, thorax expands.
Answer:
External intercostal muscle contract → rib rise Lungs expand ← Thorax expands air enters lungs.

Question 23.
Pneumatoxic centre has an important role in regulating rate of respiration. Prepare a flow chart representing the regulation of respiration by pneumatoxic centre during strenuous exercise.
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 15

Plus One Breathing and Exchange of Gases Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Transport of CO2 as Bicarbonates.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 16

  1. Copy the diagram and fill the gaps.
  2. Name the other ways of CO2 transport.
  3. If blood chlorine level decrease, does it affect gas transport? Justify.

Answer:

1.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 17

2. Other ways of CO2 transport:

  • Carbamino haemoglobin
  • Carbonic acid

3. Yes. Decrease in chloride level affects CO2 transport. During CO2 transport bicarbonate ions formed within the erythrocytes (RBC) diffuse out into the plasma. It upsets the ionic equilibrium and electrical balance between RBC and plasma.

To regain the lost balance an equal number of chloride (Cl ) ions diffuse into RBC from plasma. This is called chloride shift or Hamburger phenomenon.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 2.
Analyse the flow chart.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 18

  1. Distinguish the function of external and internal intercostal muscles.
  2. Draw a flow chart explaining inspiration.

Answer:

1. During inspiration external intercostal muscle contracts and internal intercostal muscle relaxes. External intercostal muscle and internal intercostal muscles are antagonistic in action

2.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 19

Question 3.
Pharynx is a common passage for air and food.

  1. Name the part for the passage of food.
  2. Name the part for the passage of air.
  3. How do these passagework without any problems?

Answer:

  1. Oropharynx
  2. Nasopharynx
  3. Glottis is the opening of nasopharynx into trachea. During swallowing glottis can be covered by a thin elastic cartilagenous flap called epiglottis to prevent the entry of food into the larynx.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 4.
Following figure shows a microscopic section through the alveoli in the lungs of man.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 20
Give the features visible in the diagram that help to increase the rate of diffusion across the wall of the alveoli into the blood.
Answer:

  1. Surface area is increased by alveoli.
  2. Presence of capillaries
  3. Thin wall helps to increase the rate of diffusion. (The diffusion membrane is made up of three layers namely the thin squamous epithelium of alveoli, the endothelium of alveolar capillaries and the basement substance in between)

Question 5.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 21

  1. Which of the above graph represents normal condition?
  2. What would be the reason of abnormality of graph?
  3. What are the symptoms shown in such condition?

Answer:

  1. ‘A’ represents normal condition.
  2. The abnormality is due to the low pO2 in blood.
  3. The symptoms include headache, nausea, dizziness and even death.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 6.
A person inhales to his maximum capacity and then he exhales also to his maximum.

  1. What term would you use for the volume of air thus breathed out.
  2. What is the volume of air thus breathed out?
  3. Suppose he hold his breath after that maximum expiration for 5 seconds would there be any exchange of respiratory gases occuring in lungs during that period. How?

Answer:

  1. Vital capacity
  2. 3.5 – 4.5 litres
  3. Yes. Because of residual volume. The volume of air that still remains in the lungs after a forceful expiration is called residual volume. It is about 1500ml in man.

Question 7.
Human beings have a significant ability to maintain and moderate the respiratory rhythm to suit the demand of body tissues-substantiate.
Answer:
This is done by the neural system. A specialised centre present in the medulla region of the brain called respiratory rhythm centre is primarily responsible for this regulation. Another centre present in the pons region of the brain called pneumotaxic centre can moderate the functions of the respiratory rhythm centre.

Neural signal from this centre can reduce the duration of inspiration and thereby alter the respiratory rate. Achemosensitive area is situated adjacent to the rhythm centre which is highly sensitive to CO2 and hydrogen ions.

Increase in these substances can be activate this centre and make necessary adjustments in the respiratory process. Receptors associated with aortic arch also send necessary signals to the rhythm centre to adjust respiratory rate.

Question 8.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 22

  1. Redraw the graph to correct the mistake
  2. Name the graph
  3. Which are the factors that affect this graph.

Answer:
1.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 23

2. Oxygen dissociation curve

3. pO2, pCO2, H+ concentration and temperature are the factors that affect oxygen dissociation curve.

Plus One Breathing and Exchange of Gases NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Define vital capacity. What is its significance?
Answer:
Vital capacity (VC):
The maximum volume of air a person can breathe in after a forced expiration. This includes ERV (Expiratory Reserve Volume), TV (Tidal volume) and IRV (Inspiratory Reserve volume) of the maximum volume of air a person can breathe out after a forced inspiration.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 2.
State the volume of air remaining in the lungs after a normal breathing.
Answer:
Functional Residual Capacity (FRC). Volume of air that will remain in the lungs after a normal expiration.
This includes ERV + RV
ERV = 1000 to 1100ml
RV= 1100 to 1200ml
FRC = 2100 to 2300ml

Question 3.
What are the major transport mechanisms for CO2? Explain.
Answer:
Transport of Carbon dioxide CO2 is carried by haemoglobin as carbamino-haemoglobin (about 20-25 per cent). This binding is related to the partial pressure of CO2, pO2 is a major factor which could affect this binding.

When pCO2 is high and pO2 is low as in the tissues, more binding of carbon dioxide occurs whereas, when the pCO2 is low and pO2 is high as in the alveoli, dissociation of CO2 from carbamino- haemoglobin takes place, i.e., CO2 which is bound to Haemoglobin from the tissues is delivered at the alveoli.

RBCs contain a very high concentration of enzyme, carbonic anhydrase and minute quantities of the same is present in the plasma too. This enzyme facilitates the following reaction in both directions
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases - 24
At the tissue site where partial pressure of CO2 is high due to catabolism, CO2 diffuses into blood (RBCs and plasma) and forms HCO3 and H+. At the alveolar site where pCO2 is low, the reaction proceeds in the opposite direction leading to the formation of CO2 and H2O.

Thus CO2 trapped as bicarbonate at the tissue level and transported to the alveoli is released out as CO2. Every 100 ml of deoxygenated blood delivers approximately 4ml of CO2 to the alveoli.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 4.
What will be the pO2 and pCO2 in the atmospheric air compared to those in the alveolar air?
(i) pO2 lesser, pCO2 higher
(ii) pO2 higher, pCO2 lesser
(iii) pO2 higher, pCO2 higher
(iv) pO2 lesser, pCO2 lesser
Answer:
(ii) pO2 higher will create the pressure gradient to facilitate the movement of O2 from atmosphere to alveoli and pCO2 lesser will create the movement of CO2 from alveoli to atmosphere.

Question 5.
What is the effect of pCO2 on oxygen transport?
Answer:
Binding of oxygen with haemoglobin is primarily related to partial pressure of O2. Partial pressure of CO2, hydrogen ion concentration and temperature are the other factors which can interfere with this binding. Increased partial pressure of CO2 can increase haemoglobin’s affinity towards oxygen and vice-versa is also true.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 6.
What happens to the respiratory process in a man going up a hill?
Answer:
When a man going uphill or doing some strenuous exercise then there is more consumption of oxygen. This decreases the partial pressure of oxygen in haemoglobin resulting in more demand of haemoglobin. As a result there is an increased breathing rate to fill the gap.

Plus One Breathing and Exchange of Gases Multple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which one is the cofactor of carbonic anhydrase?
(a) Iron
(b) Zinc
(c) Copper
(d) Magnesium
Answer:
(b) Zinc

Question 2.
Skin is an accessory organ or respiration in
(a) human
(b) frog
(c) rabbit
(d) lizard
Answer:
(b) frog

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 3.
Which of the following respiratory organs are present in spiders and scorpions?
(a) gill slit
(b) Gills
(c) Gill books
(d) Book lungs
Answer:
(d) Book lungs

Question 4.
When the body is rapidly oxidising fats, excess ketone bodies accumulate resulting in
(a) pyruvic acid
(b) lactic acid
(c) ketoacidosis
(d) ATP
Answer:
(c) ketoacidosis

Question 5.
Oxygen dissociation curve is
(a) sigmoid
(b) parabolic
(c) hyperbolic
(d) straight line
Answer:
(a) sigmoid

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases
Question 6.
Which one of the following statements is incorrect?
(a) The residual air in lungs slightly decreases the efficiency of respiration in mammals
(b) The presence of non-respiratory air sacs, increases the efficiency of respiration in birds
(c) In insects, circulating body fluids serve to distribute oxygen to tissues
(d) The principle of countercurrent flow facilitates
Answer:
(a) The residual air in lungs slightly decreases the efficiency of respiration in mammals

Question 7.
Haemoglobin is having maximum affinity with
(a) carbon dioxide
(b) carbon monoxide
(c) oxygen
(d) ammonia
Answer:
(b) carbon monoxide

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 8.
Which is called Hamburger shift?
(a) Hydrogen shift
(b) Bicarbonate shift
(c) Chloride shift
(d) Sodium shift
Answer:
(c) Chloride shift

Question 9.
Left shift of oxyhaenoglobin curve is noticed under
(a) normal temperature and pH
(b) low temperature and high pH
(c) low pH and high temperature
(d) low pH and low temperature
Answer:
(b) low temperature and high pH

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 10.
Read the following statements and select the correct one.
(a) The H+ released from carbonic acid combines with haemoglobin to form haemoglobinic acid
(b) Oxyhaemoglobjn of erythrocytes is alkaline
(c) More than 70% of carbon dioxide is transferred from tissues to the lungs in the form of carbamino compounds
(d) In a healthy person, the haemoglobin content is . more than 25gm per 100mL
Answer:
(a) The H+ released from carbonic acid combines with haemoglobin to form haemoglobinic acid

Question 11.
In blood, carbon dioxide is transported majorly as
(a) sodium carbonate
(b) carboxyhaemoglobin
(c) bicarbonate
(d) carbon dioxide as such
Answer:
(c) bicarbonate

Question 12.
Most of the carbon dioxide is transported in blood as a gas
(a) gas
(b) carbaminohaemoglobin
(c) serum carbaminoproteins
(d) HCO3
Answer:
(b) carbaminohaemoglobin

Question 13.
How many molecules of oxygen can bind to a molecule of haemoglobin?
(a) One
(b) Two
(c) Three
(d) Four
Answer:

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 14.
When carbon dioxide concentration in blood increases, breathing becomes
(a) shallower and slow
(b) there is no effect on breathing
(c) slow and deep
(d) faster and deeper
Answer:

Question 15.
The total number of lobes and alveoli present in both the lungs of man are
(a) 17 and 30 million, respectively
(b) 5 and 300 million, respectively
(c) 19 and 300 million, respectively
(d) 18 and 300 lakh, respectively
Answer:
(b) 5 and 300 million, respectively

Question 16.
What is vital capacity of our lungs?
(a) Inspiratory reserve volume plus tidal volume
(b) Total lung capacity minus expiratory reserve volume
(c) Inspiratory reserve volume plus expiratory reserve volume
(d) Total lung capacity minus residual volume
Answer:
(c) Inspiratory reserve volume plus expiratory reserve volume

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 17.
When the oxygen supply to the tissues is inadequate, the condition is
(a) hypoxia
(b) asphyxia
(c) pleuracy
(d) anoxia
Answer:
(a) hypoxia

Question 18.
Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome (SARS)
(a) is caused by a variant of Pneumococcuspneumoniae
(b) is caused by a variant of the common cold virus (corona virus)
(c) is an acute form of asthma
(d) affects non-vegetarians much faster than
Answer:
(b) is caused by a variant of the common cold virus (corona virus)

Question 19.
During inspiration, the diaphragm
(a) expands
(b) shows no change
(c) contracts and flattens
(d) relaxes to become dome-shaped
Answer:
(c) contracts and flattens

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Breathing and Exchange of Gases

Question 20.
The oxygen toxicity is related with
(a) blood poisoning
(b) collapsing of alveolar walls
Answer:
(c) failure of venti

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Students can Download Chapter 7 Transport in Plants Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Plus One Botany Transport in Plants One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which of the following statements does not apply to reverse osmosis?
(a) it is used for water purification.
(b) In this technique, a pressure greater than the osmotic pressure is applied to the system
(c) It is a passive process
(d) It is an active process
Answer:
(c) It is a passive process

Question 2.
Which one of the following will not directly affect transpiration?
(a) Light
(b) wind speed
(c) temperature
(d) chlorophyll content of leaves
Answer:
(d) chlorophyll content of leaves

Question 3.
The lower surface of leaf will have a number of stomata in a
(a) isobilateral leaf
(b) dorsiventral leaf
(c) both a and b
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) dorsiventral leaf

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question 4.
The form of sugar transported through phloem is
(a) Fructose
(b) Sucrose
(c) glucose
(d) ribose
Answer:
(b) sucrose

Question 5.
The process of guttation takes place
(a) when the root pressure is high and the rate of transpiration is low
(b) when the root pressure is low and the rate of transpiration is high
(c) when the root pressure equals the rate of transpiration
(d) when the root pressure, as well as rate of transpiration, are high.
Answer:
(a) when the root pressure is high and the rate of transpiration is low

Question 6.
Which of the following is an example of imbibition
(a) uptake of water by root hair
(b) exchange of gases in stomata
(c) swelling of seed when putting in the soil
(d) opening of stomata
Answer:
(c) swelling of seed when putting in the soil

Question 7.
What will happen to a plant cell when kept in hypotonic solution?
Answer:
Cell become turgid

Question 8.
How are protoplasm of adjacent cells connected to each other?
Answer:
Plasmodesmata

Question 9.
Name the process in which water drops ooze out from margins of leaves.
Answer:
Guttation

Question 10.
The C4 plants are twice as efficient as C3 plants in terms of fixing C02 but lose only as much water as C3 plants for the same amount of C02 fixed.
Answer:
Half

Question 11.
Plants could be grown in a nutrient solution in the complete absence of soil. Name the technique.
Answer:
Hydroponics

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question 12.
Name the hormone which signals the closure of stomata during severe drought or severe solar radiation.
Answer:
Abscisic acid (ABA)

Question 13.
Name the physical phenomena associated with the first step of seed germination.
Answer:
Imbibition

Question 14.
What causes the leaves of grasses to roll in dry weather?
Answer:
Presence of bulliform cells or motor cells

Question 15.
The diagram below shows the cells placed in hypertonic solution and hypotonic solution. If the diagram ‘B’ is ‘turgid’ what will be diagram ‘A’?
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants img1
Answer:
A – Flaccid

Question 16.
The excess of one element may inhibit the uptake of another element. What is this effect called?
Answer:
Toxicity of micronutrients

Question 17.
Name the type of obligatory association found in pinus seeds that promote germination.
Answer:
Mycorrhiza

Question 18.
A plant cell when kept in a certain solution got plasmolysed. What was the nature of this solution?
Answer:
Hypertonic solution

Question 19.
Why turgidity of the cell essential for plants?
Answer:
It helps to maintain plant organs in normal shape

Question 20.
Absorption of water from the soil by dry seeds increases the, thus helping seedlings to come out of the soil.
Answer:
Pressure

Question 21.
A flowering plant is planted in an earthen pot and irrigated. Urea is added to make the plant grow faster, but after some time the plant dies. Give reason.
Answer:
It is due to exosmosis.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question. 22
Identify a type of molecular movement which is highly selective and requires special membrane proteins, but does not require energy.
Answer:
Facilitated diffusion

Question 23.
Smaller, lipid-soluble molecules diffuse faster through cell membrane, but the movement of hydrophilic substances are facilitated by certain biomolecules. Name it.
Answer:
Protein

Question. 24
The bending of wooden doors during rainy reasons is due to physiological phenomenon. Name it.
Answer:
Imbibition

Plus One Botany Transport in Plants Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Give below is a diagram, where hypotonic solution is separated by a semipermeable membrane from a hypertonic solution and kept for a few hours.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants img2

 

 

  1. In which direction will the solvent move? From X to Y or Y to X.
  2. Name the process of movement of the solvent.

Answer:

  1. X to Y
  2. Osmosis

Question 2.
Differences between the following.
Diffusion and Osmosis
Answer:
1. Diffusion:
It is the movement of solute from the region of higher concentration to region of lower concentration.

2. Osmosis:
It is the movement of solvent from the region of higher concentration to region of lower concentration through semipermiable membrane

Question 3.
Differences between Guttation and transpiration
Answer:
1. Guttation:
Loss of water in the form of water droplets from the margin of leaves through hydathode.
2. Transpiration:
It is the loss of water in the form of water vapour from the surface of leaves through stomata.

Question 4.
Both the xylem and phloem are tubular structures. One is unidirectional and the other is bi-directional. Comment on it.
Answer:
Phloem is bidirectional in order to transport prepared food from leaves to different parts of the plant and translocates stored food from downward to upward for the growth of buds.

Question 5.
Ramu while observing the root nodules of pea plant, noticed the pink colour. Sita said that it is due to the presence of a substance. Can you name the substance and write its role.
Answer:
Leg hemoglobin. It is an 02 scavenger. It create anaerobic condition for enzyme Nitrogenase during N2 Fixation

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question 6.
Match the following :

Column AColumn B
1) Imbibition

2)  Exosmosis

3) Diffusion

4) Transpiration

a) Leaves

b) Perfumes

c) Dried grapes

d)  Pickles

Answer:

Column AColumn B
1) Imbibition

2)  Exosmosis

3) Diffusion

4) Transpiration

Dried grapes

Pickles

Perfumes

Leaves

Question 7.
Water is absorbed by the root hairs, It can move deeper into root layers by two distinct pathways.

  1. Write the name of the pathways.
  2. Which substance controls water transport in the endodermal region?

Answer:

  1. Apoplast pathway & Symplast pathway
  2. Suberin

Question 8.
“Root pressure is inadequate to lift the water molecules in taller plants like Eucalyptus”.

  1. Which theory is successfully explaining the Ascent of sap in plants like Eucalyptus?
  2. Who proposed this theory?

Answer:

  1. Transpiration pull – cohesion tension theory
  2. Dixon & Jolly

Question 9.
Fresh mangoes can survive fora prolonged period of time when they are placed in highly concentrated salt solution. Some physiological changes take place in the cell. Comment on the changes.
Answer:

  • Exosmosis.
  • Bacteria can not survive in hypertonic solutions.

Question 10.
Pure Honey checks the growth of microorganisms. Justify based on your knowledge in osmosis.
Answer:
Pure honey is hypertonic .bacterial cells shrink and die due to plasmolysis.

Question 11.
A fesh mango pieces is placed in water containing high concentration of sodium chloride.
Exosmosis, Plasmolysis, Deplasmolysis, Imbibition

  1. Select and write down the appropriate terms given above to represent the sequence of events leading to shrinking.
  2. What is plasmolysis?

Answer:

  1. Exosmosis – Plasmolysis
  2. The withdrawal of the protoplast from the cell wall due to exosmosis.

Question 12.
Ψws + Ψp

  1. Expand the equation.
  2. Why solute potential is always negative?

Answer:
1.

  • Ψw – Water potential
  • Ψs – Solute potential,
  • Ψp – pressure potential

2. Since adding solute reduces water potential, it is always negative.

Question 13.
Observe the given figure showing the pathways of water movement in the plant body and answer the questions.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants img3

  1. Identify A and B pathways.
  2. In which of the above pathways does water move beyond endodermis?

Answer:

  1. A – Apoplast pathway
    B – Symplast pathway
  2. Apoplast pathway

Question 14.
Apoplast and symplast pathways are the two distinct pathways of water to move deeper into the root layers. Which is the only pathway through which water can enter the vascular cylinder and why?
Answer:
Symplast – Because endodermal wall is suberised.

Question 15.
When a freshly collected Spirogyra filament is kept in 10% potassium nitrate solution, it is observed that the protoplasm shrinks in size:

  1. What is this phenomenon called?
  2. What will happen if the filament is replaced in distilled water?

Answer:

1. This phenomenon is called plasmolysis. (The shrinkage of protoplast from the cell wall under the influence of a strong solution/ hypertonic solution is called plasmolysis.

2. If filaments are replaced in water the protoplast starts swelling. It comes in contact with cell wall and cell regains its original size.
The swelling up of plasmolyzed protoplast under the influence of a weak solution or water is called deplasmolysis.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question 16.
1. In an experiment, Deepa put a piece of raw mango in 0.5M salt solution and another piece in 1M salt solution. Which mango piece will get plasmolyzed fast?
2. Water potential of solution A is -0.3 bar and that of solution B is -0.1 bar. If solution A is separated from solution B by a semi-permeable membrane water molecules will flow from to
Answer:

  1. Mango piece put in 1 M salt solution get plasmolysed rapidly than. 0.5M solution.
  2. B (-1.1) to A (-0.3)

Question 17.
An unavoidable waste mechanism is found in higher plants during high temperature.

  1. Name the process.
  2. Why is it said so?

Answer:

  1. Transpiration
  2. It has merits and demerits. Since water and minerals are absorbed and translocated to distant sites by this process but 99% of water absorbed is transpired out.

Question 18.
Water moves up against gravity and even for a tree of 20 m height, the tip receives water within two hours. Which is the most important physiological phenomenon responsible for the upward movement of water is
Answer:
Transpirational pull.

Question 19.
Osmosis is a special kind of diffusion, in which water diffuses across the cell membrane. What are the factors influence rate and direction of osmosis?
Answer:
Pressure and concentration gradient.

Question 20.
When a tea bag is placed in a cup of water, which phenomenon is observed? Explain the phenomenon.
Answer:
Diffusion. It is the movement of molecules from higher concentration to lower concentration.

Question 21.
Phloem transport is bidirectional while xylem transport is unidirectional. Give a reason?
Answer:
Phloem transport is bidirectional because prepared food materials translocated to storage regions. These storage food materials are again transported to growing regions for the growth of buds. So, through phloem downward and upward transport takes place. Xylem transport is unidirectional because water and minerals are absorbed and conducted upwards.

Question 22.
Write the suitable term in each pair

  1. apoplast: through cell wall; ………: through cytoplasm
  2. endosmosis: turgid; exosmosis: ………..
  3. ………..: unidirectional; phloem transport: bidirectional
  4. Mg : macroelement: …………: microelement

Answer:

  1. Symplast
  2. Flaccid
  3. Xylem
  4. Mn

Question 23.
‘Ψw = Ψs + Ψp Expand the equation
Answer:

  • Ψw = Water potential is the sum of
  • Ψs = Solute potential solute potential
  • Ψp = pressure potential and pressure potential.

Question 24.
Bacteria cannot live in highly salted pickle. Why?
Answer:
The bacterial cell undergoes plasmolysis in saltwater. This results shrinking of protoplast. Hence, Bacteria cannot live in saltwater.

Question 25.
Observe the following diagram showing the movement of water in plant cells. Identify 1 & 2.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants img4
Answer:

  1. Apoplastic pathway
  2. Sym plastic pathway

Question 26.
A few Pieces of potato were weighed and kept in saltwater overnight. In the morning they are weighed again.

  1. What will be the change in weight?
  2. Name the process responsible for the change.

Answer:

  1. The weight of potato is decreased.
  2. Exosmosis results the loss of water from the potato, it leads to plasmolysis.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question 27.
Before eating Grapes, it is advised to wash them well by keeping them in water for some time to wash off the pesticides on them. However, it is more advisable to keep the Grapes in saltwater than in fresh water to make them safer for consumption. Suggest an explanation for this.
Answer:
The grapes put in saltwater are safer for consumption because poisonous chemicals present in grapes are come out by the process of exosmosis.

Question 28.
The cytoplasm in a plant cell is surrounded by both cell wall and cell membrane. The specificity of transport of substances are mostly across the cell membrane. Give reason.
Answer:
The cell wall is freely permeable to water and substances in solutions but membrane is selectively permeable.

Question 29.
In a girdled plant, when water is supplied to the leaves above the girdle, leaves may remain green for sometime then wilt and ultimately die. What does it indicate?
Answer:
Girdling removes phloem and hence phloem transport is blocked.

Question 30.
Movement of substances in xylem is unidirectional while in phloem it is bidirectional. Why?
Answer:
Xylem conducts”Water and minerals in upward direction only but phloem conducts food in downward direction and in spring season stored food is again transported to upward for bud growth. Hence movement of substances in xylem is unidirectional while in phloem it is bidirectional.

Question 31.
Plants absorb water from the soil through root hairs by two pathways?

  1. Name the pathways
  2. Explain any one of them

Answer:

  1. Apoplastic pathway and symplastic pathway
  2. In apoplastic pathway, water transport takes place through the nonliving part of the cell (cell wall).

Question 32.
What is the water potential of pure water at atmospheric pressure? What happens to it when solutes are added to it?
Answer:
Zero, Water potential is decreased and comes to more negative values.

Question 33.
Transport of hydrophilic substances through cell membrane is difficult. Do you agree ? Give reason.
Answer:
Yes, because the cell membrane contains lipids.

Question 34.
What is meant loading and unloading of phloem?
Answer:
The entering of sugar into sieve tube is called loading and movement of sugar out of sieve tube into storage tissues is called unloading.

Question 35.
Root pressure theory is not adequate for explaining water movement up a long day plant. Why?
Answer:
It is used for explaining water movement up in herbaceous plants but in long plants, it is explained by the transpiration pull theory.

Question 36.
Why is energy required to develop root pressure?
Answer:
Every activity requires energy. Root pressure develops due to activity of living cells of the root.

Question 37.
What happens when a pressure greater than the atmospheric pressure is applied to pure water or a solution?
Answer:
When a pressure greater than atmospheric pressure is applied to pure water or a solution, its water potential is increased.

Question 38.
How is mycoorrhizal association helpful in absorption of water and mineral in plants?
Answer:
Mycorrhizal association help in water and mineral absorption. Fungal hyphae have a very large surface area that absorbs mineral ions and water from a much larger volume of soil.

Question 39.
Give an example for obligate mycorrhizal asociation.
Answer:
Mycorrhizal association is found in pinus seeds i.e Pinus seeds do not germinate and establish without mycorrhiza.

Question 40.
Downhill and uphill movement are used in transport of molecules through membrane.

  1. Which is the above process that requires energy?
  2. Which is the above process not dependent on concentration gradient. Why?

Answer:

  1. uphill transport is active transport requires energy.
  2. Downhill transport, because molecules move from the region of higher concentration to the region of lower concentration.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question 41.
Two pathways of water movement into the deeper layers of root ie; from epidermis to xylem vessels

  1. Name the two pathways
  2. Which is the substance present in the endodermis block one pathway?

Answer:

  1. Apoplastic pathway and symplastic pathway
  2. suberin in casperian strips

Question 42.
In plants translocation of photosynthates occur in 2 ways but water and mineral transport in one way.

  1. Which is the two way suggested?
  2. Name the conducting channel for both.

Answer:
1. Food translocated from leaves to storage regions called downward transport. During spring season food again transported upward for bud growth. So such type of transport is bidirectional.

2. Food transported through phloem and water and mineral transported through the xylem.

Question 43.
In plants stomata opens during day time and close during night time.
How is decreasing water potential of guard cell affect the opening and closing of stomata?
Answer:
If decreasing the water potential of guard cell, water enters into guard cell from the subsidiary and it becomes turgid, stomata open.

Plus One Botany Transport in Plants Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
“Water is transient in plants. Less than 1% of water reaching the leaves is used in photosynthesis and plant growth’’. What is the fate of remaining percentage of water? Specify the phenomenon? Give its significance in plants?
Answer:
99% of water absorbed is lost through transpiration.

  1. It provides cooling effect to leaves and other organs.
  2. It promotes mineral absorption.
  3. It helps to maintain the shape and structure of plants by keeping up its turgidity.

Question 2.
What are the factors responsible for ascent of xylem sap in plants?
Answer:

  • Cohesion: The mutual attraction between water molecules
  • Adhesion: The attraction of molecules to polar surface e g., the surface of tracheary elements
  • Surface Tension: The water molecules are attracted to each other in liquid phase more than to water in gas phase.

All these properties provide water high tensile strength (an ability to resist a pulling force) as well as high capillarity (ability to rise in a thin tube).
In plants, capillarity is aided by the small diameter of both tracheids and vessels.

Question 3.
The solution taken in the beaker have lower solute concentration than thistle funel, osmosis starts and continues

  1. What will hapen if more solute is added in the thistle funel ?
  2. Which is the solution mentioned above have higher water potential?
  3. Which is the method possible to change flow of solvent molecules?

Answer:

  1. Diffusion takes place faster
  2. solution was taken in the beaker
  3. apply greater pressure than atmospheric pressure in solution of thistle funel.

Question 4.
Look at the following figure in which two chambers, A and B, containing solutions are separated by a semipermeable membrane. Answer the following questions.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants img5

  1. Solution of which chamber has a lower water potential
  2. In which direction will osmosis occur?
  3. Which solution has a higher solute potential?
  4. If one chamber has a Ψ of -2000KPa and the other -1000 KPa, which is the chamber that has the higher Ψ?

Answer:

  1. Solution in B chamber has lower water potential.
  2. Osmosis occurs from a to b.
  3. A solution has higher solute potential.
  4. The chamber having -ve 1000K Pa has the higher psi

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question 5.
Identify the following.

  1. Stress hormone
  2. The shrinking of protoplasm due to continuous exosmosis
  3. The positive pressure develops within the xylem of roots due to the absorption of water and minerals.

Answer:

  1. Abscisic acid
  2. Plasmolysis
  3. Root pressure

Plus One Botany Transport in Plants NCERT Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are the factors affecting the rate of diffusion?
Answer:

  • Factors affecting the rate of diffusion:
  • Gradient of Concentration
  • Permeability of membrane
  • Temperature
  • Pressure

Question 2.
What are porins? What role do they play in diffusion?
Answer:
The porins are proteins that form huge pores in the outer membranes of the plastids, mitochondria and some bacteria allowing molecules up to the size of small proteins to pass through. Thus porins faciliate diffusion.

Question 3.
Decribe the role played by protein pumps during active transport in plants.
Answer:
Active transport uses energy to pump molecules against a concentration gradient. Active transport is carried out by membrane – proteins.

Question 4.
Explain why pure water has maximum water potential?
Answer:
Water molecules possess kinetic energy. In liquid and gaseous form they are in random motion that is both rapid and constant. The greater the concentration of water in a system, the greater is its kinetic energy or ‘water potential’.

Hence, it is obvious that pure water will have the greatest water potential if two systems containing water are in contact, random movement of water molecules will result in net movement of water molecules from the system with higher energy to the one with lower energy. Thus water will move from the system containing water at higher water potential to having low wate potential.

This process of movement of substances down a gradient of free energy is called diffusion. Water. potential is denoted by the Greek symbol Psi and is expressed in pressure units such as pascals(Pa). By convention, the water potential of pure water at standard temperatures, which is not under any pressure, is taken to be zero.

Question 5.
What happens when a pressure greater than the atmospheric pressure is applied to pure water or a solution?
Answer:
Under constant temerature the volume of liquid varies inversely to pressure. Moreover, if greater pressure is applied then it will change the state of the matter from liquid to soild at a given temperature. Any liquid will abide by these laws.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question 6.
Discuss the factors responsible for ascent of xylem sap in plants.
Answer:
The transpiration driven ascent of xylem sap depends mainly on the following physical properties of water:

  • Cohesion – the mutual attraction between water molecules.
  • Adhesion – the attraction of water molecules to polar surfaces (such as the surface of tracheary elements).
  • Surface Tension – water molecules are attracted to each other in the liquid phase more than to water in the gas phase.

These properties give water high tensile strength, i.e., an ability to resist a pulling force, and high capillarity, I ‘.e., the ability to rise in thin tubes. In plants capillarity is aided by the small diameter of the tracheary elements – the tracheids and vessel elements.

Plus One Botany Transport in Plants Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Closure of stomata due to water stress is brought about by
(A) Auxin
(B) Ethylene
(C) Abscisic acid
(D) Cytokinin
Answer:
(C) Abscisic acid

Question 2.
The most common type of transpiration is
(A) Stomatal
(B) Cuticular
(C) Lenticular
(D) Foliar
Answer:
(A) Stomatal

Question 3.
All the following include osmosis except
(A) Passage of water from root hair to adjacent cells
(B) Passage of water from lower xylem to upper xylem
(C) Passage of water from xylem vessel to mesophyll cell
(D) The entry of water into root hair from soil solution
Answer:
(B) Passage of water from lower xylem to upper xylem

Question 4.
Stomatal opening and closure are due to
(A) Presence of gases inside leaves
(B) Gene action
(C) Pressure offered by guard cells
(D) Pressure offered by subsidiary cells
Answer:
(C) Pressure offered by guard cells

Question 5.
Translocation of sugars is correlated by
(A) Boron
(B) Iron
(C) Molybdenum
(E) Calcium
Answer:
(A) Boron

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question 6.
Identify the wrong statement of the following
(A) Root pressure is a positive pressure that develops in the xylem sap of the root of some plants.
(B) Water molecules remain attached to one another by a strong mutual force called cohesion force
(C) Guttation is frequently seen in herbaceous plants growing under the conditions of low soil moisture and low atmospheric humidity
(D) In monocot leaves, guard cells remain dumbbell-shaped and their cell walls are thickened only in the middle
Answer:
(C) Guttation is frequently seen in herbaceous plants growing under the conditions of low soil moisture and low atmospheric humidity

Question 7.
In which of the following plants, will there be no transpiration?
(A) Plants living in deserts
(B) Plants growing in hilly regions
(C) Aquatic submerged plants
(D) Aquatic plants with floating leaves
Answer:
(C) Aquatic submerged plants

Question 8.
When a cell is placed in hypertonic solution
(A) Exosmois occurs and the cell becomes turgid
(B) Endosmosis occurs and the cell becomes turgid
(C) Exosmosis occurs and the cell becomes plasmolysed
(D) Endosmosis occurs and the cell becomes plasmolysed
Answer:
(C) Exosmosis occurs and the cell becomes plasmolysed

Question 9.
The thin film of water covering soil particles and held strongly by attractive forces is called
(A) Hygroscopic water
(B) Runaway water
(C) Gravitational water
(D) Capillary water
Answer:
(A) Hygroscopic water

Question 10.
Plants die when over-fertilized because of the fertilizer
(A) Damages the wall of delicate root hairs
(B) Blocks absorption of nitrogenous ions
(C) Causes dehydration of plants by exosmosis
(D) Upsets soil environment by poisoning
Answer:
(C) Causes dehydration of plants by exosmosis

Question 11.
Movement of individual molecules of substance from a region of their higher concentration to a region of their lower concentration is called
(A) Osmosis
(B) Turgor pressure
(C) Diffusion
(D) Osmotic potential
Answer:
(A) Osmosis

Question 12.
The proteins that form large pores in the outer membranes of the plastids, mitochondria, etc are
(A) Porins
(B) Aquaporins
(C) Symporins
(D) Both A & B
Answer:
(A) Porins

Question 13.
Transport of molecules across the membrane in the same direction is
(A) Antiport
(B) Symport
(C) Permeability
(D) Uniport
Answer:
(B) Symport

Question 14.
Rate of osmosis depends on
(A) Diffusion
(B) Pressure gradient
(C) Concentration gradient
(D) BothB&C
Answer:
(D) BothB&C

Question 15.
One of the following is selectively permeable
(A) Tonoplast
(B) Suberised cell wall
(C) Copperferrocyanide membrane
(D) Cellulosic cell wall
Answer:
(A) Tonoplast

Question 16.
What will happen if a flaccid cell is placed in hypotonic solution?
(A) Plasmolysis
(B) Exosmosis
(C) Endosmosis
(D) None of these
Answer:
(C) Endosmosis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Transport in Plants

Question 17.
Pressure that occurs in a cell due to osmotic diffusion of water inside is called
(A) Osmotic pressure
(B) Turgor pressure
(C) Water pressure
(D) Diffusion pressure
Answer:
(A) Osmotic pressure

Question 18.
Movement of water through the cell wall without crossing any membrane is
(A) Apoplastic
(B) Symplastic
(C) Tonoplastic
(D) Cytoplastic
Answer:
(A) Apoplastic

Question 19.
Cytoplasmic strands that connects two neighbouring cells through
(A) Pits
(B) Semipermiable membrane
(C) Plasmodesmata
(D) Root hair
Answer:
(C) Plasmodesmata

Question 20.
Guttation occurs in leaves through
(A) Stomata
(B) Epithelium
(C) Hydathode
(D) Leaf margin
Answer:
(C) Hydathode

Question 21.
Dry seeds swells when they are placed in water due to
(A) Imbibition
(B) Plasmolysis
(C) Diffusion
(D) Osmosis
Answer:
(A) Imbibition

Question 22.
Transpiration in plants helps to
(A) The supply of water for photosynthesis
(B) Maintains cells turgidity
(C) Transport minerals from the soil to all parts of the plant
(D) All the above
Answer:
(D) All the above

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Students can Download Chapter 7 Web Hosting Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Plus Two Computer Application Web Hosting One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The companies that provide web hosting services are called_____.
Answer:
Web Hosts

Question 2.
The service of providing storage space in a web server to make a website available on Internet is called______.
Answer:
web hosting

Question 3.
Which of the following is true in the case of dedicated hosting?
(a) It shares server with other websites.
(b) It is usually inexpensive.
(c) It does not guarantee performance.
(d) It offers freedom for the clients to choose the hardware and the software.
Answer:
(d) It offers freedom for the clients to choose the hardware and the software.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.
Choose the odd one out, and justify your answer,
(a) Shared hosting
(b) Dedicated hosting
(c) DNS
(d) Virtual Private Server
Answer:
(c) DNS others are types of web hosting.

Question 5.
______is the service of providing storage space in a Webserver.

OR

Storing the web pages of a website in a server is popularly known as_____.
Answer:
Web hosting

Question 6.
The companies that provides web hosting services are called______.
Answer:
Web hosts

Question 7.
Odd one out.
(a) Shared
(b) Dedicated
(c) VPS
(d) DNS
Answer:
(d) DNS, means Domain Name System. The others are types of web hosting.

Question 8.
VPS stands for______.
Answer:
Virtual Private Server

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 9.
From the following select the most commonly used web hosting.
(a) Shared
(b) Dedicated
(c) VPS
(d) DNS
Answer:
(a) Shared hosting

Question 10.
DNS stands for_____.
Answer:
Domain Name System

Question 11.
‘A record’ means_____.
Answer:
Address record

Question 12.
FTP stands for______.
Answer:
File Transfer Protocol

Question 13.
Odd one out.
(a) Mozilla Firefox
(b) FileZilla
(c) CuteFTP
(d) SmartFTP
Answer:
(a) Mozilla Firefox, it is a web browser, the others are popular FTP client software.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 14.
______hosting provides web hosting services free of change.
Answer:
Free hosting

Question 15.
Give an example for Free web hosting services with sub domain website address.
Answer:
www.bvmhsskaiparamba.facebook.com

Question 16.
Give an example for Free web hosting services with directory service website address.
Answer:
www.facebook.com/bvm hss kalparamba

Question 17.
CMS stands for______.
Answer:
Content Management System

Question 18.
The term ‘responsive web designing’ was introduced by______.
Answer:
Ethan Marcotte.

Question 19.
The method of Flexible designing of web pages to suit the various types of screens is called______.
Answer:
Responsive web design method

Question 20.
In dedicated hosting, if the client is allowed to place his own purchased web server in the service
provider’s facility, then it is called______.
Answer:
Co-location

Question 21.
What are the information contain in a ICANN database?
Answer:
Registered domain names/name, address, telephone number and e-mail address of the registrants.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 22.
What is ‘A record’?
Answer:
‘A record’ is used to store the IP address and the corresponding domain name.

Question 23.
Joomla is an example for______.
(a) CMS
(b) ISP
(c) DNS
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) CMS

Question 24.
The responsive web design feature that converts horizontal menu to a dropdown menu in mobile phones is called______.
Answer:
Media queries.

Question 25.
The organization that maintains the WHOIS data-base of domain names is______.
Answer:
ICANN

Plus Two Computer Application Web Hosting Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider that your school is planning to host a website. What are the factors that you will consider while choosing the type of web hosting?
Answer:
Following factors to be considered

  1. Buying sufficient amount of memory space for storing our website files
  2. If the web pages contain programming contents supporting technology must be consider
  3. Based upon the programs select Windows hosting or Linux hosting.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 2.
Emmanuel wishes to buy a suitable domain for his company. Unfortunately, the domain name he chose is already registered by someone else. Name the feature that will help him to find the current owner. List the details will he get.
Answer:
WHOIS. Name, address, telephone number and e-mail address of the registrant.

Question 3.
What is the use of FTP client software? Give an example.
Answer:
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) client software. When a client requests a website by entering website address. Then FTP client software helps to establish a connection between client computer and remote server computer.

Unauthorised access is denied by using username and password hence secure our website files for that SSH(Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used. Instead of http://, it uses ftp://.

By using FTP client s/w we’ can transfer(upload) the files from our computer to the web server by using the ‘drag and drop’ method. The popular FTP client software are FileZilla, Cute FTP, Smart FTP, etc.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.
Haseena has decided to host her new website using free hosting facility; her friend Rinisha is against this move. Can you guess her argument against the utilization of free hosting facility?
Answer:
In free web hosting service, the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facility such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia (audio and viedo) files.

Plus Two Computer Application Web Hosting Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Priya has developed a website for her shop. She has purchased a domain name and hosting space.

  1. Name the software that will help her to transfer her files from her computer to the web server.
  2. List the requirements in that software that are necessary to connect to the web server.

Answer:

  1. FTP software such as FileZilla, Cute FTP, Smart FTP
  2. Following are the requirements to connect to the web server
    • Domain name/IP address
    • Username
    • Password

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 2.
Explain the advantages of using SFTP protocol in FTP client software.
Answer:
Un authorised access is denied by using username and password hence secure our website files, for this SSH (Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used. It encrypts and sends usernames, passwords, and data to the web server.

Question 3.
Merin plans to create a website for their family without spending money.

  1. List some of the limitations that Merin will face regarding the hosting space for website.
  2. How will she provide a domain name for the website?

Answer:
1. In free web hosting service, the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facility such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia (audio and viedo) files.

2. Usually two types of free web hosting services as follows.

  • as a directory service: service provider’s website address/our website address
    eg: www.facebook.com/bvmhsskalparamba
  • as a sub domain: Our website address.service providers website address
    eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.facebook.com

Question 4.
Recentlly more and more people are using Content Management Systems (CMS) for developing professional websites. What can be the reasons for this?
Answer:
CMS means Content Management System. Do you heard about Data Base Management System (DBMS). DBMS is a software (collection of programs) used to create, alter modify, delete and retrieve records of a Data Base.

Similarly CMS is a collection of programs that is used to create, modify, update and publish website contents. CMS can be downloaded freely and is useful to design and manage attractive and interactive websites with the help of templates that are available in CMS. WordPress, Joomla, etc. are the examples of CMS.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 5.
Suggest a hosting type for the following websites given below. Justify.

  1. Website for a medical shop in your city.
  2. Website for Public Service Commission (PSC) of Kerala.
  3. Website for an online shopping facility.

Answer:

  1. Shared hosting
  2. Dedicated/VPS
  3. Dedicated/VPS

Question 6.
Consider that a college in your locality plans to shift its website from shared type of hosting to VPS hosting. List the advantages that the website will gain from this change.
Answer:
Virtual Private Server (VPS):
A VPS is a virtual machine sold as a service by an Internet hosting Service. A VPS runs its own copy of an OS(Operating System) and customers have super level access to that OS instance, so they can install almost any s/w that runs on that OS.

This type is suitable for websites that require more features than shared hosting but less features than dedicated hosting.
Eg: It is similar to owning a Condo

Question 7.
Mr. Mohan wants to host a personal website with minimal cost. Which type of web hosting would you advise for him? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Shared Hosting:
This type of hosting sharing resources, like memory, disk space, and CPU hence the name shared. Several websites share the same server. This is suitable for small websites that have less traffic and it is not suitable for large websites that have large bandwidth, large storage space and have large volume of traffic.

Eg: Shared hosting is very similar to living in an Apartment(Villas) complex. All residents are in the same location and must share the available resources(Car parking area, Swimming pool, Gymnasium, playground, etc) with every one.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 8.
A super market in a city wishes to take its business online. It plans to accept orders for its products through a website and receive payments online.

  1. Which type of hosting is suitable for this website?
  2. Explain the reason for your choice,

Answer:
1. Dedicated Hosting.

2. A web server and its resources are exclusively for one website that have large volume of traffic means large volume of requests by the visitors.

Some Govt, departments or large organizations require uninterrupted services for that round the clock power supply is needed. It is too expensive but it is more reliable and provide good service to the public.

Eg: It is similar to living in an Our own house. All the resources in your house is only for you. No one else’s account resides on the computer and would not be capable of tapping into your resourses.

Question 9.
Emil wishes to purchase the web hosting space required to host a website for his medical shop. List the features to be taken into consideration while buying hosting space on a web server.
Answer:
Following factors to be considered

  1. Buying sufficient amount of memory space for storing our website files
  2. If the web pages contain programming contents supporting technology must be consider
  3. Based upon the programs select Windows hosting or Linux hosting.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 10.
How can we connect a website hosted in a Webserver to a domain name?
Answer:
Millions of websites are available over Internet so that our website must be registered with a suitable name. Domain Name registration is used to identify a website over Internet.

A domain name must be unique(i.e. no two website with same name is available). So you have to check the availability of domain name before you register it, for this www.whois.net website will help.

If the domain name entered is available then we can register it by paying the Annual registration fees through online. Consider a Post Office, it has two addresses one string address (Irinjalakuda) and one numeric(pin) code (680121).

Just like this, the website has also two addresses a string address for example www.agker.cag.gov in and a numeric address (http:/ /210.212.239.70/). We are following string address, hence this domain name has to be connected to the corresponding IP address of the web server.

This is done by using ‘A record’(Address record) of the domain. ‘A record’ is used to store the IP address and the corresponding domain name.

Question 11.
What is the advantage of using SFTP protocol in FTP software?
Answer:
FTP(File Transfer Protocol) client software. When a client requests a website by entering website address. Then FTP client software helps to establish a connection between client computer and remote server computer.

Unauthorised access is denied by using username and password hence secure our website files for that SSH(Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used. Instead of http://, it uses ftp://.

By using FTP client s/w we can transfer(upload) the files from our computer to the web server by using the ‘drag and drop’ method. The popular FTP client software are FileZilla, CuteFTP, SmartFTP, etc.

Question 12.
Raju wishes to host a website for his family. What are the advantages that free web hosting companies provide?
Answer:
The name implies it is free of cost service and the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facility such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia(audio and video) files.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

A paid service website’s address is as follows
eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.com
Usually two types of free web hosting services as follows

  1. as a directory service: Service provider’s website address/our website address
    eg: www.facebook.com / bvm hss kalparambu
  2. as a Sub domain: Our website address.service providers website address
    eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.facebook.com

Earlier web hosting services are expensive but nowadays it is cheaper hence reduced the need for free web hosting.

Question 13.
What is CMS? What are the features of CMS? Give Examples.
Answer:
CMS means Content Management System. Do you heard about Data Base Management System (DBMS). DBMS is a software(collection of programs) used to create, alter, modify, delete and retrieve records of a Data Base.

Similarly, CMS is a collection of programs that is used to create, modify, update and publish website contents. CMS can be downloaded freely and is useful to design and manage attractive and interactive websites with the help of templates that are available in CMS. WordPress, Joomla, etc. are the examples of CMS.

Plus Two Computer Application Web Hosting Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain different types of web hosting?
Answer:
Types of web hosting:
Various types of web hosting services are available. We can choose the web hosting services according to our needs depends upon the storage space needed for hosting, the number of visitors expected to visit, etc.

1. Shared Hosting:
This type of hosting sharing resources, like memory, disk space, and CPU hence the name shared. Several websites share the same server.

This is suitable for small websites that have less traffic and it is not suitable for large websites that have large bandwidth, large storage space and have large volume of traffic.

Eg: Shared hosting is very similar to living in an Apartment(Villas) complex. All residents are in the same location and must share the available resources(Car parking area, Swimming pool, Gymnasium, play ground, etc) with every one.

2. Dedicated Hosting:
A web server and its resources are exclusively for one website that have large volume of traffic means large volume of requests by the visitors.

Some Govt, departments or large organizations require uninterrupted services for that round the clock power supply is needed. It is too expensive but it is more reliable and provide good service to the public.

Eg: It is similar to living in an Our own house. All the resources in your house is only for you. No one else’s account resides on the computer and would not be capable of tapping into your resourses.

3. Virtual Private Server (VPS):
A VPS is a virtual machine sold as a service by an Internet hosting Service. A VPS runs its own copy of an OS (Operating System) and customers have super level access to that OS instance, so they can install almost any s/w that runs on that OS.

This type is suitable for websites that require more features than shared hosting but less features than dedicated hosting.
Eg: It is similar to owning a Condo.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 2.

  1. What is responsive web design? (3)
  2. Why is it gaining importance recently? (2)

Answer:
1. The home page is displayed differently according to the screen size of the browser window(different screen sized devices mobile phone, palmtop, tablet, laptop, and desktop) we used.

The website is designed dynamically (flexibly) that suit the screen size of different device introduced by Ethan Marcotte. Before this, companies have to design different websites for different screen sized devices.

By responsive web design, companies have to design only one website that suitably displayed according to the screen size of the devices. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries.

Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.

Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the
device.

Media queries: There is an option(settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malayala Manorama launched their responsive website.

2. Insted of using desktops or laptops many people nowadays visit websites using tablets and mobiles phones. Portability is the main reason for this.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 3.
Today, we visit websites using tablets and mobile phones also. You might have noticed that the same website is displayed in a different layout in different devices.

  1. Name the concept used for this. (1)
  2. List and explain the technologies used for implementing this concept. (5)

Answer:

  1. Responsive web design.
  2. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries.

Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.

Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the device.

Media queries: There is an option(settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malayala Manorama launched their responsive website.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.

  1. What is responsive web design? (3)
  2. How is responsive web design implemented? (2)

Answer:
1. The home page is displayed differently according to the screen size of the browser window(different screen sized devices mobile phone, palmtop, tablet, laptop, and desktop) we used.

The website is designed dynamically(flexibly) that suit the screen size of different device introduced by Ethan Marcotte. Before this, companies have to design different websites for different screen sized devices.

By responsive web design, companies have to design only one website that suitably displayed according to the screen size of the devices.

2. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries

Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.
Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the device.

Media queries: There is an option(settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malayala Manorama launched their responsive website.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Students can Download Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Plus One Botany Cell Cycle and Cell Division One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Meiosis results in
(a) Production of gametes
(b) Reduction in the number of chromosomes
(c) Introduction of variation
(d) all of the above
Answer:
(d) all of the above

Question 2.
At which stage of meiosis does the genetic constitution of gametes is finally decided
(a) Metaphase I
(b) Anaphase II
(c) Metaphase II
(d) Anaphase I
Answer:
(d) Anaphase I

Question 3.
Meiosis occurs in organisms during
(a) Sexual reproduction
(b) Vegetative reproduction
(c) Both sexual and vegetative reproduction
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Sexual reproduction

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 4.
During anaphase-l of meiosis
(a) Homologous chromosomes separate
(b) Non-homologous autosomes separate
(c) Sister chromatids separate
(d) non-sister chromatids separate
Answer:
(a) Homologous chromosomes separate

Question 5.
Mitosis is characterised by
(a) Reduction division
(b) Equal division
(c) Both reduction and equal division
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Equal division

Question 6.
A bivalent of meiosis-l consists of
(a) Two chromatids and one centromere
(b) Two chromatids and two centromere
(c) Four chromatids and two centromere
(d) Four chromatids and four centromere
Answer:
(c) Four chromatids and two centromere

Question 7.
Cells which are not dividing are likely to be at
(a) G1
(b) G2
(c) Go
(d) S phase
Answer:
(c) Go

Question 8.
Which type cell divisions occur in meristematic cell of root apex?
Answer:
Mitosis

Question 9.
In which stage the actual reduction of chromosome number occurs in meiosis.
Answer:
Anaphase 1

Question 10.
Give the term for the failure of separation of homologous chromosomes.
Answer:
Non-disjunction

Question 11.
Name the cell divisions which help in growth and recombination of genes.
Answer:
Mitosis and meiosis

Question 12.
It is observed that heart cells do not exhibit cell division. Such cells do not divide further and exit ____ phase to enter an inactive stage called ____ of cell cycle. Fill in the blanks.
Answer:
G1 and G0

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 13.
In the case of plant cells, the formation of new cell wall begins with a simple precursor. What is this precursor?
Answer:
Middle lamella

Question 14.
It is said that the one cycle of cell division in human cells (eukaryotic cells) takes 24 hours. Which phase of the cycle, do you think occupies the maximum part of cell cycle?
Answer:
Interphase.

Question 15.
At what stage of cell cycle does DNA synthesis take place?
Answer:
substage of Interphase

Question 16.
If the failure of division of cytoplasm occurs after nuclear division, What will happen to the cell?
Answer:
Free nucleii are formed

Question 17.
An anther has 1200 pollen grains. How many pollen mother cells must have been there to produce them?
Answer:
300 pollen mother cells

Question 18.
What is the peculiarity of zygotene?
Answer:
The pairing of the homologous chromosome called synapsis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 19.
It is the inactive stage of cell division but cell differentiation occurs. Name it.
Answer:
G0 Phase /Quiscent stage.

Plus One Botany Cell Cycle and Cell Division Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Meiosis is the type of cell division which maintain the race. Discuss.
Answer:
Reduces the chromosome number to half, so that chromosome number is maintained in the next generation.

Question 2.
Interphase in cell cycle is sometimes referred to as resting phase. Do you consider this statement true? Substantiate your answer.
Answer:
No.

  1. Nucleus and cytoplasm are metabolically very active.
  2. Amount of DNA becomes doubled.

Question 3.
A diagram of typical cell cycle of a higher plant is shown here. Identify each stage of the cycle and explain what happens during these stages.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division img1
Answer:

  • G1 – pre mitotic gap -synthesis of RNA &Proteins
  • S – phase of synthesis – DNA replication
  • G2 – Post mitotic Gap phase synthesis of RNA &Proteins continues
  • M – Mitotic phase
  • G0 – Inactive phase

Question 4.
Cytokinesis differs in plant and animal cell. Substantiate this statement.
Answer:

  • Plant cell – formation of cell plate.
  • Animal cell – Invagination of cell membrane.

Question 5.
Analyse the column A and B arrange the matter is an appropriate order.

AB
1)  Pachytene

2)  S phase

3) Dyad

4) M phase

a) Interphase

b) Telophase I

c)  Mitotic phase

d) Prophase I

Answer:

AB
1)  Pachytene

2)  S phase

3)  Dyad

4)  M phase

Prophase I

Interphase

Telophase I

Mitotic phase

Question 6.
Identify the stages of Mitosis in which the following events take place:

  1. Synapsis
  2. Terminalisation of chiasmata.

Answer:

  1. Zygotene
  2. Diakinesis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 7.
Different stages of Prophase I of Meiosis are given in column A, arrange them in correct order and match them with the events in column B.

AB
i) Diplotenea) Chromosomes become gradually visible under the light microscope
ii) Pachyteneb) The pairing of Homologous chromosomes
iii) Leptotenec) The appearance of recombination nodules and crossing over takes place
iv) Zygotened) Dissolution of synaptonemal complex and separation of bivalents.
e) Terminalisation of Chiasmata

Answer:

  1. (i) – d
  2. (ii) – c
  3. (iii) – a
  4. (iv) – b

Question 8.
The pairing of homologous chromosomes is called synapsis.

  1. Name each pair of homologous chromosomes.
  2. Name the stage of prophase at which it takes place.

Answer:

  1. Bivalent
  2. Zygotene

Question 9.
Specific chromosome number of each species is conserved across generations in sexually reproducing organisms. What is the reason for this? Write the different steps of this process.
Answer:

  1. Meiosis (meiosis I & II)
  2. Prophase Meta phase Ana phase Telophase

Question 10.
The life cycle of a cell is called cell cycle. It consists of four stages such as Gv S, G2, and M.

  1. Construct a pie diagram showing the different stages indicated above.
  2. State the major events occurring in G, S, and G2 phases.

Answer:
1. Pie diagram of cell cycle.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division img2
2. G1 Phase -1, Cell grows in size and prepares the machinery needed for the DNA replication. RNA and proteins are synthesized. S phase – DNA replication. G2 phase – Synthesis of RNA and proteins.

Question 11.
Arrange the following stages of cell cycle in correct sequence S, G2, G1, M.
Answer:
S, M, G1, S, G2

Question 12.
X’ shaped structure called ‘chiasmata occurs during a particular stage of cell division.

  1. Name the stage?
  2. What is the significance of this type of cell division?

Answer:

  1. Pachytene
  2. The exchange of genes takes place between homologous chromosomes.

Question 13.
Given below are the five phases of prophase I of Meiosis I. Arrange them in correct order.
Zygotene, diakinesis, diplotene, leptotene, pachytene
Answer:
Leptotene, Zygotene, Pachytene, diplotene and diakinesis

Question 14.
Give the scientific term of the following.

  1. Interchange of genetic material between non-sister chromatids of the homologues chromosomes
  2. The plane of alignment of the chromosomes at metaphase

Answer:

  1. Crossing over
  2. Equatorial

Question 15.
Identify the diagram and label a, b,c and write the events during this.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division img3
Answer:
(a)G1
(b) S
(c)G2

  • G1 – Interval between mitosis and initiation of DNA replication.
  • S – DNA synthesis or replication of DNA occurs.
  • G2 – In this phase proteins are synthesised for mitosis.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 16.
You have supplied I set of glass slides showing gametogenesis or garnets formation in an animal In one of the slide you observed the following features. Four cells with haploid number of chromosomes. Your friend told you that this is a meiotic division. (Hint: The diploid number of chromosome is 16.)
Are you agree with this statement. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Yes. Meiosis takes place in diploid cell or meiocyte to form four haploid cells. These cells contain 8 chromosomes each.

Question 17.
Differentiate reduction division from equational division.
Answer:
1. Reduction division:
It occurs in diploid cells to form 4 haploid cells, ie, the Chromosome number reduced to half in Meiosis I and results 2 daughter cells, which again divides to form 4 daughter cells. All cells formed in meiosis are haploid.

2. Equational division:
It is the mitotic division results 2 daughter cells carrying same set of chromosomes as that of parent cell. No genetic variation occurs.

Question 18.
Can there be mitosis without DNA replication in S phase?
Answer:
There cannot be mitosis without DNA replication in 5 phase of interphase because the trigger for mitosis is disturbance of nucleocytoplasmic ratio caused by DNA replication in S phase. Mitosis restores the quantity of genetic material to the species-specific level.

Question 19.
How does anaphase of mitosis and anaphase I of meiosis differ from each other?
Answer:
In anaphase of mitosis chromatids separate while in anaphase 1 of meiosis homologous chromosomes separate.

Question 20.
How does cytokinesis in plant cells differ from that in animal cells?
Answer:
1. In an animal cell a furrow in the plasma membrane.lt joins in the centre and dividing the cell cytoplasm into two.

2. In-plant cells, wall formation starts in the centre of the cell and grows outward to meet the existing lateral walls. Then Cell division occurs.

Question 21.
How cytokinesis is different in an animal and a plant cell?
Answer:
In-plant cell cytokinesis occurs by cell plate formation while in the animal cell it occurs by cell furrow formation.

Question 22.
Why mitosis is called equational division ? Give the occurrence of mitosis.
Answer:
It keeps the chromosome number constant. It occurs in somatic cells.

Question 23.
What is the feature of a metacentric chromosome?
Answer:
The metacentric chromosome has a centromere in the middle region with two equal arms of the chromosome.

Question 24.
What is kinetochore? Give its function.
Answer:
It is a disc-like area in each chromatid and is site of attachment of spindle microtubule.

Question 25.
Why is meiosis essentially in sexually reproducing organisms?
Answer:
Meiosis reduces the chromosome number to half as it is followed by fertilization which restores diploidy.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 26.
Name the stage of cells cycle at which one of the following events occurs.

  1. Chromosomes are moved to spindle equator
  2. Centromere splits and chromatids separate
  3. Pairing between homologous chromosomes. takes place
  4. Crossing over between homologous chromosomes takes place.

Answer:

  1. Metaphase
  2. Anaphase
  3. Zygotene
  4. Pachytene

Question 27.
Downs syndrome and Klinefelter’s syndrome occurs due to mistake in cell division. What does it indicate?
Answer:
It is due to the failure of separation of homologous chromosomes during meiosis.

Question 28.
The events occur in prophase and telophase are one opposite to other,

  1. Name the cell structures shown the above events
  2. How many daughter nuclei are formed at the end of mitotic and meiotic prophase?

Answer:

  1. Nuclear membrane, nucleolus and spindle fibres
  2. Two

Question 29.
Mangolism or Trisomy is due to the failure of one event in cell division.

  1. Which is the improperly functioning stage?
  2. What is the event that not occurs?

Answer:

  1. Anaphase I of meiosis
  2. Separation of homologous chromosomes

Question 30.

  1. What will be the ploidy level of dyad and tetrad of cells in meiosis?
  2. How is it occurs?

Answer:

  1. Dyad – haploid, Tetrad – Haploid
  2. It occurs in meiosis due to separation of homologous chromosomes and chromosome number reduced to half.

Plus One Botany Cell Cycle and Cell Division Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In which phase of meiosis is the following formed? Choose the answers from hint points given below.

  1. Synaptonemal complex ______
  2. Recombination nodules ______
  3. Appearance/activation of enzyme recombinase _____
  4. Termination of chiasmata _______
  5. Interkinesis ________
  6. Formation of dyad of cells ________

Answer:

  1. Zygotene
  2. pachytene
  3. pachytene
  4. diakinesis
  5. After Meiosis-I before meiosis II
  6. after first cytokinesis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 2.
The interphase stage is significant in mitotic and meiotic cell division

  1. Give one specific event
  2. Name the stage of interphase this event occurs
  3. How will you differentiate interphase from interkinesis?

Answer:

  1. DNA replication
  2. S – phase
  3. Interphase – cell prepares for cell division Interkinesis – short interval between meiosis I and meiosis II

Question 3.
The following events occur during the various phases of the cell cycle, Write the phase against each of the events.

  1. Appearance of nucleolus
  2. Division of centromere
  3. Replication of DNA

Answer:

  1. Telophase
  2. Anaphase
  3. Interphase

Question 4.
Life cycle of a cell is called cell cycle. ‘S’ phase is an important phase of cell cycle.

  1. Justify your answer.
  2. Name the stages of cell cycle at which the following events occur.
    • Crossing over of homologous chromosome.
    • Pairingof homologous chromosomes.
    • Chromosomes are arranged at the equatorial plane.

Answer:

  1. phase of DNA synthesis
  2. stages of the cell cycle
    • Pachytene
    • Zygotene
    • Metaphase

Question 5.
Name the stages of cell division in which the following events occur?

  1. Chromosomes are moved to spindle equator.
  2. Centromere splits and chromatids separate.
  3. Crossing over between homologous chromosomes takes place.

Answer:

  1. Metaphase
  2. Anaphase
  3. Pachytene

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 6.
Match the words listed in column I with suitable words from column II.

Column IColumn II
a) Diplontic cycle

b) Karyokinesis

c) Haplontic cycle

d) Cytokinesis

e) Meiosis

f)  Cell plate

i)  Meiocytes

ii) Gametic meiosis

iii)  Plant cells

iv) Nuclear division

v) Zygotic meiosis

vi) Cytoplasmic division

Answer:

  1. a) – Gametic meiosis
  2. b) – Nuclear division
  3. c) – Zygotic meiosis
  4. d) – Cytoplasmic division
  5. e) – Meiocytes
  6. f) – Plant cells

Plus One Botany Cell Cycle and Cell Division NCERT Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Distinguish cytokinesis from karyokinesis.
Answer:
The division of cytoplasm is called cytokinesis, while the division of the nucleus is called Karyokinesis.

Question 2.
What is G0 (quiescent phase) of cell cycle?
Answer:
Some cells in the adult animals do not appear to exhibit division (e.g., heart cells and many other cells divide only occasionally, as needed to replace cells that have been lost because of injury or cell death.

These cells do not divide further exit G1 phase to enter an inactive stage called quiescent stage (G0) of the cell cycle. Cells in this stage remain metabolically active but no longer proliferate unless called on to do so depending on the requirement of the organism.

Question 3.
Describe the event taking place during interphase.
Answer:
The interphase is divided into three further phases:
1. G1 phase (Gap 1). G1 phase corresponds to the interval between mitosis initiation of DNA replication. During G, phase the cell is metabolically active and continuously grows but does not replicate its DNA.

2. S phase (Synthesis). S or synthesis phase marks the period during which DNA synthesis or replication takes place.

3. During this time the amount of DNA per cell doubles. If the initial amount of DNA is denoted as 2C then it increases to 4C. However, there is no increase in the chromosome number, if the cell had diploid or 2n number of chromosomes at G1, even after S phase the number of chromosomes remains the same, i.e., 2n.

4. G2 phase (Gap 2). In animal cells, during the S phase, DNA replication begins in the nucleus, and the centriole duplicates in the cytoplasm during the G2 phase, proteins are synthesised in preparation for mitosis White cell growth continues.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 4.
Why is mitosis called equational division?
Answer:
Since the number of chromosomes remains same in parent and daughter cells so mitosis is also called a equational division.

Question 5.
Name the stage of cell cycle at which one of the following events occur.

  1. Chromosomes are moved to spindle equator.
  2. Centromere splits and chromatids separate.
  3. Pairing between homologous chromosomes takes place.
  4. Crossing over between homologous chromosomes takes place.

Answer:

  1. Metaphase
  2. Anaphase
  3. Metaphase I of meiosis
  4. Prophase I of meiosis

Question 6.
What is the significance of meiosis?
Answer:
Significance of Meiosis:

  1. Maintaining genetic identity by maintaining number of chromosomes.
  2. Bringing variations to ensure better species.
  3. Facilitates sexual reproduction.

Question 7.
Discuss with your teacher about.

  1. haploid insects and lower plants where cell division occurs, and
  2. Some haploid cells in higher plants where cell division does not occur.

Answer:

  1. Male bees, wasps and ants are haploid organisms because they are produced from unfertilized eggs.
  2. Synergids and antipodal cells in the ovule don’t undergo cell division.

Question 8.
Can there be mitosis without DNA replication in ‘S’ phase?
Answer:
DNA replication is necessary for cell division, and cell division cannot happen without DNA replication.

Question 9.
Can there be DNA replication without cell division?
Answer:
DNA replication takes place in order to prepare for cell division. Cell division is the next logical step after DNA replication.

Question 10.
Analyse the events during every stage of cell cycle and notice how the following two parameters change

  1. number of chromosomes (N) per cell
  2. amount of DNA content (C) per cell

Answer:

  1. Number of chromosomes remains same after mitotic cell division and becomes half after meiotic cell division.
  2. During S phase the DNA content doubles, but number of chromosomes remains the same.

Plus One Botany Cell Cycle and Cell Division Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Cleavage is a unique form of mitotic cell division in which
(a) there is no growth of cells
(b) the nucleus does not participate
(c) no spindle develops to guide the cells
(d) the plasma membranes of daughter cells do not separate.
Answer:
(a) there is no growth of cells

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 2.
In animal cells, cytokinesis involves
(a) the separation of sister chromatids
(b) contraction of the contractile ring of microfilament
(c) depolymerisation of kinetochore microtubules
(d) a protein kinase that phosphorylates other enzymes
Answer:
(b) contraction of the contractile ring of microfilament

Question 3.
During mitosis, the number of chromosomes gets
(a) change
(b) no change
(c) maybe change if cell is mature
(d) maybe change if cell is immature
Answer:
(b) no change

Question 4.
A diploid living organism develops from zygote by which type of the following repeated cell divisions?
(a) Meiosis
(b) Amitosis
(c) fragmentation
(d) Mitosis
Answer:
(d) Mitosis

Question 5.
If you are provided with root-tips of onion in your class and are asked to count the chromosomes, which of the following stages can you most conveniently look into?
(a) Metaphase
(b) Telophase
(c) Anaphase
(d) Prophase
Answer:
(a) Metaphase

Question 6.
At which stage of mitosis, chromatids separated and passes to different poles
(a) prophase
(b) Metaphase
(c) anaphase
(d) Telophase
Answer:
(c) anaphase

Question 7.
The two chromatids of a metaphase chromosome represent
(a) replicated chromosomes to be separated at anaphase
(b) homologous chromosomes of a diploid set
(c) non-homologous chromosomes joined at the centromere
(d) maternal and paternal chromosomes joined at the centromere
Answer:
(a) replicated chromosomes to be separated at anaphase

Question 8.
The process of cytokinesis refers to the division of
(a) nucleus
(b) chromosomes
(c) cytoplasm
(d) nucleus and cytoplasm
Answer:
(c) cytoplasm

Question 9.
Which of the following serves as mitotic spindle poison?
(a) Ca2
(b) azide
(c) Tubulin
(d) Colchicine
Answer:
(d) Colchicine

Question 10.
Pairing of homologous chromosomes occurs at which stage?
(a) Zygotene
(b) Leptotene
(c) Metaphase
(d) Pachytene
Answer:
(a) Zygotene

Question 11.
In meiosis, division is
(a) I reductional and II equational
(b) I equational and II reductional
(c) Both reductional
(d) Both equational
Answer:
(a) I reductional and II equational

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 12.
Which type of chromosomes segregate when a cell undergoes meiosis?
(a) Homologous chromosomes
(b) Non-homologous chromosomes
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) centric and acentric chromosomes
Answer:
(a) Homologous chromosomes

Question 13.
Chiasmata are most appropriately observed in meiosis during
(a) diakinesis
(b) diplotene
(c) metaphase-ll
(d) pachytene
Answer:
(b) diplotene

Question 14.
During cell division, sometimes there will be failure of separation of homologous chromosomes. This event is called
(a) interference
(b) complementation
(c) non-disjunction
(d) coincidence
Answer:
(c) non-disjunction

Question 15.
The second meiotic division leads to
(a) separation of sex chromosomes
(b) fresh DNA synthesis
(c) separation of chromatids and centromere
(d) separation of homologous chromosomes.
Answer:
(c) separation of chromatids and centromere

Question 16.
Term meiosis was proposed by
(a) Farmer and Moore
(b) Flemming
(c) Strasburger
(d) Darlington
Answer:
(a) Farmer and Moore

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Cell Cycle and Cell Division

Question 17.
Synapsis occurs in the phase of meiosis.
(a) zygotene
(b) diplotene
(c) pachytene
(d) leptotene
Answer:
(a) zygotene

Question 18.
When the number of chromosomes is already reduced to half in the first reductional division of meiosis, where is the necessity of second meiotic division
(a) The division is required for the formation of four gametes
(b) Division ensures equal distribution of haploid chromosomes
(c) Division ensures equal distribution of genes on chromosomes
(d) Division is required for segregation of replicated chromosomes
Answer:
(d) Division is required for segregation of replicated chromosomes

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Students can Download Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Among the following which one is the most correct. JavaScript is used mostly at the
(a) client side
(b) server side
(c) client side and server side
Answer:
(a) client side

Question 2.
Name the tag that is used to embed scripts in a web page.
Answer:
<SCRIPT>

Question 3.
In JavaScript, a variable is declared using the keyword______.
Answer:
var

Question 4.
_____are small programs embedded in the HTML pages.
Answer:
Scripts

Question 5.
Who developed JavaScript?
Answer:
Brendan Eich

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 6.
_____are the scripts that are executed by the browser (client).
Answer:
Client Scripts

Question 7.
_____are the scripts that are executed by the web server.
Answer:
Server Scripts

Question 8.
_____Script is a platform-independent script.
Answer:
Java Script

Question 9.
______Script is a platform dependent script.
Answer:
VB Script

Question 10.
______makes the tags meaningful.
Answer:
Attribute

Question 11.
_____attribute specifies the name of the scripting language used.
Answer:
Language

Question 12.
State True or False. The identifiers are case sensitive Identifiers case.
Answer:
True

Question 13.
Which part of the browser executes the JavaScript.
Answer:
JavaScript engine

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 14.
Odd one out
(a) Google Chrome
(b) Internet Explorer
(c) Mozila FireFox
(d) C++
Answer:
(d) C++, It is a programming language others are browsers.

Question 15.
A group of codes with a name is called_____.
Answer:
function

Question 16.
To declare a function the keyword_____is used.
Answer:
function

Question 17.
A function contains a function____and function_____.
Answer:
header, body

Question 18.
State true or false
Even though a function is defined within the body section, it will not be executed, if it is not called.
Answer:
True

Question 19.
Write down the purpose of the following code snippet
function print()
{
document .write (“ Welcome to JS”);
}
Answer:
This code snippet is used to display the string, “Welcome to JS” on the screen(monitor).

Question 20.
From the following select which one is Not the data type in JavaScript
(a) Number
(b) String
(c) Boolean
(d) Time
Answer:
(d) Time

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 21.
_____keyword is used to declare a variable in JavaScript.
Answer:
var

Question 22.
______function is used to return the data type.
Answer:
typeof()

Question 23.
_____is a special data type to represent variables that are not defined using var.
Answer:
undefined

Question 24.
Odd one out
(a) +
(b) –
(c) %
(d) ==
Answer:
(d) ==, it is a relational operator the others are arithmetic operator.

Question 25.
Odd one out
(a) &&
(b) ||
(c) !
(d) %
Answer:
(d) %, it is an arithmetic operator, others are logical operator.

Question 26.
Odd one out
(a) <
(b) >
(c) ==
(d) !
Answer:
(d) ! , it is a logical operator, the others are relational operator.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 27.
Consider the following declaration var b;
From the following which value can be used for the variable b as boolean value.
(a) true
(b) TRUE
(c) True
(d) FALSE
Answer:
(a) true, The value is case sensitive.

Question 28.
Predict the output of the following.
var a, b;
a = ”0480″;
b = 2828159;
document.write(a+b);
Answer:
The out Put is “04802828159”. That is the string “0480” concatenates(joins) the number 2828159. The output is a string not a number.

Question 29.
Predict the output
var x, y;
x = ”8″;
y = 3;
document.write(x+y);
Answer:
The output is a string “83”; String addition means concatenation.

Question 30.
From the following which method is used to display a message (dialog box) on the screen.
(a) alert()
(b) isNaN()
(c) toUpperCase()
(d) toLowerCase()
Answer:
(a) alert()

Question 31.
Raju wants to convert a lower case text to Upper case text, which function is to be used.
Answer:
toUpperCase()

Question 32.
Christy wants to convert an upper case text to lower case text, which function is to be used.
Answer:
toLowerCase()

Question 33.
Andrea wants to check a value is a number or not. From the following which function is used for that.
(a) isNumb()
(b) isNaN()
(c) isNotNumb()
(d) isNotNumber()
Answer:
(b) isNaN().

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 34.
Predict the output of the following code snippet
var x=” HIGHER SECONDARY”;
alert(x.charAt(4));
Answer:
It displays a message box with character ‘E’ from the fifth (4 + 1) place

Question 35.
Read the following three statements regarding JavaScript.

  1. JavaScript can be used at the client side for data validation.
  2. JavaScript statements are case sensitive.
  3. JavaScript can be used only for creating web pages.

Answer:
All the three statements are correct.

Question 36.
Write the output of the following web page.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 1
Answer:
welcome welcome.

Question 37.
Following is the web page that accepts a string from a text box, converts in to uppercase and display it on the screen. Complete the missing portion in the page.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 2
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 3
Answer:
document.forml.text1.value

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 38.
Name the attribute of <SCRIPT> tag that is used to include an external JavaScript file into a web page.
Answer:
src

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A javaScript code has the following three variables and values.
x = “Script”;
y = “3”;
z = “2”;
Then match the following table.

AB
x.length()false
isNaN(x)5
isNaN(y)6
y + ztrue
32

Answer:

AB
x.length()6
isNaN(x)true
isNaN(y)false
y + z32

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 2.
“Placing JavaScript as an external file has some advantages”. Do you agree with this statement?
Why?
Answer:
External (another) JavaScript file:
We can write scripts in a file and save it as a separate file with the extension .js. The advantage is that this file can be used across multiple HTML files and can be enhance the speed of page loading.

Question 3.
Explain the difference between the statements.
documerit.write (“welcome”);
and
alert (“welcome)”;
Answer:

  1. document.write () is a JavaScript command used to print anything on the browser window.
  2. document write (“welcome”) prints “welcome” on the browser window.
  3. alert (“welcome”). This is a built in function used to display a message here the message “welcome” in a separate window.

Question 4.
Is it necessary to use Language – ‘JavaScript” in the <SCRIPT>tag to specify the JavaScript code? Why?
Answer:
No, it is not nece^ary. If the language attribute is not specified, it will take the default value as Javascript.

Question 5.
Write the output of the following web page:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 4
Answer:
It will not display anything on the screen. This code snippet contains a function that will not do anything unless it is invoked(called).

Question 6.
Write the output of the following web page:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 5
Answer:

  • The output is as follows
  • welcome to JavaScript
  • welcome to JavaScript
  • The message repeats 2 times.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 7.
Among the following, identify the data types used in JavaScript
int, float, number, char, boolean, long
Answer:
From the list there is only two, number and boolean are the types used in JavaScript.

Question 8.
Write the output of the following web page and jus¬tify your answer.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 6
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 7
Answer:
x = “10” means x is a string variable
y = “20” means y is a string variable
x + y means the string x and y will be concatenated Hence it displays 1020.

Question 9.
What do you mean by Scripts? Explain?
Answer:
Scripts are small programs embedded in the HTML pages.
<SCRIPT> tag is used to write scripts The attributes used are

  • Type-To specify the scripting language
  • Src-Specify the source file
  • Two types of scripts
    1. Client scripts: These are scripts executed by the browser.
      Eg: VB Script, Javascript, etc.
    2. Server scripts: These are scripts executed by the server.
      Eg: ASP, JSP, PHP, Perl, etc.
  • The languages that are used to write scripts are known as scripting languages.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 10.
Suppose you have written a JavaScript function named checkData(). You want to execute the function when the mouse pointer is just moved over the button. How will you complete the following to do the same?
<INPUT Type=”button”_____= “checkData()”>
Answer:
<INPUT Type=”button” onMouseEnter = “checkData()”>

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Categorize the following as UpperCamelCase or lowerCamelCase and explain.
(a) DateOfBirth
(b) dateOfJoining
(c) timeOfJoining
(d) PlaceOfBirth
Answer:
a. CamelCase: An identifier does not use special characters such as space hence a single word is formed using multiple words. Such a naming method is called CamelCase (without space between words and all the words first character is in upper case letter).
These are two types

  1. Upper CamelCase: when the first character of each word is capitalised,
  2. lowerCamelCase: when the first character of each word except the first word is capitalised.

b. UpperCamelCase: DateOfBirth, PlaceOfBirth

c. lowerCamelCase: dateOfJoining, timeOfJoining

Question 2.
Explain the method of working of a JavaScript.
Answer:
Every browser has a JavaScript engine. If the code snippet contains JavaScript code, it is passed to the JavaScript engine for processing, the engine executes the code.

If there is no script then it processes without the help of script engine. Hence an HTML file without JavaScript is faster than with JavaScript code.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 3.
Write down the various data types used in JavaScript.
Answer:

  1. Number: Any number(whole or fractional) with or without sign.
    Eg: +1977,-38.0003,-100, 3.14157,etc
  2. String: It is a combination of characters enclosed within double quotes.
    Eg: “BVM”, “[email protected]”, etc
  3. Boolean: We can use either true or false.lt is • case sensitive. That means can’t use TRUE OR
    FALSE

Question 4.
Explain how a variable is declaring in JavaScript.
Answer:
For storing values you have to declare a variable, for that the keyword var is used. There is no need to specify the data type.
Syntax:
var<variable name1 > [, <variable name2>, <variable name3>,etc…]
Here square bracket indicates optional.
Eg: var x, y, z;
x= 11;
y = ”BVM”;
z = false;
Here x is of number type, y is of string and z is of Boolean type.

Question 5.
What are the different ways to add Scripts to a web page?
Answer:
The three different ways to add Scripts as follows

  1. Inside <BODY> section: Scripts can be placed inside the <BODY> section.
  2. Inside <HEAD> section: Scripts can be placed inside the <HEAD> section. This method is widely accepted method
  3. External (another) JavaScript file

We can write scripts in a file and save it as a separate file with the extension .js. The advantage is that this file can be used across multiple HTML files and can be enhance the speed of page loading.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 6.
Create a web page that checks whether a student has passed or not?
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 8
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 9

Question 7.
Create a web page to display the squares of first 10 numbers Sp <HTML>
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 10
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 11

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 8.
Create a web page to display even numbers upto 10.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 12

Question 9.
Following web page is used to show “Passed” or “Failed” based on a mark. Mark less than 30 is cosidered as failed. There are some errors in the code. Correct them.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 13
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 14

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider the following declarations
var a, b, c, d;
a= “BVM”;
b=100;
c=true;
d=3.14157;
Predict the output of the following

  1. document.write(typeof(a)); (1)
  2. document.write(typeof(b)); (1)
  3. document.write(typeof(c)); (1)
  4. document.whte(typeof(d)); (1)
  5. document.write(typeof(e)); (1)

Answer:

  1. string
  2. number
  3. boolean
  4. number
  5. undefined

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 2.
Create a web page to print the day of a week
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 15
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 16
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 17

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 3.
What is an operator? Explain in detail.
Answer:
Operators are the symbols used to perform an operation.
1. Arithmetic operators:
It is a binary operator. It is used to perform addition(+), subtraction(-), division (/), multiplication(*), modulus(%-gives the remainder), increment(++) and decrement(—) operations.
Eg. If x=10 and y=3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 18
lf x=10 then
document.write(++x); → It prints 10+1=11
If x=10 then
document.write(x++); → It prints 10 itself.
If x=10 then
document.write(—x); It prints 10-1=9
lf x=10 then
document.write(x—); → It prints 10 itself.

2. Assignment operators:
If a=10 and b=3 then a=b. This statement sets the value of a and b are same, i.e. it sets a to 3.
It is also called short hands If X=10 and Y= 3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 19

3. Relational(Comparison) operators:
It is used to perform comparison or relational operation
between two values and returns either true or false.
Eg: If X=10 and Y=3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 20

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

4. Logical operators:
Here AND(&&), OR(||) are binary operators and NOT(!) is a unary operator. It is used to combine relational operations and it gives either true or false
If X=true and Y=false then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 21
Both operands must be true to get a true value in the case of AND(&&) operation
If X=true and Y=false then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 22
Either one of the operands must be true to get a true value in the case of OR(||) operation
If X= true and Y=false then

!X!Y
falsetrue

5. String addition operator(+):
This is also called concatenation operator. lt joins(concatenates)two strings and forms a string.
Eg: var x, y, z;
x= “BVM HSS;
y= “Kalparamba”;
z=x+y;
Here the variable z becomes “BVM HSS Kalparamba”.
Note: If both the operands are numbers then addition operator(+) produces number as a result otherwise it produces string as a result. Consider the following
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 23

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 4.
Write down the control structures used in JavaScript.
Answer:
Control structures in JavaScript. In general the execution of the program is sequential, we can change the normal execution by using the control structures.
1. simple if
Syntax:
if(test expression)
{
statements;
}
First the test expression is evaluated, if it is true then the statement block will be executed otherwise not.

if-else
Syntax:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 24
First the test expression is evaluated, if it is true then the statement block1 will be executed otherwise statement block? will be evaluated.

2. switch
It is a multiple branch statement. Its syntax is
given below.
switch(expression)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 25
First expression evaluated and selects the statements with matched case value.
Eg.
switch (n)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 26

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

3. for loop
If a statement wants to execute more than once.
Loop is used.
for loop is an entry controlled loop.
The syntax of for loop is given below
For(initialisation; testing; updation)
{
Body of the for loop;
}

4. while loop
If a statement wants to execute more than once.
Loop is used.
It is also an entry controlled loop The syntax is given below
Loop variable initialised
while(expression)
{
Body of the loop;
Update loop variable;
}
Here the loop variable must be initialised out side the while loop. Then the expression is evaluated if it is true then only the body of the loop will be executed and the loop variable must be updated inside the body. The body of the loop will be executed until the expression becomes false.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 5.
Write down the different mouse events used in JavaScript.
Answer:
Different mouse events and their description is given below

EventDescription
onClickIt occurs when the user clicks on an object by using mouse
onMouseEnterIt occurs when the mouse pointer is moved onto an object
onMouseLeaveIt occurs when the mouse pointer is moved out of an object
onKeyDownIt occurs when the user presses a key on the keyboard
onKeyUpIt occurs when the user releases a key on the keyboard

Question 6.
Create a web page that displays the capital of a state.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 27
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 28

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 29

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script Let Us Practice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Develop a web page to display the following screen. (3 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 30
User can enter a number in the first text box. On clicking the show button, product of all numbers from 1 to the entered limit should be displayed in the second text box.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 31
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 32
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 33

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 2.
Develop a web to display the following screen. (5 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 34
User can enter a number in the first text box. On clicking the show button, Even or Odd should be displayed in the second text box depending on whetherthe number is even or odd.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 35
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 36

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 3.
Develop a web page to display the following screen. (5 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 37
The user can enter an age in the text box. If the user enters an alphabet, instead of a number in the text box, on clicking the show button, it should display a message “Invalid Age” to the user. Otherwise it should display a message “Correct Data”.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 38
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 39

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 4.
Develop a login page as shown in the following figure. (5 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 40
The page must contain one text box for entering the username and one password box for entering the password. The user name must contain at least 4 characters and the password must contain at least 6 characters. The first two characters in the password must be numbers. On clicking the show button, if the valid data are given in boxes, a message “Correct Data” should be displayed. Otherwise, “Wrong Data” message should be displayed.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 41
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 42
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 43

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 5.
Develop a web page to implement a simple calculator. The page should have two text boxes to enter two numbers. It should also have 4 buttons to add, subtract, multiply and divide the two numbers. The answer should be displayed in a third text box on clicking the button. The web page should be as shown in the following figure. (5 Mark)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 44
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 45
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 46
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 47

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 48

Plus Two Computer Application Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script Let Us Assess Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write the value of the variable z in each of the following. (5 Mark)
(a) var x, y, z;
x = 5;
y = 3;
z = ++x – y—;
Answer:
z = 6 – 3 = 3 Hence z=3.

(b) var x, y, z;
x = ”12″;
y = 13;
z = x+y;
Answer:
z = “12” + 13 = 1213. If one of the operand is a string the two strings concatenates the strings. That is it concatenates two strings.

(c) var x, y, z;
x = 20;
y = 8;
x % = y;
z = x++;
Answer:
x % = y means x = x%y.
that is x= 20 % 8.
i. e. x= 4.
Then z= 4. (x++ first use the value then change).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

(d) var x, y, z;
x = 1;
y = 4;
z = !(x<y);
Answer:
The answer is false. z = !(1 <4) z = !(true) z = false.

(e) var x, y, z;
x = 5;
y = 6;
Z = (x>y) || (y% 2 == 0);
Answer:
The answer is true.
Steps
z = (5>6) || (6%2==0)
= (false) || (0 == 0)
= (false) || (true)
= true.

Question 2.
Predict the output of the following. (5 Mark)
(a)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 49
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 50

(b)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 51
Answer:
The output is 2500.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

(c)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 52
Answer:
The output is 275.

(d)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 53
Answer:
The output is 120(5 factorial).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 3.
Following is an html code segment in a web page (1 Mark)
<FORM Name=”frmStud”>
<INPUT Type=”text” Name=”studentName”>
</FORM>
Fill in the blanks to store the value of the text box to the variable n.
var n;
n =______;
Answer:
n = document.frmstud.studentName.value;

Question 4.
Suppose you have written a JavaScript function named checkData(). You want to execute the function when the mouse pointer is just moved over the button. How will you complete the following to do the same? (1 Mark)
<INPUT Type=”button”_____= “checkData()”>
Answer:
<INPUT Type=”button” onMouseEnter= “checkData()”>

Question 5.
Explain <SCRIPT> tag and its attributes. (2 Mark)
Answer:
Scripts are small programs embedded in the HTML pages, to write scripts <SCRIPT> tag is used.
Language attribute specifies the name of the scripting language used.
Example:
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
_______
</SCRIPT>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 6 .
Write the syntax of a built in function in JavaScript. (5 Mark)
Answer:
Built in functions(methods)
1. alert(): This is used to display a message(dialogue box) on the screen.
eg: alert(“Welcome to JS”);

2. isNaN(): To check whether the given value is a number or not. It returns a Boolean value. If the value is not a number(NaN) then this function returns a true value otherwise it returns a false value.
Eg:

  • isNaN(“BVM”); returns true
  • isNaN(8172); returns false
  • isNaN(“680121”); returns false
  • alert(isNaN(8172); displays a message box as false.

3. toUpperCase(): This is used to convert the text to uppercase.
Eg:
var x=“bvm”;
alert(x.toUpperCase());
Output is as follows
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 54

4. toLowerCase(): This is used to convert the text to lower case.
Eg:
var x=“BVM”;
alert(x.toLowerCase());
Output is as follows
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 55

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

5. charAt(): It returns the character at a particular position.
Syntax: variable.charAt(index);
The index of first character is 0 and the second is 1 and so on.
Eg:
var x=”HIGHER SECONDARY”;
alert(x.charAt(4));
Output is as follows
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 56

Eg 2.
var x=”HIGHER SECONDARY”;
alert(“The characters @ first position is “+ x.charAt(0));
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 57

6. length property: It returns the number of characters in a string.
Syntax: variable.length;
Eg.
var x=”HIGHER SECONDARY”;
alert(“The number of characters is “+ x.length);
Output is as follows(note that space is a character)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 58

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 7.
Classify the following values in JavaScript into suitable data types. (3 Mark)
“Welcome”, “123”, “true”, 67.4, .98, false, “hello”
Answer:

  • Number: 67.4 and .98.
  • String: “Welcome”, “123″, “true” and “hello”.
  • Boolean: false.

Question 8.
What is meant by undefined data type in JavaScript mean? (2 Mark)
Answer:
undefined: It is a special data type to represent variables that are not defined using var.

Question 9.
Explain operators in JavaScript. (5 Mark)
Answer:
Operators in JavaScript. Operators are the symbols used to perform an operation
1. Arithmetic operators:
It is a binary operator. It is used to perform add i-tion (+), subtraction(-), division(/), multiplication(*), modulus(%-givesthe remainder), increment(++) and decrement(—) operations. Eg. If x = 10 and y = 3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 59
If x = 10 then
document.write(++x); → It prints 10+1=11
If x = 10 then
document.write(x++); → It prints 10 itself.
If x = 10 then
document.write(—x); It prints 10-1=9
If x = 10 then
document.write(x—);→ It prints 10 itself.

2. Assignment operators:
If a = 10 and b = 3 then a = b. This statement sets the value of a and b are same,i.e. it sets a to 3. It is also called short hands
lf X = 10 and Y = 3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 60

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

3. Relational(Comparison) operators:
It is used to perform comparison or relational operation between two values and returns either true or false.
Eg:
lf X = 10 and Y= 3 then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 62

4. Logical operators:
Here AND(&&), OR(||) are binary operators and NOT(!) is a unary operator. It is used to combine relational operations and it gives either true or false
If X = true and Y= false then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 63
Both operands must be true to get a true value in the case of AND(&&) operation If X = true and Y = false then
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 64
Either one of the operands must be true to get a true value in the case of OR(||) operation If X = true and Y = false then

!X!Y
falsetrue

5. String addition operator(+):
This is also called concatenation operator. It joins (concatenates) two strings and forms a string.
Eg:
var x, y, z;
x= “BVM HSS”;
y= “Kalparamba”;
z = x + y;
Here the variable z becomes “BVM HSS Kalparamba”.
Note: If both the operands are numbers then addition operator(+) produces number as a result otherwise it produces string as a result. Consider the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 65
Eg:

  • 8(number) + 3(number) = 11 (Result is a number)
  • 8 (number)+ “3”( string) = “83″ (Result is a string)
  • “8” (string) + 3 (number) = “83”(Result is a string)
  • “8” (string) + “3” (string) = “83” (Result is a string).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 10.
Write JavaScript functions to perform the following (5 Mark)

  1. To check whether a variable N contains a number
  2. To convert the string “scert” to all capitals.
  3. To convert the string “HTML” to all small letters.
  4. To display a message “Welcome to functions”.
  5. To display the third character in the string “Computer”.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 66
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 67

2. <HTML>
<head>
<title>
check
</title>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
function convert()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 68

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

3. <HTML>
<head>
<title>
check
</title>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
function convert()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 69

4. <HTML>
<head>
<title>
check
</title>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
function display()
{
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 70

5. <HTML>
<head>
<title>
check
</title>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
function display()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 71

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 11.
Write JavaScript code to display the length of the string “Computer”. (3 Mark)
Answer:
<HTML>
<head>
<title>
length of a string
</title>
</head>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”>
var str.len;
str=”Computer”;
len=str.length;
alert(“The length of the string Computer is “+len);
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 12.
A web page contains a putton. Write HTML code for the button which executes a function Message() on the occurance of the following events. (2 Mark

  1. When a user clicks the mouse on the button.
  2. When user moves the mouse over the button.

Answer:

  1. <input type=”button”value=”Message” onClick=”Message()”>
  2. <inputtype-button”value=”Message” onMouseEnter=”Message()”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

Question 13.
What are the advantages of writing JavaScript code in the head section of an HTML page? (2 Mark)
Answer:
Scripts can be placed inside the <HEAD> section. This method is widely accepted method. The main reason for this is that body section contains a large volume of text contents to be displayed on the web page. More over the head section is loaded before the body section.

Question 14.
Design an HTML page that contains a text box to enter the marks in a given subject. (5 Mark)
(a) Write HTML code for this web page
(b) Provide validations for this text box in a separate JavaScript file and link it with the HTML file. The validations are

  • it should not be empty
  • it should be a number
  • it should be between 0 and 60.

(c) List the advantages of writing the script in a separate file.
Answer:
(a)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 72

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script

(b) Step 1.
Take a Notepad and type the following and save it as check.js.
function checkData()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 73
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 74

Step 2.
Take another Notepad and type the following and save it as valid.html and execute valid.html file
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 75
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 76

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using Java Script - 77

(c) We can write scripts in a file and save it as a separate file with the extension .js. The advantage is that this file can be used across multiple HTML files and can be enhance the speed of page loading

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Students can Download Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption Questions and Answers, Plus One zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Plus One Digestion and Absorption One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Hepato-pancreatic duct opens into the duodenum and carries
(a) Bile
(b) Pancreatic juice
(c) Both bile and pancreatic juice
(d) Saliva
Answer:
(c) Both bile and pancreatic juice

Question 2.
One of the following is not a common disorder associated with digestive system
(a) Tetanus
(b) Diarrhea
(c) Jaundice
(d) Dysentery
Answer:
(a) Tetanus

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 3.
A gland not associated with the alimentary canal is
(a) Pancreas
(b) Adrenal
(c) Liver
(d) Salivary gland
Answer:
(b) Adrenal

Question 4.
Liver is the largest gland and is associated with various functions, choose one which is not correct
(a) Metabolism of carbohydrate
(b) Digestion of fat
(c) Formation of bile
(d) Secretion of  hormone called gastric
Answer:
(d) Secretion of hormone called gastric

Question 5.
Mark the right statement among the following
(a) Trypsinogen is an inactive enzyme
(b) Trypsinogen is secreted by intestinal mucosa
(c) Enterokinase is secreted by pancrease
(d) Bile contains trypsin
Answer:
(a) Trypsinogen is an inactive enzyme

Question 6.
The major health and nutritional problems mainly arises due to low amount of minerals and vitamins in diet. Name the two PEMs.
Answer:
Kwashiorkor, Marasmus

Question 7.
Deficiency symptoms of a disease are given below: Identify it.
Thin Limbs, retarded growth of body and brain, swelling of legs due to retention of water (oedema), reddish hair, pot belly and diarrhea.
Answer:
Kwashiorkor

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 8.
Find the set most suitable with “succus entericus”
(a) bilirubin and biliyerdin
(b) salivary amylase and lysozymes
(c) disaccharides, dipeptidases and lipases
(d) Trypsinogen, chymotrypsinogen procarboxypep-tidases
Answer:
(c) Disaccharides, dipeptidase and lipases

Question 9.
Complete the columns a, b, c, d, e & f

  1. Maltose _______a_______ + ________b_________
  2. Sucrose _______c_______ + ________d_________
  3. Lactose _______e_______ + ________f__________

Answer:

  1. Meltose Glucose + Glucose
  2. Sucrose Glucose + Fructose
  3. Lactose Glucose + Galactose

Question 10.
From this which statement is correct?
(a) Human denititian is heterodont
(b) Fat is soluble in water
(c) Fructose absorbed passively
(d) Small intestine devoid of villi
Answer:
(a) Human dentitian is heterodont

Question 11.
The human intestine is long because
(a) Bacteria in food can be killed gradually
(b) It increases surface are for absorption of food
(c) It provides more space for food storage
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) It increases surface area for absorption of food.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 12.
Which of the following statement is most suitable for gastrin?
(a) It stimulates the secretion of gastric juice.
(b) It stimulates the secretion of bile.
(c) It inhibits gastric gland to produce gastric secretion.
Answer:
(a) It stimulates the secretion of gastric juice.

Question 13.
Name the end product of digestion of following?

  1. Starch
  2. Protein

Answer:

  1. Glucose
  2. Amino acids

Plus One Digestion and Absorption Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Copy the diagram and label the parts.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 1
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 2

Question 2.
A 15 year old boy was admitted in a hospital with severe case of stomach ulcer. At the end of various tests it is found that Mucus glands are absent. Do you agree with this? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Yes. Highly concentrated HCL is presented in gastric juice. Mucus from the mucus gland protect the epithelium lining of the stomach from the action of HCL. So the absence of mucus gland cause stomach ulcer.

Question 3.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 3

  1. Name the process (a).
  2. Name the enzyme (b).
  3. Name the product (c).

Answer:

  1. (a) – bile salt – emulsification
  2. (b) – pancreatic lipase
  3. (c) – Glycerol

Question 4.
Distinguish between Renin and Rennin.
Answer:
1. Rennin: A proteolytic enzyme found in gastric juice of infants which helps in the digestion of milk proteins.

2. Renin: It is an enzyme releasing from JGA, when there is a fall in glomerular filtration rate. Renin converts angiotensinogen into antigotensin II and regulate urine formation.

Question 5.
Complete the passage.
Fatty acids and glycerol are first incorporated into small droplets called _______ which move into intestinal mucosa. They are reformed into very small _______ coated fat globules called _________ which are transported to the __________ in the villi.
Answer:
Fatty acids and glycerol are first incorporated into small droplets called micelles which move into intestinal mucosa. They are reformed into very small Protein coated fat globules called Chylomicrons which are transported to the lacteals in the villi.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 6.

  1. It is not necessary to produce amylase in an inactive form in our body, but it is not in the case of Trypsin.
  2. In certain circumstances, peptic ulcer are found on the gut wall.

Answer:

1. Proteins are body building molecules. If proteins digesting enzymes are secreted inactive forms, they would hydrolyse the cellular and extracellular proteins of the organism itself. So the protein-digesting enzyme trypsin is secreted in their inactive form.

2. Mucus and bicarbonates present in the gastric and intestinal secretion protects the gut wall from the action of HCL and protein-digesting enzymes. In the absence of mucus and bicarbonates, peptic ulcer are found on the gut wall.

Question 7.
Construct a flow chart showing the passage of food through the alimentary canal of man.
Answer:
Mouth → Pharynx → Oesophagus → Stomach → Small intestine → Large intestine → Rectum → Anus.

Question 8.
Differentiate between Serosa and Lumen.
Answer:
The outermost layer of the wall of alimentary canal is called serosa. The inner hollow space in the alimentary canal is called lumen.

Question 9.
Find the odd one out and justify your answer.
Salivary gland, milk gland, gastric gland, thyroid gland.
Answer:
Thyroid gland. Thyroid gland is an endocrine gland. All others are exocrine gland.

Question 10.
Give below in bracket are the names of some digestive enzymes group them into A – Gastric, B – Pancreatic and C – Intestinal (Trypsin, Dipeptidase, Rennin, Maltase, Pepsin, Chymotrypsin, Nuclease, Amylase)
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 4

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 11.
Ramu ate boiled rice, what are the changes that it undergoes before being absorbed in the small intestine.
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 5

Question 12.
The dental formula of human is represented as \(i \frac{2}{2}\), \(\mathrm{C} \frac{1}{1}, \mathrm{Pm} \frac{2}{2}, \mathrm{m} \frac{3}{3}\). What do i, c, pm, m indicate?
Answer:
i – Incisors, c-Canines, pm – Pre molars, m – Molars

Question 13.
Describe the Diphyodont and Thecodont characteristics of human dentition.
Answer:
1. Thecodont: It is a dentition in which the teeth are placed in the sockets of jawbones.

2. Diphyodont: It is a dentition in which the teeth appear twice in the lifetime of man. They are milk teeth and permanent teeth.

Question 14.
Observe the figure given below and answer the following questions.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 6

  1. ‘x’ is a substance needed for digestion. What is the function of ‘x’?
  2. Name the gastrointestinal hormone responsible for the contraction of gall bladder to release ‘x’.

Answer:

  1. Bile – emulsification
  2. Cholecystokinin

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 15.
Given below are the layers of human gut. Write a flow chart from inner region.
Serosa, mucosa, muscularis, submucosa
Answer:
Mucosa → Submucosa → Muscularis → Serosa

Question 16.
After observing the model of the lumen of human intestine your friend said that “the villi projected into the lumen actually block the movement of food through the intestine, if the villi are absent food can easily pass through the intestine.” How will you respond to this comment?
Answer:
Villi actually decrease the movement of chyme. The function of villi is to increase the surface area of the intestine for the absorption of digested nutrients.

Question 17.
Out of the following list, pick out the enzymes that take part in carbohydrate digestion.
Maltase, Lactase, Sucrase, Peptidase, Salivary amylase, Isomaltase.
Answer:
Maltase, Lactase, Sucrase, Salivary amylase, Isomaltase

Question 18.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 7

  1. Mention the factor ‘x’ involved in the process.
  2. Identify the process and write its importance.

Answer:

  1. Bile salts
  2. Emulsification. The conversion large fat globules into tiny fat droplets is called emulsification. Bile salt helps emulsification. Emulsification increase the surface area for lipase action.

Question 19.
Below are given the names of the enzymes and their source of secretion. Match them.

EnzymesSource of secretion
AmylaseStomach
NucleasePancreas
LipaseSmall intestine
ProteaseSalivary gland

Answer:

EnzymesSource of secretion
AmylaseSalivary gland
NucleaseSmall intestine
LipasePancreas
ProteaseStomach

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 20.
Strong acidic food in the stomach stimulate the secretion of secretin from duodenal wall.

  1. On which part of the digestive tract, secretion act?
  2. What is the role of secreting in digestion?

Answer:

  1. Secretin acts on exocrine part of pancreas.
  2. Secretin stimulates secretion of water and bicarbonate ions from pancreas. It protects the intestinal mucosa from acid as well as provide an alkaline medium for enzymatic activity in intestine.

Question 21.
Fatty chyme in duodenum decreases the speed of peristalsis. How the fatty chyme affects the speed of peristalsis?
Answer:
Fatty chyme in duodenum stimulate the release of GIP (Gastric Inhibitory Peptide Hormone). GIP produced by duodenum, inhibit gastric mobility.

Question 22.
Mention whether the following statements true or false. Justify your answer.

  1. Chymotrypsin is a fat digesting enzyme.
  2. Deglutition occurs in the intestine.
  3. Intestinal juice is also known as succus entericus.
  4. Function of enterokinase is to break peptide bond in proteins.

Answer:

  1. False – It is prominent protein digesting enzyme present in pancreaticjuice.
  2. False – It is the process of swallowing of food . from the pharynx to oesophagus.
  3. True – The collective secretion of intestinal gland is known as intestinal juice or succus entericus.
  4. False – Enteokinase present in succus entericus activates the inactive trypsinogen into active trypsin.

Question 23.
The following diagram shows the action of protein digesting enzymes of pancreas.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 8

(a) Label the number 1, 2 and 3.
(b) Trypsinogen and Chymotrypsinogen are proenzymes (inactive enzymes). Why do they being produced inactive?

Answer:
(a) Label the number 1, 2 and 3.

  1. Enterokinase
  2. Chymotrypsin
  3. Peptides

(b) Trypsin and Chymotrypsin are protein digesting enzyme formed from their respective inactive forms at the time of digestion of the protein food. If they are available all time in active form, they would damage the intestinal wall.

Question 24.
The calorific value of respiratory substrates are different. Do you agree? Give reasons.
Answer:
Yes, The calorific values of carbohydrates, proteins and fats are 4.1 kcal /g, 5.65 kcal /g and 9.45 kcal /g, respectively.

Plus One Digestion and Absorption Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Gastric glands are formed of three types of secretory cells. Name them and mention their function.
Answer:

  1. Mucous cell – Secrete mucus
  2. Chief cells – Secrete proteolytic enzyme Pepsin
  3. Parietal cells – Secrete HCL

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 2.
Observe the flow chart and answer the questions.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 9

  1. What is the purpose of micelles in fat absorption?
  2. Identify ‘e’.

Answer:
1. Fatty acids and glycerol being insoluble, cannot be absorbed into the blood. They are first incorporated into small droplets called micelles which move into the intestinal mucosa. Micelles are formed with the help of bile salts and phospholipids,

2. Chylomicrons

Question 3.
Observe and analyse the graph and answer the following questions.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 10

  1. Which region of the alimentary canal has maximum acidic pH?
  2. Why different regions of alimentary canal has different pH How this is maintained?

Answer:
1. Stomach

2. pH is the buccal cavity – in between 6.5 and 7, which is maintained by HCO3 – in the saliva. pH in the stomach is in between 1.8 and 2, which is maintained by HCL, secreted from gastric gland. The pH in the intestine is in between 8 and 9, which is maintained by HCO3– present in the bile and pancreatic juice.

Question 4.
Observe the given diagram.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 11

  1. Identify the parts a, b, c.
  2. If part ‘c’ has removed from a person due to a disease. What will be the changes in the digestive process of that person?

Answer:
1. a – Liver, b – Gall bladder, c – Pancreas

2. If the pancreas is totally removed from a person, he will die in a short period. Even if pancreas is only partially removed it will collapse the digestive process. In addition to this, the body cannot regulate the glucose level in blood.

The digestive juice secreted by pancreas contains three enzymes trypsin, amylase and lipase. Thus if pancreas is removed, the production of digestive enzyme will collapse.

Question 5.
Complete the flow chart.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 12
Answer:
(a) Emulsification
(b) Pancreatic lipase
(c) Fatty acids
(d) Glycerol
(e) Micelles
(f) Chylomicrons

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 6.
Observe the diagram. Complete the boxes A, B and C appropriately.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 13
Answer:

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 14

Question 7.
Observe the diagram.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 15

  1. Identify the ducts A and B.
  2. B is guarded by a sphincter in its opening to duodenum. Name it.
  3. Write any two functions of liver.

Answer:

  1. Ducts A and B are
    • A – Common bile duct
    • B – Hepato – pancreatic duct
  2. Sphincter of Oddi.
  3. Functions of liver are:
    • Production and secretion of bile
    • Production of albumin, Fibrinogen, Prothrombin, etc.
    • Detoxification.

Question 8.
Given the diagram of intestinal villus.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 16

  1. Identify the part labelled as ‘a’ and ‘b’ in figure.
  2. Give the function of part ‘a’.
  3. What is the role of ‘b’ in digestion?

Answer:

  1. Identify the part labelled as ‘a’ and ‘b’ in figure
    • ‘a’ Lacteal
    • ‘b’ Crypts of Liberkuhn
  2. Absorption of fat and fat soluble vitamins.
  3. Crypts of Lieberkuhn produce intestinal juice helps in digestion.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 9.
Find the odd one out from each group and justify.

  1. Cardiac, Villi, Fundic, Pyloric
  2. Duodenum, Jejunum, ileum, villi
  3. Parotid, gastric, sublingual, submaxillary

Answer:

1. Villi:
Cardiac, fundic and pyloric are the three major parts of stomach. But villi are small finger like foldings in the intestine.

2. Villi:
Duodenum, jejunum and ileum are three regions of intestine but villi are small finger like foldings inside the intestine.

3. Gastric:
Parotid, Sublingual and submaxillary are three pairs of salivary gland produce saliva. But gastric gland is stomach gland produce gastric juice.

Plus One Digestion and Absorption NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Choose the correct answer among the following:

  • Gastricjuice contains
    1. pepsin, lipase and rennin
    2. trypsin, lipase and rennin
    3. trypsin, pepsin and lipase
    4. trypsin, pepsin and rennin
  • Succus entericus is the name given to
    1. a junction between ileum and large intestine
    2. intestinal juice
    3. swelling in the gut
    4. appendix

Answer:

  • Gastricjuice contains
    1. Pepsin, Lipase and Rennin
  • Succus entericus is the name given to
    2. Intestinal Juice

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 2.
Match column I with and Rennin
Column I Column II

Column IColumn II
(a) Bilirubin and biliverdin(i) Parotid
(b) Hydrolysis of starch(ii) Bile
(c) Digestion of fat(iii) Lipases
(d) Salivary gland(iv) Amylases

Answer:
(a) – (ii), (b) – (iv), (c) – (iii), (d) – (i)

Question 3.
Why are villi present in the intestine and not in the stomach?
Answer:
The major portion of absorption takes palce in small intestines. In stomach simple sugars, water and alcohol absorbed. Villi are specialized projections in small intestine with large absorbent area. This facilities better absorbtion of complex molecules as well.

As food is fit to be absorbed only after complete digestion so villi’s turn comes after all the digestive processes are complete.

Question 4.
State the role pancreatic juice in digestion of proteins.
Answer:
The pancreatic juice contains inactive enzymes – trypsinogen, chymotrypsinogen, procarboxypetidases, amylases, lipases and nucleases. Trypsinogen is activated by an enzyme, enterokinase, secreted by the intestinal mucosa into active trypsin which in turn activities the other enzymes in the pancreatic juice.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 17

Question 5.
Describe the process of digestion of protein in stomach.
Answer:
The proenzyme pepsinogen, on exposure to hydrochloric acid gets converted into the active enzyme pepsin, the proteolytic enzyme of the stomach. Pepsin converts proteins into proteoses and peptones (peptides).

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 18

Question 6.
Give the dental formula of human beings.
Answer:
Arrangement of teeth in each half of the upper and lower jaw in the order I, C, PM, M is represented by a dental formula which in human is as follows:
\(\frac{2123}{2123}\)

Question 7
Bile juice contains no digestive enzymes, yet it is important for digestion. Why?
Answer:
Bile emulsifies the fat making it easier digest by enzymes. Bile juice also helps inactivation of lipase, the enzyme which digests fat. Additionally, bile converts the acidic chyme to alkaline so that other enzymes can work on food.

Question 8.
Describe the digestive role of chymotrypsin. Which two other digestive enzymes of the same category are secreted by its source gland?
Answer:
Chymotrypsin digests proteins and converts it into dipeptides. Other digestive enzymes of the same category are Trypsin and Carboxypeptidase and they perform similar function.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 9.
Discuss the main steps in the digestion of proteins as the food passes through different parts of the alimentary canal.
Answer:
In the stomach the proenzyme pepsinogen gets converted into pepsin which acts on protein to convert it into peptone.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 19
In small intestine enzymes Chymotrypsin, trypsin and carboxypeptdase do the rest of the digestion of protein.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption - 20

Question 10.
Explain the term thecodont and diphyodont.
Answer:
Thecodont. In human beings each tooth is embedded in a socket of jaw bone. This type of attachment is called the codont.

Diphyodont. Majority of mammals including human beings form two sets of teeth during their life, a set of temporary milk or deciduous teeth replaced by a set of permanent or adult teeth. This type of dentition is called diphyodont.

Question 11.
Name different types of teeth and their number in an adult human.
Answer:
An adult human has 32 permanent teeth which are four different types (Heterodont dentition)

Plus One Digestion and Absorption Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In intestine, food materials are absorbed through
(a) villi
(b) subtentacular cells
(c) sub-mucosa
(d) gastric glands
Answer:
(a) villi

Question 2.
Diastema refers to
(a) gap between the teeth
(b) gap between tongue and teeth
(c) ciliary cells on alimentary wall
(d) cell lining along pharynx
Answer:
(a) gap between the teeth

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 3.
Pylorus is present between
(a) small and large intestine
(b) pancreas and small intestine
(c) oesophagus and stomach
(d) stomach and duodenum
Answer:
(d) stomach and duodenum

Question 4.
Elephant tusks are
(a) molars
(b) canines
(c) incisors
(d) premolars
Answer:
(c) incisors

Question 5.
Which of the following cells produce HCL
(a) beta-cells
(b) alpha-cells
(c) Oxyntic cells
(d) Chief cells
Answer:
(c) Oxyntic cells

Question 6.
Most abundant mineral of animal body is
(a) iron
(b) sodium
(c) potassium
(d) calcium
Answer:
(d) calcium

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 7.
Bile salts act as activator of which enzyme?
(a) Pepsinogen
(b) Trypsinogen
(c) Lipase
(d) Pancreatic amylase
Answer:
(c) Lipase

Question 8.
When breast feeding is replaced by less nutritive food low in proteins and calories; the infants below the age of one year are likely to suffer from
(a) marasmus
(b) rickets
(c) kwashiorkor
(d) pellagra
Answer:
(a) marasmus

Question 9.
Which one of the following pairs of food components in humans reaches the stomach totally undigested?
(a) protein and starch
(b) Starch and fat
(c) fat and cellulose
(d) Starch and cellulose
Answer:
(c) fat and cellulose

Question 10.
A young infant may be feeding entirely on mother’s milk, which is white in colour but the stools, which the infant passes out is quite yellowish. This yellow colour is due to
(a) intestinal juice
(b) bile pigments passed through bile juice
(c) undigested milk protein casein
(d) pancreaticjuice poured into duodenum
Answer:
(b) bile pigments passed through bile juice

Question 11.
Which one of the following statements is true regarding digestion and absorption of food in humans?
(a) Oxyntic cells in our stomach secrete the proenzyme pepsinogen
(b) Fructose and amino acids arc abosrbed through intestinal mucosa with the help of carrier ions like Na+
(c) Chylomicrons are small lipoprotein particles that are transported from intestine into blood capillaries
(d) About 60°o of starch is hydrolysed by salivary amylase in our mouth
Answer:
(c) Chylomicrons are small lipoprotein particles that are transported from intestine into blood capillaries

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 12.
Secretin and cholecystokinin are digestive hormones. They are secreted in
(a) oesophagus
(b) ileum
(c) pancreas
(d) duodenum
Answer:
(d) duodenum

Question 13.
FAD is a coenzyme derived from
(a) riboflavin
(b) vitamin-B12
(c) thiamine
(d) niacin
Answer:
(b) vitamin-B12

Question 14.
The pH of the digestive juices within the human small intestine is between 7.5 and 8.5. This environment is slightly.
(a) basic
(b) acidic
(c) neutral
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) basic

Question 15.
Lipids, which can be found in oil based salad dressings and ice cream, during digestion are splitted into
(a) fatty acids and glycerol
(b) glycerol and amino acids
(c) glucose and fatty acids
(d) glucose and amino acids
Answer:
(a) fatty acids and glycerol

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 16.
Crypts of Leiberkuhn are involved in
(a) secretion of succus entericus
(b) secretion of rennin
(c) secretion of ptyalin
(d) digestion of food
Answer:
(a) secretion of succus entericus

Question 17.
Which of the following is an organic molecule needed by the body in small amounts?
(a) Protein
(b) Zinc
(c) Vitamin-C
(d) Monosaccharide
Answer:
(c) Vitamin-C

Question 18.
Which one is not true about vitamins?
(a) Vitamins are organic catalysts
(b) Vitamins are indispensable for life
(c) Vitamins act as a source of energy
(d) Tocopherol is anti-sterility vitamin
Answer:
(c) Vitamins act as a source of energy

Question 19.
The malnutrition disease in man is
(a) Cridu chat syndrome
(b) Klinefelter’s syndrome
(c) Potbelly syndrome
(d) Edward’s syndrome
Answer:
(c) Potbelly syndrome

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Digestion and Absorption

Question 20.
The process of resynthesis of food materials from simpler food molecules is called
(a) biosynthesis
(b) catabolism
(c) absorption
(d) assimilation
Answer:
(a) biosynthesis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Students can Download Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Plus One Botany Cell The Unit of Life One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which organelle is not a part of the endomembrane system?
(a) lysosome
(b) vacuole
(c) mitochondria
(d) Golgi complex
Answer:
(c) mitochondria

Question 2.
Smooth endoplasmic reticulum is well developed in cells which synthesise
(a) steroids
(b) proteins
(c) carbohydrates
(d) all of these
Answer:
(a) steroids

Question 3.
The type of ribosome found in prokaryotes is
(a) 70 S
(b) 80 S
(c) 60 S
(d) 50 S
Answer:
(a) 70 S

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 4.
Who proposed the fluid mosaic model of plasma membrane in 1972?
(a) Singer and Nicolson
(b) Rober Hooke
(c) Rrobertsons model
(d) Camilo golgi
Answer:
(a) Singer and Nicolson

Question 5.
An organelle with internal cross section showing the characteristic 9 + 2 arrays is
(a) microtubule
(b) microfilament
(c) cilia and flagellum
(d) tubulin
Answer:
(c) cilia and flagellum

Question 6.
Smaller, lipid-soluble molecules diffuse faster through cell membrane, but the movement of hydrophilic substances are facilitated by certain biomolecules named as ____________
Answer:
Proteins.

Question 7.
Name the cell organelle rich in acid hydrolase.
Answer:
Lysosome

Question 8.
Name the stacked particle present on the inner sur¬face of inner mitochondrial membrane.
Answer:
Oxysomes

Question 9.
Give the chemical nature of ribosomes.
Answer:
rRNAs and proteins

Question 10.
Observe the relationship between the first two terms and fill up the blanks.

  1. Mitochondria: Cristae
    Chloroplast: ……….
  2. Moss: Capsule
    Fern: ………….

Answer:

  1. Grana
  2. Sporangium

Question 11.
Mark the odd one out.

  1. Nucleus; Nucleoli; Centriole; Chromosome
  2. Family, class, taxon, phylum

Answer:

  1. Centriole
  2. Taxon

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 12.
Name the protein associated with chromosomes.
Answer:
Histones

Question 13.
The cell wall of Bacterium is made up of
(a) Cellulose
(b) Hemi cellulose
(c) Lignin
(d) Peptidoglycan
Answer:
(d) Peptidoglycan.

Question 14.
ETS is associated with F0-F1 particles and many respiratory enzymes. What is the role of F0-F1 particles in mitochondria?
Answer:
ATP synthesis

Question 15.
Why is nucleus called the director of the cell?
Answer:
It controls and coordinates all the cellular functions.

Question 16.
What will you call a cell not having ER, Golgi body, mitochondria, nuclear membrane, etc.
Answer:
Prokaryotic cell

Question 17.
Which organelles are called ribonucleoprotein particles of the cell?
Answer:
Ribosome

Question 18.
Name which cell organelle is associated with secretory activity.
Answer:
Golgi body

Question 19.
Identify the powerhouse of a cell. Give justification.
Answer:
Mitochondria – synthesis of ATP

Question 20.
Which of the following is not true of a eukaryotic cell?
(a) It has 80S type of ribosome present in the mitochondria
(b) It has 80S type of ribosome present in the cytoplasm
(c) Mitochondria contain circular DNA
(d) Membrane-bound organelles are present
Answer:
(a) lt has 80S type of ribosome present in the mitochondria.

Question 21.
Which of the following statements is true for a secretory cell?
(a) Golgi apparatus is absent
(b) Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum (RER) is easily observed in the cell
(c) Only Smooth Endoplasmic Reticulum (SER) is present
(d) Secretory granules are formed in nucleus.
Answer:
(b) Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum (RER) is easily observed in the cell

Question 22.
Name the compound which gives fluidity and functional specificity to biomembranes.
Answer:
Fluidy by lipids and functional specificity by proteins

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 23.
Which of the following is correct?

  1. Cells of all living organisms have a definite nucleus
  2. Both animal and plant cells have a well-defined cell wall.

Answer:

  1. false
  2. false

Plus One Botany Cell The Unit of Life Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
While studying the stages of meiosis following features observed at one stage.

  1. Pairing of homologous chromosomes.
  2. Formation of synaptonemal complex. Identify the stage.

Answer:

  1. Zygotene
  2. Pachytene

Question 2.
Make a list of organelles that function as the cytoskeleton.
Answer:
The endoplasmic reticulum, microtubules, microfilaments, and intermediate fibers.

Question 3.
Name two cell organelles that are double membrane-bound. Write the main functions of each.
Answer:

  1. Chloroplast- Photosynthesis
  2. Mitochondria – cellular respiration

Question 4.
Name the cell organelles in the cell which act as the following.

  1. Protein factories
  2. Powerhouse
  3. Disposal unit
  4. Control centres

Answer:

  1. Ribosome
  2. Mitochondria
  3. Lysosomes
  4. Nucleus

Question 5.
Analyse the table and arrange the matter in an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img1
Answer:
1) Ribosome – 70S
2) Porin – Protein
3) Lignin – Secondary wall
4) Nucleus – Chromosome

Question 6.
Bacterial cell envelope is a complex structure. It is made up of various layers. Name the different layers in the Bacterial cell envelope.
Answer:
Glycocalyx, cell wall, and plasma membrane.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 7.
Pick up the odd one and state reason for your answer.
Golgi bodies, Nucteolus, Nucleus, Lysosome.
Answer:
Nucleolus. Remaining three are major cell organells seen in cytoplasm.

Question 8.
Mitochondria is called powerhouse of the cell. Comment.
Answer:
Mitochondria are the centres of production, storage, and distribution of energy for various metabolic activities of cell.

Question 9.
Table which shows a comparison of cell organisation in prokaryotes and eukaryotes. Complete the table.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img2
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img3

Question 10.
Observe the diagrams of two different phases of mitosis given below and write their names..
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img4
Answer:

  • A- Metaphase
  • B – Anaphase

Question 11.
Interphase in cell cycle is referred to as resting phase. Do you consider this statement true? Substantiate your answer.
Answer:
No. Synthesis of DNA, RNA & Protein occurs hence it is active stage.

Question 12.
Some statements related to certain cell organelles are given in column A. Identify the organelles and give their names correctly against each statement in column B.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img5
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img6

Question 13.
How RER is different from SER?
Answer:

  1. RER – Rough endoplasmic reticulum
    Contains ribosomes – protein synthesis
  2. SER – Smooth endoplasmic reticulum
    Devoid of ribosome – lipid synthesis & storage

Question 14.
Most accepted model of Biomembrance is best referred as ‘Protein Icebergs in the sea of Lipid”.

  1. Name the most accepted structural model for the Biomembrane.
  2. Who proposed it?

Answer:

  1. Fluid mosaic model
  2. Singer & Nicholson

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 15.
Functions and names of organells are given below arrange them into a table.
Mitochondria, Endoplasic reticulum, Ribosome, Chloroplast, protein synthesis, storage of energy, cytoskeleton, photosynthesis.
Answer:

  • Mitochondria – Storage of energy
  • Endoplasmic reticulum – Cytoskeleton
  • Ribosome – Protein synthesis
  • Chloroplast – Photosynthesis

Question 16.
Identify the given diagram. Copy and label the parts.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img7
Answer:

  • 1 – Stroma
  • 4 – Fret channels

Question 17.
Match the following.

AB
CristaeChloroplast
ZygoteneGolgi apparatus
MesosomeSynapsis
ThylakoidMitochondria
CisternaePlasma membrane

Answer:

CristaeMitochondria
ZygoteneSynapsis
MesosomePlasma membrane
ThylakoidChloroplast
CisternaeGolgi apparatus

Question 18.
Different types of chromosomes based on the position of centromere are given below.

  1. Classify them with necessary explanation.
  2. What is the peculiarity of the chromosome “C”?

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img8
Answer:
1.

  • A – Acrocentric chromosome – The centromere is near the end of the chromosome.
  • B – Sub-metacentric chromosome – the centromere is near the middle of the chromosome.
  • C – Metacentric chromosome – The centromere is at the middle of the chromosome,

2. It has both secondary constriction and a satellite.

Question 19.
Name the organelles which act as the following.

  1. cell’s circulatory system
  2. protein factories
  3. powerhouse
  4. disposal units
  5. control centres

Answer:

  1. Endoplasmic reticulum
  2. Ribosomes
  3. Mitochondria
  4. Lysosomes
  5. Nucleus

Question 20.
Different types of chromosomes based on the position of centromere are given below. Classify them with necessary explanation. What is the peculiarity of the chromosome “D”?
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img9
Answer:

  1. A- metacen trie – media nee centromere/Satel I ite chromosome.
  2. B – sub metacentric – centromere just away from median position
  3. C – acrocentric
  4. D – Telocentric – Centromere close to the end or terminal

Question 21.
Membrane-bound distinct structures are called organelle. An organelle that is not bounded by membrane is seen in the chloroplast and mitochondria.

  1. Identify cell organelle.
  2. Write down its functions.

Answer:

  1. Ribosome
  2. Protein synthesis

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 22.
Different cells have different sizes. Arrange the following cells in ascending order of their size. Choose the correct option among the following.
i. Mycoplasma
ii. Ostrich eggs
iii. Human RBC
iv. Bacteria
Answer:
i – iv – iii – ii

Question 23.
Is extra genomic DNA present in prokaryotes and eukaryotes? If yes, indicate their location in both the types of organisms.
Answer:
It is present in cytoplasm of prokaryotes called plasmids

Question 24.
The genomic content of the nucleus is constant for a given species whereas the extrachromosomal DNA is found to be variable among the members of a population. Explain.
Answer:

  • Transfer of hereditary characters from one generation to next takes place with the help of nucleus. But
  • extrachromosomal DNA is not under the control of nuclear DNA its copy number varies in different organism.

Question 25.
Briefly give the contributions of the following scientists in formulating the cell theory.

  1. Robert Virchow
  2. Schielden and Schwann

Answer:

  1. Omnis cellula-e-cellular means new cells arise from pre-existing cells. It is the contribution of Rudolf Virchow.
  2. They have independently formulated the concept of cell theory i.e all cells are composed of cells and their products.

Schielden and Schwann-botanist and zoologist respectively.

Question 26.
Since the functions of certain membranous organelles are coordinated they are considered together as endomembrane system. Name the organelles included in this group.
Answer:
Endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi apparatus, Lysosome, and vacuole.

Question 27.
An organelle is called “The powerhouse of the cell”

  1. Name the organelle.
  2. Why is it said so?

Answer:

  1. Mitochondria
  2. Here the Energy (ATP) production, storage, and distribution takes place. So it is called a powerhouse of the cell.

Question 28.
The fluid mosaic model is a widely accepted model of cell membrance. Why?. Who proposed this model?
Answer:
It is the model of the plasma membrane consists of proteins and phospholipid bilayer. It is otherwise known as protein and iceberg in a sea of lipids. Singer and Nicolson

Question 29.
Match the column A, B & C Appropriately
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img10
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img11

Question 30.
A non-membrane cell organelles is common to both prokaryotes and eukaryotes.

  1. Which is that cell organelle?
  2. What is its function?

Answer:

  1. Ribosome
  2. It helps in protein synthesis. Ribosome is the protein synthesising machinery in both prokaryotes & Eukaryotes.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 31.
While looking through the microscope Ramesh saw few organisms. Help him to distinguish these organisms into Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes.
Answer:

  • Prokaryotic organisms are single celled but without definite nucleus.
  • Eukaryotic organisms are many celled with definite nucleus.

Question 32.
Cancer cells have numerous ribosomes’ Comment.
Answer:
Cancer cells undergoes uncontrolled and unwanted multiplication. It requires protein in large amounts. Hence numerous ribosomes are found in cancer cells.

Question 33.

AB
a. Ribosomesphotosynthesis
b. Golgi Apparatushydrolytic enzymes
c. Lysosomesprotein synthesis
d. Plastidsglycolipids

Answer:

AB
Ribosomesprotein synthesis
Gogi apparatusGlycolipids
LysosomeHydrolytic enzyme
PlastidsPhotosynthesis

Question 34.
What is a tonoplast?
Answer:

  1. Outer membrane of mitochondria
  2. Inner membrane of chloroplast
  3. Membrane boundary of the vacuole of plant cells
  4. Cell membrane of a plant cell
  5. Membrane boundary of the vacuole of plant cells

Question 35.
What structural and functional attributes must a cell have to be called a living cell?
Answer:
Living cell must possess cell membrane and protoplasm (cytoplasm and nucleus)

Question 36.
What is a mesosome in a prokaryotic cell? Mention its function?
Answer:

  • Mesosome is the infoldings of plasma membrane of gram +bacteria.
  • Respiration, wall formation, DNA replication and distribution to daughter cells

Question 37.
Multicellular organisms have division of labour Explain.
Answer:
In multicellular organisms .different cells become specialized in their structure to perform a specialized function by coordinating to form different types of tissues that coordinate to form different organs. Each organ is specialized to perform a specific function.

Question 38.
Give the significance of osmosis.
Answer:
It helps in the absorption of water by roots, opening, and closing of stomata, seed germination, etc.

Question 39.
Why is ER called cell circulatory system?
Answer:
Because it helps in transportation of materials between cytoplasm and nuclueus.

Question 40.
What are thylakoids? Why are these called structural and funcional unit of chloroplasts?
Answer:

  • They are oval shaped sacs which lie superimposed in the stroma of chloroplast to form grana.
  • These have enzymes for photochemical reactions of photosynthesis as have chlorophyll-containing quatasomes.

Question 41.
Name two cell-organelles that are double membrane-bound. What are the characteristics of these two organelles? State their functions.
Answer:
Golgi body and Endoplasmic reticulum (ER)
1. Golgi body:

  • It perform the function of packaging materials.
  • The site of formation of glycoproteins and glycolipids.

2. Endoplasmic reticulum:

  • RER type involved in protein synthesis and secretion.
  • SER is the major site of synthesis of lipids.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 42.
In some bacteria cell envelope consists of loose layer but in others, it appears as thick and tough layer. Name the two types of layers.
Answer:

  • Loose layer – slime layer
  • Thick and tough layer – Capsule

Question 43.
Phospho lipid bilayer with peripheral and integral proteins are arranged and forms quasifluid nature is found in almost all organisms.

  1. Which is the best method explains the above statement?
  2. Give its function.

Answer:

  1. Fluid mosaic concept
  2. Transport of molecules

Question 44.
The cross-section of cilia/flagella shows 9 + 2 arrangement and 9 + 0 in centriole.

  1. What is the difference between the above two arrangements?
  2. What is the function of cilia and centriole?

Answer:

  1. In first case 9 doublet fibrils with 2 singlet fibrils and in the second case 9 triplet fibrils but no central fibrils
  2. cilia helps in locomotion and centriole helps in assembly of spindle apparatus.

Plus One Botany Cell The Unit of Life Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How do neutral solutes move to cross the plasma membrane? Can the polar molecule also move across it in the same way? If not then how are these transported across the membrane?
Answer:
1. Neutral solutes move across the plasma membrane by diffusion along the concentration gradient.

2. Polar molecule cannot move across it in the same way. Polar molecules require a carrier protein of the membrane to facilitate their transport across the membrane.

3. Some ions or molecules are transported across the membrane against their concentration gradient, which is an energy-dependent process. It is called active transport.

Question 2.
When a 5% glucose solution and an 8%glucose solution are separated by a semipermeable membrane, explain

  1. Which solution has a greater osmotic pressure
  2. In which direction osmosis occurs
  3. Which solution will increase in volume

Answer:

  1. 8% glucose solution
  2. 5 – 8% glucose solution
  3. 8% glucose solution

Question 3.
Structure of a chloroplast is given below. Write the parts in the place of numbers.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img12
Answer:

  1. Stroma
  2. Lamella
  3. Granum
  4. Fret
  5. Periplastidial space

Question 4.
Differentiate the following terms:

  1. Polysome and Mesosome
  2. Amyloplast and Aleuroplast
  3. RER and SER

Answer:
1. Polysome contains ribosome – Protein synthesis
Mesosome – cellular respiration

2. Aleuroplast-store Protein
Amyloplast – store Starch

3. RER- Rough endo plasmic reticulum
SER – Smooth endoplasmic reticulum

Question 5.
Match the terms in column A & B.

AB
1. Polyribosome1. Peroxisomes
2. Oxysomes2. Lysosomes
3. Photorespiration3. Centiole
4. Grana4. Protein synthesis
5. Acid hydrolysis5. Thylakoids
6. Spindle fibres6. Cristae

Answer:

AB
Polyribosomeprotein synthesis
Oxysomescristae
Photorespirationperoxisomes
Granathylakoids
Acid hydrolaseslysosomes
Spindle fiberscentriole

Question 6.
Match the following.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img13
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life img14

Question 7.
Identify the statement given below is true /false.

  1. Robert Brown discovered cell.
  2. Schleiden and 9chwann formulated cell theory.
  3. Virchow explained that cells are formed from preexisting cells.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True
  3. True

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 8.
Some cell organells are given below Endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi complex, mitochondria, chloroplast, vacuole, lysosome, microbodies, and centriole

  1. Identify the cell organelles belongs to the endomembrane system.
  2. Differentiate the cell organelles into membrane-bound and non-membrane bound.
  3. which is the cell organelle only found in animal cell but not in a plant cells.

Answer:
1. Endoplasmic reticulum, golgi complex .vacuole, lysosome
2.

Membrane-boundnon-membrane-bound
Endoplasmic reticulum

Golgi complex

Mitochondria

Chloroplast

Vacuole

Lysosome

Centriole

3. centriole

Plus One Botany Cell The Unit of Life NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which of the following is not correct?
(a) Robert Brown discovered the cell.
(b) Schleiden and Schwann formulated the cell theory.
(c) Virchow explained that cells are formed from preexisting cells.
(d) A unicellular organism carries out its life activities within a single cell.
Answer:
(a) Robert Brown discovered the cell.

Question 2.
Match the following.

Column IColumn II
a) Cristaei) Flat membranous sacs in the stroma
b) Cistenaeii) Infoldings in mitochondria
c) Thylakoidsiii) Disc-shaped sacs in Golgi apparatus

Answer:

Column IColumn II
a) Cristae.i) Infoldings in mitochondria
b) Cristinaii) Disc-shaped sacs in Golgi apparatus
c) Thylakoidsiii) Flat membranous sacs in the stroma

Question 3.
What is a mesosome in a prokaryotic cell? Mention the functions that it performs.
Answer:
In prokaryotes, the extension of plasma membrane into cell makes a membranous structure called mesosoma. They help in cell wall formation and DNA replication.

Question 4.
How do neutral solutes move across the plasma membrane? Can the polar molecules also move across it in the same way? If not, then how are these transported across the membrane?
Answer:
Neutral solutes move across the plasma membrane through osmosis. On the other hand, polar molecules cannot pass through the non-polar membrane. They require a carrier protein to help them to move across the membrane. Such transport requires energy and is called active transport.

Question 5.
What is stomatal apparatus? Explain the structure of stomata with a labelled diagram.
Answer:
Stomata are structures present in the epidermis of leaves. Stomata regulate the process of transpiration and gaseous exchange. Each stomata is composed of two bean-shaped cells known as guard cellls. In grasses, the guard cells are dumbbell-shaped.

The outer walls of guard cells (away from the stomatal pore) are thin and the inner walls (towards the stomatal pore) are highly thickened. The guard cells possess chloroplasts and regulate the opening and closing of stomata.

Question 6.
Which of the following is correct?
(a) cells of all living organisms have a nucleus.
(b) Both animal and plant cells have a well-defined cell wall.
(c) In prokaryotes, there are no membrane-bound organelles.
(d) Cells are formed de novo from abiotic materials.
Answer:
(c) In prokaryotes, there are no membrane-bound organelles.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 7.
New cells generate from
(a) bacterial fermentation
(b) regeneration of old cells
(c) pre-existing cells
(d) abiotic materials
Answer:
(c) Pre-existing cells

Plus One Botany Cell The Unit of Life Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which one is single membrane cell organelle?
(a) Endoplasmic reticulum
(b) Mitochondria
(c) Lysosomes
(d) Chloroplast
Answer:
(c) Lysosomes

Question 2.
The main function of lysosome is
(a) sexual reproduction
(b) extracellular digestion
(c) intracellular digestion
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) and (c)

Question 3.
Endoplasmic reticulum is in continuation with
(a) Golgi body
(b) nuclear wall
(c) mitochondria
(d) cell wall
Answer:
(b) nuclear wall

Question 4.
Which of the following is not a function of vacuole in plant cell?
(a) Storage
(b) Waste disposal
(c) Cell elongation and protection
(d) Production of hydrogen peroxide
Answer:
(c) Cell elongation and protection

Question 5.
The ATP synthase of chloroplasts is like that of
(a) peroxisomes
(b) Golgi body
(c) microsomes
(d) mitochondria
Answer:
(d) mitochondria

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 6.
Fat is stored in the plant cell in
(a) lysosome
(b) spherosome
(c) microsome
(d) peroxisome
Answer:
(b) spherosome

Question 7.
F1 -particles comprise of
(a) head and base
(b) base and stalk
(c) head and stalk
(d) head, base, and stalk
Answer:
(a) head and base

Question 8.
Term basal body is associated with the development of
(a) cilia and flagella
(b) cell plate
(c) phragmoplast
(d) kinetochore
Answer:
(a) cilia and flagella

Question 9.
Golgi body receives materials from
(a) lysosome
(b) endoplasmic reticulum
(c) mitochondria
(d) cell membrane
Answer:
(b) endoplasmic reticulum

Question 10.
Quantasomes are found in
(a) mitochondria
(b) chloroplast
(c) lysosome
(d) endoplasmic reticulum
Answer:
(b) chloroplast

Question 11.
The term mitochondria was given by
(a) Benda
(b) Altmann
(c) Palade
(d) de Duve
Answer:
(a) Benda

Question 12.
The prokaryotic cell does not contain
(a) chromosome
(b) mitochondria
(c) plasma membrane
(d) ribosome
Answer:
(b) mitochondria

Question 13.
Organelle important in spindle formation during nuclear division is
(a) Golgi body
(b) chloroplast
(c) centriole
(d) mitochondrion
Answer:
(c) centriole

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 14.
The surface of the endoplasmic reticulum (ER) is covered with
(a) ribosome
(b) DNA
(c) RNA
(d) glucose
Answer:
(a) ribosome

Question 15.
Spindles are formed by
(a) microtubules
(b) golgi body
(c) endoplasmic reticulum
(d) peroxisome
Answer:
(a) microtubules

Question 16.
In plants, vacuole contains
(a) soil
(b) water and dissolved substance
(c) cytoplasm
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(b) water and dissolved substance

Question 17.
Which cell organelle is present in both prokaryotic and eukaryotic cell?
(a) Ribosome
(b) Mitochondria
(c) ER
(d) Nucleus
Answer:
(a) Ribosome

Question 18.
Cilia are
(a) short (5-10 pm) hair-like narrow protoplasmic process
(b) with sweeping or bendular movements
(c) more numerous
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 19.
Chemiosmotic theory of ATP synthesis in the chioroplasts and mitochondria is based on
(a) proton gradient
(b) accumulation of K ions
(c) accumulation of Na ions
(d) membrane potential
Answer:
(a) proton gradient

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Cell The Unit of Life

Question 20.
An organism exclusively with 70S type of ribosomes contains one of the following
(a) DNA enclosed within the nuclear membrane
(b) circular naked DNA
(c) double-stranded DNA with protein coat
(d) single-stranded DNA with protein coat
Answer:
(b) circular naked DNA

 

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Students can Download Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the tag to which the attribute frame is associated.
Answer:
<Table>
Frame attribute specifies the border lines around the table. Possible values are void, box, above, below, hsides, Hsides, Lhs, Rhs Eg. <Table Frame = “below”>

Question 2.
The tag used to create combo in HTML is______.
Answer:
<Select>

Question 3.
The option attribute is associated with_____<tag>
Answer:
<Select>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 4.
Consider the following. <FRAMESET Cols= “50 %,*”>
What will be the output of the above HTML statement?
Answer:
It divides browser window with frames of equal width in column wise.

Frame 1Frame 2

Question 5.
Consider the following. <FRAMESET Rows= “50%,*”>
What will be the output of the above HTML statement?
Answer:
It divides browser window into two frames in row wise equally.

Frame 1
Frame 2

Question 6.
<Select> Tag create____in HTML.
Answer:
Combo box

Question 7.
The default align value for a table is_____.
(a) Left
(b) Right
(c) Center
(d) Justify
Answer:
(a) Left

Question 8.
A submit button can be created by_____tag.
(a) <SUBMIT>
(b) <INPUT>
(c) <SELECT>
(d) <ACTION>
Answer:
(b) <INPUT>

Question 9.
_____Tag enclosed the heading cells in a table.
(a) <TABLE>
(b) <TR>
(c) <TH>
(d) <TD>
Answer:
(c) <TH>

Question 10.
_____is an empty tag.
(a) <FRAME>
(b) <FORM>
(c) <FRAMESET
(d) <TABLE>
Answer:
(a) <FRAME>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 11.
Pick the odd one out. Justify your answer
(a) NOFRAME
(b) Body
(c) SRC
(d) HEAD
Answer:
(c) SRC. It is an attribute. All other are tags.

Question 12.
Name the tag which is used as an attribute to another tag?
Answer:
<Center>or<Frame>

Question 13.
The borderlines around a table is specified by_____Attribute.
(a) Frame
(b) cell border
(c) Background
(d) Border
Answer:
(b) Bonder

Question 14.
To change the background colour of a table, which attribute of <table>tag is used for this purpose.
Answer:
BGCOLOR – This attribute specifies the background colour of the table.
<TABLE BORDER=2 BGCOLOR= “Blue”>

Question 15.
Which tag is used to divide the window more than one?
Answer:
<Frameset>

Question 16.
____tag is used to pass information from web viewers to web server.
Answer:
<Form>

Question 17.
_____tag provides a label forthe form control.
Answer:
<Label>

Question 18.
A____has no <body> section.
Answer:
<Frameset> tag

Question 19.
A <frameset> tag no____tag.
Answer:
<Body> tag

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 20.
Name the attribute used to merge two or more rows of a table in an HTML document.
Answer:
Rowspan.

Question 21.
In HTML_____tag is used to create a row in a table
Answer:
<TR>

Question 22.
The space between the border of the cell and its content can be adjusted by an attribute of the <TABLE> tag. Identify this attribute.
Answer:
Cell padding

Question 23.
Give the value of the frame attribute of <TABLE> tag to get the outer border only.
Answer:
box

Question 24.
Baiju wants to place a picture in a table cell. Which attribute of the < TD > tag will be used for this.
Answer:
Back ground.

Question 25.
_____tag forms the definition term in a definition list.
(a) <DD>
(b) <DT>
(c) <DL>
(d) <DR>
Answer:
(b) <DT>

Question 26.
Name the possible values of type attribute of UnOrdered list.
Answer:
tag <UL> can take values square, circle or disc.

Question 27.
To create a list using Uppercase letters use_____?
Answer:
<OLType=”A”>

Question 28.
To create a list using Lower case letters use_____?
Answer:
<OLType=”a”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 29.
To start a list from the count of 3 using______?
Answer:
<OL start=”3”>

Question 30.
Mr. Suresh wants to prepare a list of students with register number. But he wants to start numbering from 5? How can it be done using HTML?
Answer:
Ordered list is used for this <OL start = “5”>

Question 31.
Pick the wrong one from the statements given below:
(A) <OL>and <UL> have Type attribute
(B) Default numbering scheme in <OL> is 1,2, 3…
(C) In Definition List, <DD> tag is used to give definition of terms
(D) Start attribute of ordered list should always be set to 1
Answer:
(D) Start attribute of ordered list should always be set to 1

Question 32.
Which of the following is the correct way to create an email link?
(A) <A href= “abc@xyz”>
(B) <mail href= “abc@xyz”>
(C) <mail> “abc@xyz”>
(D) <A href= “mailto: abc@xyz”>
Answer:
(D) <A href= “mailto: abc@xyz”>

Question 33.
There are two web pages in the class project created by Mathew. The second page should appear in the browser when clicked at a particular text in the first page. What do you call this feature? Name the tag and attribute needed for creating such a feautre.
Answer:
This feature is called link
Tag used is <A> and attribute is HREF

Question 34.
Observe the table with two rows. Which of the following is used with TD tag to merge the cells C and D?

AB
CD

(A) Merge=colspan 2
(B) Rowspan= “2”.
(C) Colspan= “2”
(D) Merge=raw2
Answer:
(C) Colspan= “2”

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 35.
Why do we use <NOFRAME> tag?
Answer:
<NOFRAME> tag is used to give a content when some browser that does not support frameset.

Question 36.
Which of the following tag is used to create a list box in a html Form?
(a) <SUBMIT>
(b) <INPUT>
(c) <SELECT>
(d) <ACTION>
Answer:
(c) <SELECT>

Question 37.
The tag used for creating a drop-down list in HTML is_____.
Answer:
<select> tag

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Manju wants to display 3 web pages on the same screen horizontally. Which HTML statements can be used for this?
Answer:
<Frameset Rows=“33%, *, * ” >
<Frame SRC = Page1. html>
<Frame SRC = Page2. html>
<Frame SRC = Page3. html>
< / Frameset >

Question 2.
Adithya College of Engineering wants to Create their web site, in which the home page is to be designed as a combination of two Vertical panes.

  1. Suggest suitable tags used for this.
  2. Write the HTML statements to get this type of page.

Answer:
1. < Frame set > and < Frame > tags

2. < Frameset cols = “ 50%, * ” >
< Frame SRC = “ Page1. HTML ” >
< Frame SRC = “ Page2. HTML ” >
< / Frameset >

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 3.
‘Kerala Communication channel’ conduct a TV program based on Education policies of Kerala Govt. They want to take the feed back from the viewers through their website.

  1. While creating this site, which type of tag is used to accept multiple line of text from the viewers.
  2. Name any two attributes of this tag.

Answer:

  1. < TEXTAREA>
  2. Cols, rows, name

Question 4.
Distinguish between cellspacing and cellpadding attribute of <Table> tag.
Answer:

  1. Cellspacing: it specifies the space between two table cells.
  2. Cellpadding: It specifies the space between cell border and content.

Question 5.
Match the following

Group AGroup B
<TABLE>HREF
<HTML>DIR
<IMG>BORDER
 <A>SRC
TYPE

Answer:

Group AGroup B
<TABLE>BORDER
<HTML>DIR
<IMG>SRC
 <A>HREF

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 6.
Differentiate <frame> and <frameset> tags.
Answer:
The <frameset> tag defines the frame sections and the <frame> tag specifies the pages to be loaded in each frame
<FRAMESET> tag And <FRAME>tag
Attributes of <FRAMESET>

  • Rows: Used to divide screen in row wise
  • Cols: Used to divide screen in column wise
  • Attributes of <FRAME>
  • SRC: Specifies name of web page to be loaded in Frame
  • Scrolling: Enables the webpage displayed to be scrolled

Eg. <FRAMESETCols= “50%,*”>
<FRAME SRC= “page1.html>
<FRAME SRC= “page2.htmr>
</FRAMESET>

Question 7.
How can you merge cells in a table?
Answer:
By using attributes Colspan or Rowspan

  1. Colspan : It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of columns.
    Eg: <TD Colspan=3> spans the cell over three columns
  2. Rowspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of rows.
    Eg: <TD Rowspan=3> spans the cell over three rows.

Question 8.
Raju created a web page as follows:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 1
But he is unable to view any tabular format in the web page, when it is displayed in the browser. Find the reason for it and correct the same.
Answer:
Without “Border” attribute it never shows tabular form, Border attribute is missing.
<TABLE BORDER=3>

Question 9.
Name the possible values of type attribute of Ordered list.
Answer:
The tag <OL> can take Values as follows

  1. type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,….
  2. type = i for i, ii, iii,….
  3. type = I for I, II, III,…..
  4. type = a for a, b, c,…
  5. type = A for A, B, C,……

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 10.
Predict the output of the following HTML segment.
<OL Type = “1 ” start = “5”>
<Li> Chocolate</Li>
<Li> Milk </Li>
<Li> Coffee</Li>
</OL>
Answer:
5. Chocolate
6. Milk
7. Coffee

Question 11.
Compare the use of Type attribute in Ordered and Unordered list in HTML?
Answer:
1. Unordered List (<UL>): Items are displayed with square, circle or disc in front.
Eg: <UL TYPE=” circle”>

2. Ordered List (<OL>): Items are displayed with the following type values.
Type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,…….
Type = i for i, ii, iii,…..
Type = I for I, ll, III,…..
Type = a for a, b, c,…..
Type = A for A, B, C,…..
Eg: <OL TYPE=”A”>

Question 12.
Differentiate internal linking and external linking with examples.
Answer:

  1. External Linking -: Used to connect two different web pages
    Eg:<A href = “School. html’> School</A>
  2. Internal linking: Internal links are given to a sec¬tion in the same document.
    <A href =“#top”>Goto Top </A>
    <A href = “#bottom>Goto Bottom </A>

Question 13.
While moving the mouse pointer over a web page, the mouse pointer changes its shape to hand icon symbol.

  1. Give reason for this change in mouse pointer.
  2. Name the tag and attributes used for it.

Answer:

  1. It is a hyper link
  2. <A> tag, href attribute.

Question 14.
HTML has facility to provide external and internal hyperlinks.

  1. Which tag is used to include a hyper link?
  2. Explain two attributes needed for creating internal hyperlink.

Answer:

  1. <A>
  2. name, href

Question 15.
Match the following.

EMBEDhref
OLloop
Astart
BGSOUNDhidden

Answer:
EMBED-hidden, OL-start, A-href, BGSOUND- loop

Question 16.
Categorize the following tags into containertags and empty tags,
<A>, <FRAME>, <FRAMESET>, <INPUT>
Answer:

  1. Empty tags:
    <FRAME>& <INPUT>
  2. Container tags:
    <FRAMESET> & <A>

Question 17.
The <FORM> tag is used to accept data and communicate with a server program.

  1. Name any two attributes of FORM tag.
  2. How will you create a “SUBMIT” button and a “RESET” button within the FORM tag?

Answer:

  1. Action, Method
  2. <INPUT Type=“submit”>
    <INPUT Type=“reset”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 18.
Aliya wants to display three webpages (A.htm, B.htm, C.htm) on the same screen horizontally at the ratio 20%, 40%, 40%. Write the HTML code for the same.
Answer:
<FRAMESET ROWS=”20%,40%,40%”>
<FRAME Src= “A.htm”>
<FRAME Src= “B.htm”>
<FRAME Src= “C.htm”>
</FRAMESET >

Question 19.
Distinguish Cellspacing and Cellpadding attributes of<TABLE> tag.
Answer:

  • Cell spacing: Specifies space between table cells
  • Cell padding: Specifies space between cell border and content.

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Point out the difference between relative and absolute URL.
Answer:
URL means uniform Resource Locator.
Two type of URL
1. Relative URL: Here we explicitly give the web site address
Eg: <Ahref=http://www.hscap,kerala.gov.in>

2. Absolute URL: Here we implicitly give the web site address. The path is not specified here.
Eg: Consider the web pages index.html and school.html saved in the folder C:\BVM.The file indexs.html contains the following.

<A href-’school.htmr’>. Here we did not specify the full path of the file school.html. But this implicitly points to the file stored in C:\BVM.

Question 2.
Name the tag which is used to play the music in background while the webpage is being viewed.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 2
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 3

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 3.
Differentiate <FRAME>, <FRAMESET> and <NOFRAME>tags.
Answer:

  1. <FRAMESET> tag is used to divide the window more than one pane. It has no body section.
  2. <FRAME>. It specifies the pages within a frameset.
  3. <NOFRAME>. <NOFRAME> tag is used to give a content when some browser that does not support frameset.

Question 4.
In a web page, user needs to enter the address of persons. Name the tag used for this. List and explain any two main attributes of it.
Answer:
<TEXTAREA>. This is used to enter multiple lines in a. Text Box of a web page. Main attributes are:

  • Rows: Specifies the height of text area control, ie. The number of Lines the Text Area should have
  • Cols: Specifies width ie number of characters per line. Name: Gives a variable name to the Text Area control. Eg: <TEXTAREA Name=”Address” Cols=20 Rows=5>

Question 5.
Consider the following table.

BatchBoysGirls
Science2526
Commerce2030

Write the HTML code for the above.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 4
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 5

Question 6.
Name the tag which permits a user to add more than one web page in a single window. List any attributes of it with explanation.
Answer:
<FRAMESET> tag and <FRAME>tag
Attributes of <FRAMESET>

  • Rows: Used to divide screen in rowwise
  • Cols: Used to divide screen in column wise
  • Attributes of <FRAME>
  • SRC: Specifies name of web page to be loaded in Frame
  • NAME: Gives a name for the frame.

Eg. <FRAMESET Rows= “50%,*”>
<FRAME SRC= “page1.htm”>
<FRAME SRC= “page2.htm”>
</FRAMESET>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 7.
In VB, a Programmer can use Option Button, Text Box, Combo box, etc. to accept inputs from the user. Butin HTML<INPUT> tag is used for creating all the above controls. Which attributes of the <INPUT> tag is used for this? List and explain the possible values of it.
Answer:
The ‘type’ attribute of <INPUT> tag is used to create different control. The main values of type attribute is given below.
1. Text: Creates a single line Text Box.
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Text”>

2. Password: creates a password box in which characters are displayed by symbols like asterisk(*)
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Passwords”>

3. Check Box: Creates a check box.
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Check Box”>

4. Radio: Creates option button (Radio Button)
Eg.<INPUT Type= “Radio” Name-‘sex”Value= “M”>Male

5. Reset: Creates re^et button. It is used to clear all the data entered
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Reset”>

6. Submit: Creates a submit Button. When click on it data entered in the form will sent to web server. Eg. <INPUT Type = “Submit”>

Question 8.
Write the HTML code for the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 6
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 7

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 9.
Write the HTML Code for the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 8
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 9
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 10

Question 10.
Name the attributes in HTML, which can present in more than one tag.
Answer:
The attributes are

  1. Border: It can act in <Table> and in <Frameset> Tag.
  2. Bgcolor: It can act in <Table> and in <Body>tag.
  3. Type: It can act in <OL> and in <lnput>tag.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 11.
What are the main attributes of the <Form> tag?
Answer:
1. Method:
It determines the method of submission of form data to the server. Get and Post are the two form submission methods. Post method is used to pass large volume of data. Also post method is more secure as data entered is not visible during submission. The get method is faster and is used to send lesser volume of data and it is not secure.

2. Action:
The URL of the server side program to process the form data is specified by the Action attribute.
Eg: <Form Action=”http://www.scert.com/asp/ process.asp”>

Question 12.
What are the difference between get method and post method ?
Answer:

Post MethodGet Method
•   It is used to pass large volume of data

•   The data is nof visible during submission

•   It is slower.

•   It is secure.

•   It is used to pass lesser volume of data

•   The data is visible during submission

•   It is faster

•   It is not secure

Question 13.
Lena wants to create a web page, to select the dis¬trict name from a combo. By default the combo box contain the district Trichur. Help her to do so.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 11

Question 14.
Ram creates a web page to record the sex of a student. But he has made a mistake that the student can select both male and female choices at a time. What is the reason for the same. Help him to correct the mistake.
Answer:
To record sex of student radio buttons are used. Usually, radio buttons are provided as a group from which exactly one can be selected at a time by giving the same name for both radio buttons. But here Ram did not give same name for both buttons. Therefore the mistake. The correct code is as follows,
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 12

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 15.
Explain the attributes of <Frameset> Tag.
Answer:

  1. Cols: It determines the dimension of vertical frames(Columns) in the frameset page.
    Eg: <FramesetCols=”50%,*”> creates two vertical frames with equal width.
  2. Rows: It determines the dimension of horizontal frames(Rows) in the frameset page.
    Eg: <Frameset Rows=”50%,*”> creates two horizontal frames with equal height.
  3. Border: It specifies the thickness of the border for the frames.
  4. Bordercolor: It specifies the colour for the frame border.

Question 16.
Explain the attributes of <Frame tag>
Answer:

  1. Src: It specifie the URL of the document to be loaded in the frame.
  2. Scrolling: It indicates scroll bar is to be shown in the frame or not, values are yes, no or auto
  3. Noresize: It stops the resizing of the frame, no value is to be assigned.
  4. Margin width and Marginheight: It sets the horizontal and vertical margins, values are in pixels.
  5. Name: It gives a name for the frame.
  6. Target: It specifies the target frame.

Question 17.
Mr. Sonet visited a website that contains two frames. He tries to resize the first frame by mouse. But he failed to do so. What is the reason behind? Explain?
Answer:
This is because the web designer used Noresize attribute of frame tag while he design the page. Noresize attribute stops the resizing of the frame, no value is to be assigned.
Eg: <frame src=”page1 .html” noresize>

Question 18.
We know that an HTML document contains two sections head and body section. While designing a web page as follows what will happen?
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 13
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 14
Answer:
There is no output because a <frameset> tag has no body tag. It is very important. So the correct code is as follows,
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 15

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 19.
Create a web page as follows to display a list contains items.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 16
Answer:
To create a list box set the size property of <Select> tag to more than 1.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 17

Question 20.
In VB there are separate controls to create List Box and Combo Box. But in HTML these controls can be created by using a single tag.

  1. Name the tag used for this? (1)
  2. Which attribute is used for this and how? (2)

Answer:
1. < SELECT >

2. Size attribute
< SELECT Size = 1 > gives combo box
< SELECT Size = 3> gives a list box

Question 21.
Write HTML code for creating the following webpage using tag.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 18
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 19

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 22.
Write the HTML code for creating the following webpage using List tag.

COMPUTER TERMS
CPUCentral Processing Unit
ALUArithmetic and Logic Unit
WWWWorld Wide Web

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 20
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 21

Question 23.
What will be the output of the following?
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 22
Answer:
The output is as follows. E.COMPUTER, F.BIOLOGY.

Question 24.
Find the errors from the following and correct it.

  1. <ULtype=”A”start=5>
  2. <IMG src=”picture.jpg” size=100>
  3. <HTML>
    <HEAD><TITLE></HEAD></TITLE> <BODY>This is a sample web page</BODY>

Answer:

  1. UL has only specified types and has no start attribute
  2. IMG has no size attribute, use height or width attribute
  3. <HTML>
    <HEAD><TITLE></TITLE></HEAD> <BODY>This is a sample web page</BODY> </HTML>.

Question 25.
Your brother requested you to prepare a list of best friends, from your class using HTML.

  1. Which type of list you will prefer?
  2. Write HTML code to create such a list of 4 students.

Answer:
1. Ordered List<OL> Can be used.

2.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 23

Question 26.
Ravi wants to display the name of 6 subjects as a list by using Upper case Roman Numerals. Help him to do so.
Answer:
<OLType= “I”>
<LI>English
<LI> Sanskrit
<LI>Business studies
<LI>Accountancy
<LI>Economics
<LI>Computer Applications
</OL>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 27.
Your class selected you as the group leader of Group V. In your group there are 5 students with Roll No. 20 to 24. Prepare a list using appropriate tag in HTML.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 24

Question 28.
Write HTML code to get the following output.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 25
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 26

Question 29.
Write HTML code to get the following table as output.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 27
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 28
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 29

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 30.
Write the tags to define the following:

  1. Text Box
  2. Submit Button
  3. Reset Button
  4. Radio Button

Answer:

  1. .<inputtype=”text” name=”txtname”>
  2. .<input type=”Submit” value=”Send”>
  3. .<input type=”Reset” value=”Clear”>
  4. .<input type=”Radio” name=”Sex” value= “Male”>Male
    <input type=”Radio” name=”Sex” value=” Female”>Female

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write an HTML code to create a web page with 3 frames as shown below:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 30
Answer:
Step 1: Take a notepad, type the following and save it as main.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 31

Step 2: Take another notepad, type the following and save it as page1.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 32
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 33

Step 3: Take another notepad, type the following and save it as page 2.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 34

step 4: Take another notepad, type the following and save it asframe.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 35

Step 5. Finally run the frame.html file.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 2.
Explain any three attributes of <FORM>tag.
Answer:
1. Action: Here we give the name of program (including the path) stored in the Web server.

2. Method: There are 2 types of methods get and post.

Get methodPost method
1. Faster1. Slower
2. To send small volume of data2. To send large volume of data
3. Less secure3. More secure
4. Data visible during submission4. Data not visible during submission

3. Target: Specifies the target window for displaying the result. Values are given below.

  • _blank-Opens in a new window
  • _self-Opens in the same frame
  • _parent – Opens in the parent frameset
  • _top- Opens in the main browser window
  • name – Opens in the window with the specified name.

Question 3.
Explain the attributes of <Table> tag?

OR

Name any six attributes of <table> tag that determine the general layout of table.
Answer:

  1. Border: It specifies the thickness of the border lines around the table.
  2. Bordercolor: It specifies the colour for border lines
  3. Align: It specifies the table alignment, the values can be left, right or center
  4. Bgcolor: It specifies the back ground colour for the table.
  5. Cellspacing : It specifies the space between two table cells
  6. Cellpadding: It specifies the space between cell border and content
  7. Cols: It specifies the number of columns
  8. Width: It determines the table width
  9. Frame: It specifies the border lines around the table, values are void, border, box, above, below,…

Question 4.
Explain the attributes of <TH> and <TD>?
Answer:

  1. Align: It specifies the horizontal alignment of the content, the values can be left, right, center and justify.
  2. Valign: It specifies the vertical alignment of the content, the values can be top, middle, Bottom, and baseline.
  3. Bgcolor: It specifies the back ground colour for the cell.
  4. Colspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of columns.
    Eg: <TD Colspan=3> spans the cell over three columns
  5. Rowspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of rows.
    Eg: <TD Rowspan=3> spans the cell over three rows.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 5.
Create an HTML page as shown below using lists.
The recipe for preparation

  1. The ingredients
    • 100g flour
    • 10g sugar
    • 1 cup water
    • 2 egg
    • Salt and pepper
  2. The procedure
    A. Mix dry ingredients thoroughly
    B. Pour in wet ingredients
    C. Mix for 10 mts
    D. Bake for 1 hr at 100 degree C temperature

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 36
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 37

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 6.
Create HTML code for the following output.

  1. Flowers
    • Jasmine
    • Rose
    • Lily
  2. Vegetables
    • Beetroot
    • Cabbage
    • Cucumber
  3. Fruits
    i. Apple
    ii. Orange
    iii. Pineapple

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 38
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 39

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Students can Download Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Both apical and intercalary meristems are meristems
(a) primary
(b) secondary
(c) lateral
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) primary

Question 2.
Sclerieds present in
(a) fruit wall of nuts
(b) pulp of guava
(c) seed coat of legumes
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 3.
Which of the following condition of xylem is present in both monocot and dicot stems
(a) exarch
(b) endarch
(c) polyarch
(d) mesarch
Answer:
(b) endarch

Question 4.
Bark does not include
(a) secondary xylem
(b) secondary phloem
(c) periderm
(d) primary phloem
Answer:
(a) secondary xylem

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 5.
…………… is the living mechanical tissue
(a) collenchyma
(b) parenchyma
(c) sclerenchyma
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) collenchyma

Question 6.
What are the cells that make the leaves curl in plants during water stress?
Answer:
Bulliform cells/motor cells

Question 7.
What part of the plant would show the following:
(a) Radial vascular bundle
(b) Polyarch xylem
(c) Well developed pith
Answer:
(a) Radial vascular bundle

Question 8.
Apical meristem for elongation of Stem, Lateral meristem for ………..
Answer:
Increase in thickness.

Question 9.
While analysing the anatomy of a given slide, phloem, cambium & xylem are present. Identify the material.
Answer:
Dicot stem.

Question 10.
Tissues are specialised to perform mechanical function have thickening at corners, living and cellulosic. Name it.
Answer:
Collenchyma

Question 11.
A cross-section of plant materials show the following features under microscope there are many vascular bundles scattered in the parenchymatous tissue, xylem is endarch. What kind of plant part shows the above anatomy.
Answer:
Monocot stem

Question 12.
Name tissue which provides mechanical strength to the plant’s organs.
Answer:
Sclerenchyma and xylem

Question 13.
What does the fascicular cambium gives rise to?
Answer:
Secondary vascular tissues and medullary rays

Question 14.
From where do the secondary cambium appear?
Answer:
From permanent tissues

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 15.
Which type of meristems can be classified on the basis of positions in the plant body.
Answer:
Apical, intercalary and lateral

Question 16.
Find the odd one and give reason:
Phellem, Phellogen, Phloem, Phelloderm
Answer:
Phloem. The other components are part of periderm

Question 17.
Fill in the blanks:
Stem: Endarch:: Root: ……….
interfascicular cambium: secondary xylem:: cork cambium: …………
Answer:
Exarch, phelloderm

Question 18.
Activity of cambium is different in two seasons and xylem vessels formed have narrow and wider lumens. Give the type of wood formed during the different seasons.
Answer:
Springwood and autumn wood.

Question 19.
What use are phloem fibres put to
Answer:
Phloem fibers of plants like jute are used for making ropes.

Question 20.
Identify the plant group from the data given below.
(a) Habit-Tree
(b) Xylem vessels present
(c) Absence of companion cells in phloem
(d) No fruits
Answer:
Gymnosperm

Question 21.
Ramu observed the growth of a plant in his garden. He realised that the plant grow both in length and width. Name the tissue responsible for the growth of the plant.
Answer:
Meristems

Question 22.
A cross-section of plant materials show the following anatomical features under microscope.

  1. Vascular bundles are radially arranged
  2. Four xylem strands with exarch condition of the protoxylem. To which organ should it be assigned?

Answer:
Dicot root

Question 23.
The transverse section of a plant material shows the following anatomical features.

  1. vascular bundles are conjoint, scattered and surrounded by a sclerenchymatous bundle sheath.
  2. Phloem parenchyma is absent. What will you identify as?

Answer:
The plant is a monocotyledon.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 24.
The cross-section of a plant material showed the following features when viewed under the microscope.

  1. The vascular bundles were radially arranged.
  2. Four xylem strands with exarch condition of protoxylem.

To which organ should it be assigned?
Answer:
Dicot root

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
During the secondary thickening of a dicot stem, from the outer cotical region, a meristematic tissue is developed. Name this tissue and write the function of it.
Answer:
Phellogen/cork cambium – It produces phellum towards the outer sides & phelloderm towards the inner side. These 3 layers are known as periderm

Question 2.
Analyse the table and arrange the matter is an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img1
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img2

Question 3.
Differentiate the following characters of dicot stem and monocot stem.
Differentiated cortex, Protoxylem lacuna present, open bundle, bundle sheath, starch sheath, sclerenchymatous hypodermis, scattered bundles, V.Bs. arranged in a ring, closed bundles, phloem parenchyma absent, presence of pith, collenchymatous hypodermis.
Answer:

Dicot stemMonocot stem
Differentiated cortex

Open bundle

Starch sheath

V.Bs arranged in ring

Presence of pith

collenchymatous

hypoderms

Protoxylem lacuna present

Bundle sheath

Closed bundle

Phloem parenchyma absent

Sclerenchymatous hypoderms

Question 4.
Xylem is the complex tissue that transports water in plants.

  1. Name the main components of xylem.
  2. Which of these is most likely suitable for conducting water?

Answer:

  1. Xylem parenchyma, vessels, tracheid, xylem fibers.
  2. Vessels

Question 5.
Examine the anatomy of two plants

  1. Xylem vessels and tracheids are seen
  2. Xylem vessels absent and tracheids present

Answer:

  1. Angiosperm
  2. Gymnosperm

Question 6.
Identify the figure ‘A’ and ‘B’ and differentiate between ‘A’ and ‘B’.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img3
Answer:

AB
DicotstemDicot root
Vascular bundles are arranged in a ring, limited no., conjoint, endarch & openVascular bundles are radial, exarch

Question 7.
Secondary growth occurs in dicots and no such growth in monocots. Justify.
Answer:
In dicots, cambium is present in their vascular bundle. In monocot, cambium is absent in the vascular bundles. So secondary growth occurs in dicotyledons and not in monocotyledons.

Question 8.
Phloem is called the complex tissue while parenchyma is a simple tissue. Make the differences
Answer:
Phloem is made up of more than one type of cells namely, sieve tube, companion cell, phloem parenchyma & phloem fiber. Parenchyma consists of same types of cells.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 9.
When the cross-section of a stem was examined, a student could notice collenchymatous hypodermis, Limited number of open vascular bundles, cortex, endodermis, and pith.

  1. Identify the material.
  2. Draw the diagram of the material showing these parts and label.

Answer:
1. Dicot stem
2.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img4

Question 10.
Observe the diagrams and identify the tissue types.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img5
Answer:
a. Collenchyma
b. Sclerenchyma

Question 11.
Analyse the table and arrange the matter in an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img6
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img7

Question 12.
While doing anatomy practical, students observe ten following characters:

  • Undifferentiated ground tissue.
  • Numerous vascular bundles and are scattered.
  • Sclerenchymatous hypodermis
  • Presence of bundle sheath

1. Identify the material.
2. Write any one example of a plant having such characters.
Answer:

  1. Monocot stem.
  2. Grass/Bamboo

Question 13.
What is the function of phloem parenchyma?
Answer:
The phloem parenchyma stores food material and other substances like resins, latex, and mucilage.

Question14.
How do you correlate the activity of cambium with changing seasons?
Answer:
During winter season the cambium stops its activity. In spring season cambium becomes more active and produce large quantity of secondary tissue. The secondary xylem produced during spring season is called springwood. During autumn season and summer season the cambium becomes less active and produces small quantity of secondary tissue. The secondary xylem produced during this period is called autumn wood.

Question 15.
Mention the characteristic features of sieve-tube members.
Answer:
Sieve tubes are cylindrical have endplates called sieve plates. They are dead elements of phloem.

Question 16.
It is difficult to open and close wooden doors and windows during the rainy season. What is the reason?
Answer:
Imbibition It is the absorption of water by water-loving particles without forming a solution

Question 17.
Heartwood is resistant to microorganisms. Justify the statement.
Answer:
Contains alkalloids , tannins & resins

Question 18.
The microscopic observation is given below.

  1. Identify A and B.
  2. Write any two distinguishing characters of the above diagram.

Answer:

  1. A dicot stem B monocot stem
  2. In dicot stem vascular budles open, limited no.&arranged in the form of a ring. In monocot stem, vascular bundles closed, numerous & scattered

Question 19.
Simple tissues that perform mechanical support in plants are usually dead tissues’
Name the living simple tissue that provides mechanical support to plant organs. In which category of plants (dicots/monocots) do they found?
Answer:
Sclerenchyma tissues Monocots

Question 20.
What is present on the surface of the leaves which helps the plant prevent loss of water but is absent in roots?
Answer:
The cuticle is the waxy substance prevents the excessive water loss.

Question 21.
What is the epidermal cell modification in plants which prevents water loss?
Answer:
The presence of bulliform cells in the leaves of monocot plants, which helps in rolling and unrolling of lamina and prevents water loss.

Question 22.
Arrange the following in the sequence you would find them in a plant starting from the periphery – phellem. phellogen. phelloderm.
Answer:
phellem, phellogen, phelloderm.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 23.
A transverse section of the trunk of a tree shows concentric rings which are known as growth rings. How are these rings formed? What is the significance of these rings?
Answer:
It is formed due to the activity of vascular ambium. The growth ring comprises springwood and autumn wood that is formed in spring season and winter season respectively. These are used to determine the age of tree by counting the number of concentric rings.

Question 24.
While eating peach or pear it is usually seen that some stone-like structures get entangled in the teeth, what are these stone-like structures called?
Answer:
USB Non-elongated sclerenchyma(sclereids)

Question 25.
When your teacher asked to collect different types of seeds. One of the students collected some seeds from a tree. These seeds have no covering or naked.

  1. In which group of plants does this tree belong?
  2. Which portion of the plant develops into the seed?

Answer:

  1. Gymnosperms
  2. Ovule

Question 26.
We cannot find the woody trunk in monocot plants. Why?
Answer:
Monocots do not possess cambium Hence, the secondary tissues are not formed.

Question 27.
Identify the following materials under microscope.

  1. Xylem polyarch, Round vessels, homogenous cortex with xylem & phloem in radial manner.
  2. Endarch xylem, conjoint bundle, surrounded by bundle sheath, palisade and spongy tissues distinguished and kidney-shaped guard cells

Answer:

  1. Monocot root
  2. Dicot leaf

Question 28.
The product of photosynthesis is transported from the leaves to various parts of the plants and stored in some cells before being utilised. What are the cells/ tissues that store them?
Answer:
parenchyma tissue

Question 29.
Name the kind of vascular bundle in Fig. a and b.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img19
Answer:
a. Closed bundle
b. Open bundle

Question 30.
Heartwood is resistant to micro-organisms. Justify the statement.
Answer:
The deposition of substances like Tannin, resin, oil, gum, aromatic substances and essential oil in the central part of wood helps to resist the attack of microorganisms.

Question 31.
Cambial ring is responsible for the formation of secondary vascular tissues both in Dicot stem and Dicot root. Differentiate the origin of cambial ring in Dicot stem and Dicot root.
Answer:
1. In Dicot stem, the conjuctive tissues in between the vascular bundles become meristematic and form. interfascicular cambium, it joins with intrafascicular cambium to form a cambial ring.

2. In Dicot root, the tissue just below phloem and part of pericycle tissue above the protoxylem join together to form a wavy ring. Later it becomes circular.

Question 32.
Give reason

  1. Grittiness nature of sapota fruit pulp
  2. Increase thickness of stem intake and not in coconut

Answer:

  1. Due to the presence of nonelogated sclerenchyma tissues (sclereids)
  2. In Teak, cambium is present (dicot plant) In coconut, cambium is absent because it is a monocot plant.
    Cambial activity causes an increase in thickness

Question 33.
Match the following.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img8
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img9

Question 34.
You may have observed droplets of water at the tip of leaves of grasses during early morning. Your sister told it is a dewdrop.
As a science student do you agree with her? Explain. Compare this process with transpiration.
Answer:
No.

  1. The droplets of water are found in the tip of grass leaves. This is called Guttation. It occurs in early morning.
  2. Water drops come out from Hydathode seen in the vien endings of leaf.
  3. Transpiration is the loss of water in the form of water vapour from stomata of leaves.

Question 35.
How can we correlate the activity of cambium with changing season?
Answer:
In spring season the activity of cambium is more and produces large no. of xylem vessels with wide lumen. But in Autumn season the activity of cambium is less and produces fewer no.of xylem vessels with narrow lumen.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 36.
Classify the following characters under dicot and monocot stem?
Bundle sheath is present, open bundle, bundle cap is present, closed bundle, arranged in a broken ring, scattered bundle, collenchymatous hypodermis, sclerenchymatous hypodermis.
Answer:

Dicot stemMonocot stem
Open bundle

Bundle cap is present

Arranged in a broken ring

collenchymatous

Hypodermis

Bundle sheath is present

Closed bundle

Scattered bundle

Sclerenchymatous

Hypodermis

Question 37.
Distinguish between cork cambium and vascular cambium.
Answer:
1. Cork cambium is the meristematic layer that cut of the tissues outside called phellem and inside phelloderm.

2. Vascular cambium is the meristematic layer that cut of the tissues outside called secondary phloem and inside secondary xylem.

Question 38.
Identify the following diagram and write its function.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img10
Answer:
Hydathode. It is the pore found in the vein ending of the grass leaf through which water loss occurs in the form of droplets.

Question 39.
Which one out of the root or stem shows endarch arrangement of xylem? What is meant by endarch arrangement?
Answer:
Stem, In edarch xylem protoxylem, is present towards the centre (pith) and metaxylem is faced towards outside.

Question 40.
Observe the diagram and identify the tissue types. Justify your answer.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img11
Answer:

  • The first figure is the Sclerenchymatus tissue.
  • The second figure is the collenchymatous tissue.
  • In sclerenchyma tissue, the cell walls are lignified and dead.
  • In collenchymatous tissue, the cell walls are thick and living.

Question 41.
What are bulliform cells? Mention its significance
Answer:
These are the specialised cells found in the epidermis of monocot leaf. They are otherwise called as motor cells.
It helps in the rolling and unrollong of lamina

Question 42.
Where are the companion cells located in the flowering plants? What are their functions?
Answer:
Companion cells are located in the phloem cells of vascular tissue. They support the sieve tubes.

Question 43.
What category of permanent plant cell is a companion cell?
Answer:
Companion cells are specialised thin-walled parenchymatous cells found to be associated with sieve tubes.

Question 44.
Sieve tubes in angiosperms are associated with specialised parenchyma cells. Name those cells. How do they help sieve-tube members?
Answer:
Companion cells, help in physiological working of sieve-tube members.

Question 45.

  1. Name the various components of xylem.
  2. Which of them does not have a nucleus?

Answer:

  1. Tracheids, vessels, xylem parenchyma, and xylem fibers.
  2. Tracheids, vessels, and xylem fibers

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 46.
How are exarch and endarch conditions different anatomically in stem and root?
Answer:
1. The anatomical condition is endarch in dicot as well as monocot stem.

2. In endarch condition protoxylem lie towards inner side of vascular budle However, in anatomy of root.the condition is exarch.i.e protoxylem is towards outer side and metaxylem is towards centre.

Question 47.
Cork cambium forms tissues that form the cork. Do you agree with this statement? Give reasons.
Answer:
Cork cambium develops in cortex region during secondary growth in stem. Cork cambium cut off cork (phellum) towards the outside and secondary cortex or phellodem towards the inner-side.

Question 48.
If one debarks a tree, what parts of the plant is being removed?
Answer:
Phloem is removed and food translocation becomes difficult.

Question 49.
What is periderm? How does periderm formation take place in the dicot stems?
Answer:
Phellogen, phellem, and phelloderm are together known as periderm. Due to secondary growth of the stem, the outer cortical and epidermis layer broken and replaced by another meristematic issue called phellogen. Phellogen or cork cambium cuts off cells on both sides the outer cells are called cork or phellem and the inner cells are phelloderm or secondary cortex.

Question 50.
Some anatomical details of material are given below vascular bumdles are conjoint and open, medullary rays are present, hypodermis collenchymatous, cortex heterogenous

  1. Identify the material
  2. Name the tissue given above from which interfascicular cambium develops during secondary growth.

Answer:

  1. Dicot stem
  2. Medullary ray

Question 51.
Three type of tissues formed during secondary growth together have protective functions.

  1. Name the three types
  2. Name the opening found in outer part of mature woody dicot stem and give its function

Answer:

  1. phellem, phellogen, and phelloderm
  2. lenticel, gaseous exchange

Question 52.

  1. Distinguish between heartwood and sapwood.
  2. Heartwood is durable why?

Answer:
1. Distinguish between heartwood and sapwood
Heartwood

  • found in the central part
  • nonfunctional
  • dark coloured

Sapwood

  • found in peripheral part
  • functional
  • light coloured

2. Heartwood is resistant to microbial attack and it is filled with resin, gum, essential oil, aromatic oil, and tannins. Hence heartwood is durable.

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A portion of the transverse section of maize stem is shown in the diagram.
Label a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h and i.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img12
Answer:

  1. a – Cuticle
  2. b – Epidermis
  3. c – Sclerenchymatous hypodermis
  4. d – Sclerenchymatous sheath
  5. e – Parentchymatous sheath
  6. f – Phloem
  7. g – Metaxylem
  8. h – Protoxylem
  9. i – Water cavity.

Question 2.
Differentiate the following

  1. Bark & Periderm
  2. Heartwood &Sapwood
  3. Endarch & Exarch

Answer:
1. Bark – It is the tissue outside vascular cambium.
Periderm – It is the outer protective tissue It includes phellem, phellogen, and phelloderm.

2. Heartwood – It is the dark coloured, nonfunctional central part of wood resistant to the attack of microorganisms.
Sap wood – It is the light coloured, functional and peripheral part of wood.

3. Endarch – It is the arrangement of xylem in which protoxylem facing towards cente and metaxylem towards the periphery, eg. stem.
Exarch – It is the arrangement of xylem in which Metaxylem facing towards centre and protoxylem towards periphery.eg: Root.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 3.
Match column A with B and C.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img13
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img14

Question 4.
Match the Following.

AB
NostocProtonema
Gonyaulaxrespiratory root
Chlorellared tide
CycasSpace travelers
Rhizophoraheterocyst
FunariaCoralloid root

Answer:

AB
Nostocheterocyst
Gonyaulaxred tide
ChlorellaSpace travelers
CycasCoral loid root
RhizophoraRespiratory root
FunariaProtonema

Question 5.
The following are the characters of Dicot stem and Monocot stem. Identify the character and write in appropriate column.

  1. collenchymatous hypodermis
  2. Sclerenchymatous hypodermis
  3. Open bundle
  4. Closed bundle
  5. Bundle cap present
  6. Bundle sheath present
  7. Xylem polygonal
  8. Xylem circular
Dicot stemMonocot stem

Answer:

DICOTSTEMMONOCOT STEM
ab
cd
ef
gh

Question 6.
Plant growth is indeterminate in most plants it can go on indefinitely at the tips of roots and shoots. Special types of tissues are located at these regions

  1. Name those tissues
  2. Classify these tissues based on the position and origin.

Answer:

  1. Meristematic tissues
  2. Based on the position they are classified into three types,
    • apical meristem
    • intercalary meristem and
    • lateral meristem

Based on the origin, they are classified into 2.

  1. primary meristem and
  2. Secondary Meristem

Question 7.
1. Choose from among the following key terms and
complete the chart given below.
conjoint, closed, exarch open, …………. large, ……………. small endarch, radial ……….. few in a ring, ……….. many xylem and phloem bundles
few.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img15
2. Comment on the utility of this chart.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img16

Question 8.
The following schematic representation shows the classification of complex tissues. Complete it.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img17
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img18

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants NCERT Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the three basic tissue systems in the flowering plants. Give the tissue names under each system.
Answer:
On the basis of their structure and location, there are three types of tissue systems:

  1. Epidermal Tissue System. Epidermis, Stomata.
  2. Ground or Fundamental Tissue System Parenchyma, Sclerenchyma and Collenchyma.
  3. Vascular or conducting Tissue System. Phloem and Xylem.

Question 2.
The transverse section of a plant material shows the following anatomical features

  1. the vascular bundles are conjoint, scattered and surrounded by a sclerenchymatous bundle sheath.
  2. phloem parenchyma is absent. What will you identify as?

Answer:
As is clear from above TS of monocot stem vascular bundles are scattered in monocot stems and phloem parenchyma is absent.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 3.
Why are xylem and phloem called complex tissues?
Answer:
Xylem and phloem are composed of several types of cells and they work as a unit. Hence they are called complex tissues.

Question 4.
What is the stomatal apparatus? Explain the structure of stomata with a labelled diagram.
Answer:
Stomata are structures present in the epidermis of leaves. Stomata regulate the process of transpiration and gaseous exchange. Each stomata is composed of two bean-shaped cells known as guard cells. In grasses, the guard cells are dumbbell-shaped.

The outer walls of guard cells (away from the stomatal pore) are thin and the inner walls (towards the stomatal pore) are highly thickened. The guard cells possess chloroplasts and regulate the opening and closing of stomata.

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Interfascicular cambium is a
(a) primary meristematic tissue
(b) primordial meristem
(c) type of proto deny
(d) secondary meristematic tissue
Answer:
(d) secondary meristematic tissue

Question 2.
In an annual ring, the light coloured part is known as
(a) earlywood
(b) late wood
(c) heartwood
(d) sapwood
Answer:
(a) earlywood

Question 3.
The layer of cells outside the phloem meant for giving rise to the root branches is called
(a) cambium
(b) cork
(c) endodermis
(d) pericycle
Answer:
(d) pericycle

Question 4.
Cork cambium of dicot originates from
(a) epiblema
(b) pericycle
(c) the cambium of vascular bundles
(d) endodermis
Answer:
(b) pericycle

Question 5.
Alburnum is otherwise known as
(a) periderm
(b) sapwood
(c) heartwood
(d) cork
Answer:
(b) sapwood

Question 6.
Duramen is present in
(a) inner region of secondary wood
(b) part of sapwood
(c) outer region of secondary wood
(d) region of pericycle
Answer:
(a) inner region of secondary wood

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 7.
Which one of the following is the correct sequence of tissues present in dicot stem during secondary growth
(a) Phellogen, cork, primary cortex, secondary cortex
(b) Cork, primary cortex, secondary cortex, phellogen
(c) Primary cortex, secondary cortex, phellogen, cork
(d) Secondary Cortex, phellogen, cork .primary cortex
Answer:
(d) Secondary Cortex, phellogen, cork .primary cortex

Question 8.
The meristem responsible for extra stelar secondary growth in dicot stem is
(a) interfascicular cambium
(b) intrafascicular cambium
(c) intercalary meristem
(d) phellogen
Answer:
(d) phellogen

Question 9.
Tracheids
(a) are the dominant cell types of xylem in angiosperms
(b) are primarily found in mosses and liverworts
(c) are responsible for water conduction and support in many land plants.
(d) first appeared during Palaeozoic era
Answer:
(c) are responsible for water conduction and support in many land plants.

Question 10.
In the following, how the sapwood is converted into heartwood?
(a) By degeneration of protoplast of living cells
(b) Tyloses formation
(c) By deposition of resins, oils, gums, etc
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 11.
As secondary growth proceeds in a dicot stem, the thickness of
(a) sapwood increases
(b) heartwood increases
(c) both sapwood and heartwood increase
(d) both sapwood and heartwood remains the same
Answer:
(c) both sapwood and heartwood increase

Question 12.
Which is not a characteristic of plant cell walls?
(a) Found only in the sporophyte phase of life cycle
(b) Among other compounds contains compounds built of simple sugars
(c) May contain enzymes that are biologically active
(d) Often contain strengthening polymers
Answer:
(a) Found only in the sporophyte phase of life cycle

Question 13.
Identify the correct order of the components with reference to their arrangement from outer side to inner side in a woody dicot stern.

  1. Secondary cortex
  2. Autumn wood
  3. Secondary phloem
  4. Phellem

(a) 2,3, 1,4
(b) 3,4,2,1
(c) 4, 1,3,2
(d) 1,2,4,3
Answer:
(c) 4, 1,3,2

Question 14.
Removal of ring wood of tissue outside the vascular cambium from the tree trunk kills it because
(a) water cannot move up
(b) food does not travel down and root become starved
(c) shoot become starved
(d) annual rings are not produced
Answer:
(b) food does not travel down and root become starved

Question 15.
Which tissue gives rise to secondary growth?
(a) Apical meristem
(b) Adventitious roots
(c) Germinating seed
(d) Vascular cambium
Answer:
(d) Vascular cambium

Question 16.
Growth rings are formed due to activity of
(a) extrastelar cambium
(b) intrastelar cambium
(c) interstelar cambium
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) and (c)

Question 17.
A nail is driven into the trunk of a 30 years old tree at a point l in above the soil level. The tree grows in height at the rate of 0.5m a year. After three years, the nail will be
(a) 1m above the soil
(b) 1.5 m above the soil
(c) 2 in above the soil
(d) 2.5 m above the soil
Answer:
(a) 1m above the soil

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 18.
In which of the following, there is no differentiation of bark, sapwood, and heartwood?
(a) Ashok
(b) Neem
(c) Mango
(d) Datepalm
Answer:
(d) Datepalm

Question 19.
A tree grows at a rate of 0.5 m per year. What will be the height of the board fixed at 1.5 m above the base five years ago?
(a) 4.0 m
(b) 3.5 m
(c) 1.5 m
(d) 4.5 m
Answer:
(c) 1.5 m

Question 20.
Secondary phloem remains functional generally
(a) for one year
(b) for less than one year
(c) for many years
(d) as long as the plant is alive
Answer:
(d) as long as the plant is alive

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Students can Download Chapter 4 Biomolecules Questions and Answers, Plus One zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Plus One Biomolecules One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Many elements are found in living organisms either free or in the form of compounds. One of the following is not, found in living organisms.
(a) Silicon
(b) Magnesium
(c) Iron
(d) Sodium
Answer:
(a) Silicon

Question 2.
Aminoacids, as the name suggests, have both an amino group and a carboxyl group in their structure. In addition, all naturally occurring amino acids (those which are found in proteins) are called L-aminoacids. From this, can you guess from which compound can the simplest amino acid be made?
(a) Formic acid
(b) Methane
(c) Phenol
(d) Glycine
Answer:
(b) Methane

Question 3.
When we homogenise any tissue in an acid the acid soluble pool represents
(a) Cytoplasm
(b) Cell membrane
(c) Nucleus
(d) Mitochondria
Answer:
(a) Cytoplasm

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Many organic substances are negatively charged e.g., acetic acid, while others are positively charged e.g., ammonium ion. An amino acid under certain conditions would have both positive and negative charges simultaneously in the same molecule. Such a form of amino acid is called
(a) Positively charged form
(b) Negatively charged form
(c) Neutral form
(d) Zwitter ionic form
Answer:
(d) Zwitter ionic form

Question 5.
Sugars are technically balled carbohydrates, referring to the fact that their formulae are only multiple of C(H2O). Hexoses, therefore, have six carbons, twelve hydrogens and six oxygen atoms. Glucose is a hexose.
Choose from among the following another hexose.
(a) Fructose
(b) Erythrose
(c) Ribulose
(d) Ribose
Answer:
(a) Fructose

Question 6.
Fill the gap:
Inhibition of succinic dehydrogenase by Malonate is an example for _____________
Answer:
Competitive Inhibition

Question 7.
Name the phospholipid found in cell membrane.
Answer:
Lecithin

Question 8.
The metabolic pathway from glucose to lactic acid which occurs in 10 metabolic steps is called ________________
Answer:
Glycolysis

Question 9.
Energy currency in living systems is _______________
Answer:
Adenosine triphosphate (ATP)

Question 10.
Find the off one out.
Rubber, Amino Acids, Drugs, Pigments
Answer:
Amino acids: Amino acids are primary metabolites. All others are secondary metabolites.

Question 11.
Arrange the following Carbo-hydrates in the order of increasing complexity of chemical structure.
Glucose, Oligosaccharides, Lactose, Starch.
Answer:
Glucose → Lactose → Oligosaccharides → Starch

Question 12.
One full turn of the DNA double helix would involve.
(a) 8 steps
(b) 10 steps
(c) 20 steps
(d) 12 steps
Answer:
(b) 10 steps

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 13.
Match the column A with B and C.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 1
Answer:

  • Glucose – Glycoside – Carbohydrate
  • Aminoacids – Peptide – Protein
  • Nucleotide – Phosphor diester – Nucleic acid

Question 14.
A short length of DNA double helix contains 60 Adenine nucleotides and 40 cytosine nucleotides. What will be the total number of nucleotides in it? (60, 120, 80, 200)
Answer:
200

Question 15.
Add suitable word in the gap.

  1. A protein molecule is a polymers of _____________
  2. Nucleic acids are polymers of _____________
  3. DNA has _________ instead of uracil.
  4. Single stranded structure is found in ___________

Answer:

  1. Aminoacids
  2. Nucleotides
  3. Thymine
  4. RNA

Question 16.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 2
The structure of amino acids in solutions of different PH are given above. Identify the structure ‘B’.
Answer:
Zwitterionic form

Question 17.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 3
Name the enzyme catalyse this reaction.
Answer:
Carbonic anhydrase

Plus One Biomolecules Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Observe the table and fill the blanks from the brackets.
(Collagen, Cholesterol, chitin, Lecithin)
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 4
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 5

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 2.
Building blocks of proteins are amino acids and that of polysaccharides are monosaccharides. Many polysaccharides are called homopolymers but all proteins are known as heteropolymers.

  1. Do you agree with the above statement? Give reason.
  2. Give one example for a homopolymer.

Answer:

  1. Yes. Many polysaccharides are made up of only one type of monosaccharide. They are known as homopolymers. But all protein contain different type of amino acids. So they all are heteropolymers.
  2. Cellulose. Cellulose is made up of only one type of monosaccharide ie. glucose.

Question 3.
Classify the following as polypeptide and polysaccharide.
(Insulin, Glycogen, Chitin, Paper)
Answer:

PolypeptidePolysaccharide
InsulinGlycogen
Chitin
Paper

Question 4.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 6

  1. Observe the graph and comment.
  2. List out the factors which influence enzyme activity.

Answer:

  1. Each enzyme shows its highest activity at a particular temperature called the optimum temperature. Activity declines both below and above the optimum value.
  2. Temperature, pH, change in substrate concentration, binding of specific chemicals that regulate enzyme activity.

Question 5.
Write the general names of the following.

  1. Enzymes catalyzing the linking together of two compounds.
  2. Enzymes that catalyze removed of groups from substrates by mechanism other than hydrolysis leaving double bonds.

Answer:

  1. Ligases
  2. Lyases

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Find out the differences between DNA and RNA and fill the table given below.

DNARNA
?Ribonucleotides
Deoxyribosugar?
?Single stranded
ACTS Present?

Answer:

DNARNA
DeoxyribonucleotidesRibonucleotides
DeoxyribosugarRibose sugar
Double strandedSingle stranded
ACTG PresentACUG Present

Question 7.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 7
Two polymers are given. In this chain how are monomers linked ?
Answer:
a. Glycosidicbond
b. Peptide bond

Question 8.
The following graph shows the relationship between subtrate concentration and rate of enzymatic reaction.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 8

  1. What is the effect of subtrate concentration on rate of reaction ?
  2. Identify ‘A’.

Answer:
1. With the increase in substrate concentration, the velocity of the enzymatic reaction rise at first. The reaction ultimately reaches a maximum velocity V(max) which is not exceeded by any further rise in concentration of the substrate.

This is because the enzyme molecules are fewer than the substrate molecule and after saturation of these molecules, there are no free enzyme molecules to bind with the additional substrate molecule.

2. V(max)

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 9.
Identify the class of enzyme which catalyse the following reaction.

  1. S reduced + S’ oxidised ? S oxidised + S’ reduced
  2. S – G + S’→ S + S’ – G
    X Y
    I I
  3. C – C → X-Y+C
  4. C-O, C-S, C-N bonds

Answer:

  1. Oxidoreductase
  2. Transferase
  3. Lyases
  4. Ligases

Question 10.
A portion of DNA double helix is given below. Copy the diagram and make correction if any.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 9
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 10

Question 11.
Adenine, Guanine, thymine, Cytosine, Uracil, are the nitrogen bases present in the living organisms. Write their nucleosides and nucleotides.
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 11

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 12.

  1. Prepare a graph showing the action of temperature on enzyme activity.
  2. What is optimum temperature.

Answer:
1.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 12

2. Each enzyme shows its highest activity at a particular temperature called optimum temperature.

Question 13.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 13

  1. Identify the given graph
  2. If we add more substrate after reaching Vmax, What will be the effect in the reaction rate?

Answer:

  1. Effect of change in concentration of substrate on enzyme activity.
  2. There is no further increase in the velocity of reaction because there are no free enzyme molecules to bind with the additional substrate molecule.

Question 14.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 14
The table shows the percentage composition of different elements of a living matter and a non-living matter represented as X and Y. Identify X and Y.
Answer:

  1. X – Non living matter (Earth’s crust)
  2. Y – Living matter (human body)

Question 15.
Fatty acids could be saturated or unsaturated. Give an account on it.
Answer:
1. Fatty acids are saturated if they do not have any double bond between the carbons of the molecular chain.
eg: Palmitic acid.

2. Unsaturated fatty acids have one or more double bond between carbon of the molecular chain,
eg: linoleic acid.

Question 16.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 15
Identify the structure.
Answer:
Cholesterol

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 17.
General Formula of amino acid is given below.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 16
(a) Prepare the amino acids – Glycine and Serine using this formula.
(b) State the influence of pH in the nature of amino acid.
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 17

(b) Amino acids are of basic amino acids, acidic amino acids, Neutral amino acids and aromatic amino acids. Hence in solutions of different pH, the structure of amino acids changes.

Question 18.
Chemical structure of an Amino acid is given.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 18
(a) Prepare its Zwitter ionic form.
(b) What happens to the Zwitter ion if it is placed in acidic medium?
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 19

(b) In acidic medium it gains H and become positive charged
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 20

Question 19.
Write the missing word.

  1. Amino acid: Protein, Nucleotide: __________
  2. Glucose: Monosaccharide, Starch: __________
  3. Adenine: Thymine, Guanine: ________
  4. Animals: Glycogen, Plants: _________

Answer:

  1. Nucleic acid
  2. Polysaccharide
  3. Cytosine
  4. Starch

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 20.
(a) Identify the structure of protein A and B.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 21
(b) Write an example for a protein with a quaternary structure.
Answer:
(a) A) Secondary structure
B) Tertiary structure

(b) Hemoglobin

Question 21.
Proteins carry out many functions in living organisms. List them.
Answer:

  1. Some protein functions as enzymes.
  2. Some protein functions as Hormones.
  3. Some protein fight infectious organisms.
  4. Some protein transport nutrients across the cell membrane.

Question 22.
Give an example forthe following.

  1. Phospholipids
  2. Saturated fatty acid
  3. Nucleoside
  4. Nucleotide

Answer:

  1. Lecithin
  2. Palmitic acid
  3. Adenosine
  4. Adenylic acid

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 23.
B-DNA is the most common DNA. Write the salient features of this DNA.
Answer:
The length of one full turn of a B-DNA molecule is 34A0. The distance between two adjacent nucleotides in a chain is 3.4A0. Thus there are 10 pairs of nucleotides in one full turn of DNA molecule.

Question 24.
Identify the structure.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 22
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 23
Answer:
(a) Adenine
(b) Adenosine

Question 25.
The given structure showing the molecule give ready energy for biological activities. Identify the structure.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 24
Answer:
Adenosine triphosphate (ATP)

Question 26.
Schematic diagram of DNA is given. Copy the structure and correct it, if there is any mistake.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 25
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 26

Question 27.
Classify the given terms into two columns and give appropriate heading.
rubber, Glucose, amino acids, drugs, gums, spices, cholesterol, Fatty acids.
Answer:

Primary MetabolismSecondary Metabolism
GlucoseRubber
Amino acidsDrugs
CholesterolGums
Fatty acidsSpices

Question 28.
Progress of a chemical reaction and potential energy changes associated with it is plotted as curve.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 27

  1. What happens to the activation energy of the substrate, when enzyme is added to the reaction system?
  2. Redraw the above graph and also plot another curve showing the progress of the reaction and associated potential energy change, when enzyme is added to the system.

Answer:
1. Activation energy decreases

2.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 28

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 29.
Observe the given graph a and
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 29

  1. State how temperature and pH influences enzyme activity.
  2. Does the substrate concentration influence enzyme activity. If so, how?

Answer:
1. Each enzyme shows its highest activity at a particular temperature. This is called optimum temperature. Low temperature or high temperature reduces the enzyme activity. Same as, there is an optimum pH for enzyme activity. Deviation from this pH reduces the enzyme activity.

2. With the increase in substrate concentration, the velocity of the enzymatic reaction increase at first, as the substrate concentration continues to increase, the increase in the rate of reaction begins to slow down and finally no further rise in velocity occurs. This is because there is no free enzyme molecule to bind additional substrate molecule.

Question 30.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 30
The graph shows the relation between potential energy and progress of reaction. Observe the graph and answer the questions.

  1. Is this reaction”exothermic or endothermic? Give reason.
  2. What happen to the amount of enzyme at completion of reaction?

Answer:

  1. Exothermic. The energy level of substrate is higher than that of product.
  2. No change to enzyme

Question 31.
Observe the diagram.

  1. Name the process showing here.
  2. How is this process would be useful?

Answer:

  1. Competitive inhibition
  2. Competitive inhibitor are often used in the control of bacterial pathogen.

Question 32.
Fill in the blank columns with the correct terms/ sentences.

AB
………. (1)…………..Catalyse oxido – reduction between two substrates.
Transferase……. (1)………..
………. (2)………..Catalyse hydrolysis of ester, glycosidic bond
Lyases………. (2)……………
………. (3)…………..Catalyse inter conversion of optical isomers
Ligase………. (3)…………………..

Answer:

AB
OxidoreductaseCatalyse oxido – reduction between two substrates.
TransferaseCatalyse group transfer between substrates.
HydrolaseCatalyse hydrolysis of ester, glycosidic bond
LyasesRemoval of group from a substrate by clearing double bonds.
IsomeraseCatalyse inter conversion of optical isomers
LigaseCatalyse linking together of two compounds.

Plus One Biomolecules Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Structure of a nucleotide pair in DNA is showing below.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 31
Identify the bonds A, B and C.
Answer:

  • A – Hydrogen bond
  • B – Glycosidic bond
  • C – Ester bond

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 2.
Give examples.

  1. Prosthetic group
  2. Co-enzyme
  3. Metal ion required for enzyme activity.

Answer:

  1. Haem is the prosthetic group of enzyme peroxidase.
  2. NADP and NAD contain the Vitamin Niacin.
  3. Zinc present in carboxy peptidase.

Question 3.
Give one word.

  1. The nucleic acids that behave like enzymes
  2. The organic compound tightly bound to the apo enzyme.
  3. The non protein organic compound that are not tightly bound to the apoenzyme.
  4. The protein portion of the enzyme.

Answer:

  1. Ribosome
  2. Prosthetic group
  3. Co-enzyme
  4. Apoenzyme

Question 4.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 32
Identify the molecules A and B and name the bond marked C.
Answer:

  • A – Glucose
  • B – Maltose
  • C- Glycosidicbond

Question 5.
Observe the structure.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 33

  1. Identify the bond formed between amino acids.
  2. How many types of amino acids are present in animal body?
  3. In nutrition some amino acids are required. Write a note on it.

Answer:

  1. Peptide bond
  2. 20 types of amino acids
  3. Note on amino acids:
    • Essential amino acids: The amino acids can not be synthesisecHn the animal body and must be obtained through diet are called essential amino acids.
    • Non-essential amino acids: The amino acids which can be synthesised in the body are called non essential amino acids.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Give name.

  1. The most abundant protein in animal.
  2. The most abundant protein in the whole of the biosphere.
  3. A polymer of fructose.
  4. Paper made from plant pulp is
  5. Complex polysaccharide present in the exoskeleton of Arthropods
  6. Polysaccharide with helical structure

Answer:

  1. Collagen
  2. RuBisCo
  3. Insulin
  4. Cellulose
  5. Chitin
  6. Starch

Question 7.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 34

  1. Identify the structures A, B, C and D.
  2. Name the molecule formed by the esterification of one ‘D’ molecule and three ‘C’ molecule.

Answer:

  1. Structures:
    • A) Glucose
    • B) Amino acid (Glycine)
    • C) Fatty acid
    • D) Glycerol
  2. 1 glycerol + 3 fatty acid Triglyceride

Question 8.
Match the column A and B.

AB
a. BioluminescenceFructose
b. InulinBasic amino acid
c. LysineNicotinamide adenine
dinucleotide
d. SkeltonCtenophora
e. NucleosideSpicules
f. Co-enzymeThymidine

Answer:

AB
a. BioluminescenceCtenophora
b. InulinFructose
c. LysineBasic amino acid
d. SkeltonSpicules
e. NucleosideThymidine
f. Co-enzymeNicotinamide adenine
dinucleotide

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 9.
The activity of the enzyme is inhibited by certain chemicals having close resemblance to the substrate in its molecular structure.

  1. Name the type of inhibition
  2. Point out a suitable example
  3. Mention the Significance of this type of inhibition.

Answer:

  1. Competitive inhibition
  2. Inhibition of succinic dehydrogenase by malonate. Which closely resembles the substrate succinate in structure.
  3. Competitive inhibition are often used in the control of bacterial pathogen.

Question 10.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 35
The figure shows the bonding of a biomolecule

  1. Identify the monomer
  2. Name the bond between the molecules
  3. Name the macromolecule formed

Answer:

  1. Glucose
  2. Glycosidic bond
  3. Starch

Plus One Biomolecules NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Proteins have primary structure. If you are given a method to know which amino acid is at either of the two termini (ends) of a protein, can you connect this information to purity or homogeneity of a protein?
Answer:
In there is one type of amino acid at both termini then it is homopolymer and it cannot be a pure protein. When there are different types of amino acids on both termini then it is a pure protein as proteins are heteropolymer. This property of protein in because of presence of 21 types of amino acids.

Question 2.
Find out and make a list of proteins used as therapeutic agents. Find other applications of proteins (e.g., Cosmetics art)
Answer:

  1. Therapeutic Agents:
    • Contraceptive pills: As they are hormones so they are made up of protein.
    • Nutritional Supplements: Many brands are available as protein supplements. Example: Protinex.
  2. Other Uses: Chicken cubes are used in making soups and dishes.

Question 3.
Explain the composition of triglyceride.
Answer:
Triglycerides are formed from a single molecule of glycerol, combined with three fatty acids on each of the OH groups, and make up most of fats digested by humans. Easter bonds from between each fatty acid and the glycerol molecule.
General structure of a triglyceride Chemical formula:

RCOO-CH2CH(-OOCR)CH2-OOCR,
where R, R’, and R” are longer alkyl chains. The three fatty acids RCOOH, RCOOH and RCOOH can be all different, all the same, or only two the same. Chain lengths of the fatty acids in naturally occurring triglycerides can be of varying lengths, but 16, 18 and 20 carbons are the most common.

Natural fatty acids found in plants and animals are typically composed only of even numbers of carbon atoms due to the way they are biosynthesized from acetyl CoA. Bacteria, however, possess the ability to synthesise odd – and branched – chain fatty acids. Consequently, ruminant animal fat contains odd num¬bered fatty acids, such as 15, due to the action of bacteria in the rumen.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Can you describe What happens when milk is converted into curd or yogurt, from your understanding of proteins?
Answer:
Casein is the predominant phosphoprotein, that accounts for nearly 80% of proteins in cow milk and cheese. Milk-clotting proteases act on the soluble portion of the caseins. K Casein, thus originating an unstable micellar state that results in clot formation. When coagulated with chymosin, casein is sometimes called paracasein.

Casein is not coagulated by heat. It is precipitated by acids and by rennet enzymes, a proteolytic enzyme typically obtained from the stomachs of calves.

Question 5.
Can you attempt building models of biomolecules using commercially available atomic models (Ball and Stick models)?
Answer:
Following three-dimensional structure of cellulose can be made using balls and sticks. Similarly, models of other biomolecules can be made.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 36

Question 6.
Attempt titrating an amino acid against a weak base and discover the number of dissociating (ionizable) functional groups in the amino acid.
Answer:
On titrating against a weak base the amino acid ionizes into following functional groups.

  • NH2 (amino group)
  • COOH (Carboxyl group)

Question 7.
Draw the structure of the amino acid, alanine.

Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 37

Question 8.
What are gums made of? Is Fevicol different?
Answer:
Natural gums are polysaccharides of natural origin, capable of causing a large viscosity increase in solution, even at small concentrations. Fevicol is a synthetic glue. These adhesives are a mixture of ingredients (typically polymers) dissolved in a solvent. As the solvent evaporates, the adhesive hardens.

Depending on the chemical composition of the adhesive, they will adhere to different materials to greater or lesser degrees. These adhesives are typically weak and are used for household applications.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 9.
Explain the basic structure of a nucleotide.
Answer:
A nucleotide is a building block of nucleic acids. A nucleotide has following components:

  1. A heterocyclic compound (base)
  2. A mnonosaccharide, and
  3. A phosphoric acid or a phosphate.

Plus One Biomolecules Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Enzyme often have additional parts intheirstructures that are made up of molecules otherthan proteins. When this additional chemical part is an organic molecule, it is called
(a) cofactor
(b) coenzyme
(c) substrate
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(a) cofactor

Question 2.
Nucleotides are formed by
(a) sugar and phosphate
(b) purine, pyrimidine and phosphate
(c) purine, pyrimidine, sugar and phosphate
(d) pyrimidine, sugar and phosphate
Answer:
(b) purine, pyrimidine and phosphate

Question 3.
The effectiveness of an enzyme is affected least by
(a) temperature
(b) concentration of the substrate
(c) original activation energy of the system
(d) concentration of the enzyme
Answer:
(c) original activation energy of the system

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Which is an organic compound found in most cells?
(a) Glucose
(b) Water
(c) Sodium chloride
(d) Oxygen
Answer:
(a) Glucose

Question 5.
Enzymes that catalyse inter-conversion of optical, geometrical or positional isomers are
(a) ligases
(b) lyases
(c) hydrolases
(d) isomerases
Answer:
(d) isomerases

Question 6.
Which one of the following is wrongly matched?
(a) Fungi – Chitn
(b) Phospholipid – Plasma membrane
(c) Enzyme – Lipopolysacchande
(d) ATP – Nucleotide derivative
Answer:
(c) Enzyme – Lipopolysacchande

Question 7.
An organic substance bound to an enzyme and essential for its activity is called
(a) coenzyme
(b) holoenzyme
(c) apoenzyme
(d) isoenzyme
Answer:
(a) coenzyme

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 8.
The ‘Repeating unit of glycogen is
(a) fructose
(b) mannose
(c) glucose
(d) galactose
Answer:
(c) glucose

Question 9.
Feedback inhibition of enzymes is affected by which of the following?
(a) Enzyme
(b) Substrate
(c) End products
(d) Intermediate end products
Answer:
(c) End products

Question 10.
The enzyme, which combines with non-protein part to form a functional enzyme, is known as
(a) coenzyme
(b) holoenzyme
(c) apoenzyme
(d) prosthetic group
Answer:
(b) holoenzyme

Question 11.
Benedict’s reagent test is conducted to confirm the presence of
(a) polysaccharides like starch
(b) lipids
(c) reducing sugars
(d) proteins
Answer:
(c) reducing sugars

Question 12.
Which disaccharide has different linkage?
(a) Maltose
(b) Starch
(c) Sucrose
(d) Lactose
Answer:
(c) Sucrose

Question 13.
Select the wrong statement.
(a) The building blocks of lipids are amino acids
(b) Majority of enzymes contain a non-protein part called the prosthetic group
(c) The thylakoids are arranged one above the other like a stack of coins forming a granum
(d) Crossing over occurs at pachytene stage ofmeiosis-l
Answer:
(a) The building blocks of lipids are amino acids

Question 14.
Which of the following is a disaccharide?
(a) Glucose
(b) Fructose
(c) Sucrose
(d) Galactose
Answer:
(c) Sucrose

Question 15.
Lactose is composed of following components.
(a) glucose and fructose
(b) glucose and glucose
(c) glucose, fructose and galactose
(d) glucose and galactose
Answer:
(d) glucose and galactose

Question 16.
The simple polyhydroxy ketone molecule containing 3-7 carbons is a
(a) disaccharide
(b) monosaccharide
(c) polysaccharide
(d) dipeptide
Answer:
(b) monosaccharide

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 17.
How many of the twenty two amino acids are essential for children?
(a) 6
(b) 8
(c) 9
(d) 7
Answer:
(c) 9

Question 18.
Starch and cellulose are compounds of many units of
(a) glycerol
(b) amino acids
(c) simple sugars
(d) fatty acids
Answer:
(c) simple sugars

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Students can Download Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
_________ is a free and open source software for accounting, developed by Digital Freedom Foundation.
Answer:
GNUKhata

Question 2.
The first step in GNUKhata is ________
(a) To create an organisation
(b) To create Ledger account
(c) Voucher entry
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) To create an organisation

Question 3.
Write the path for starting GNUKhata
Answer:
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 4.
Which among the following is not a level of users in GNUKhata
(a) Managing Director
(b) Admin
(c) Manager
(d) Operator
Answer:
(a) Managing Director

Question 5.
GNUKhata has ………… (a) …………… predetermined groups and ……… (b) ……….. subgroups
Answer:
(a) 13
(b) 16

Question 6.
Amount received by way of cash or cheque is recorded in GNUKhata by using ________ voucher type
Answer:
Receipt Voucher (F4)

Question 7.
Short cut keys for activating Credit Note is _______
(a) Ctrl + 1
(b) Ctrl + 2
(c) Ctrl + 3
(d) Ctrl + 3
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + 3

Question 8.
To clone a voucher means
(a) To delete a voucher
(b) To copy a voucher
(c) To edit a voucher
(d) To print a voucher
Answer:
(b) To copy a voucher

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 9.
From ________ menu, we will enable to view Ledger,
Trial Balance, Balance sheet, Profit and Loss AC etc.
Answer:
Report menu

Question 10.
Which among the following is NOT a feature of GNUKhata?
(a) Free and open source accounting software
(b) Based on double entry book keeping
(c) Coding of Ledger account
(d) Linking of sales and purchase transactions to invoices
Answer:
(c) Coding of Ledger account

Question 11.
What is FOSS?
(a) Free and Open Security Software
(b) Financial Accounting Open Source Software
(c) Free and Open System Software
(d) Free and Open Source Software
Answer:
(c) Free and Open Source Software

Question 12.
Left side of the GNUKhata welcome screen shows __________
(a) Three buttons and dialog box
(b) Description about double entry principles
(c) Printer settings and network
(d) Description about the advantages and developer of GNUKhata
Answer:
(d) Description about the advantages and developer of GNUKhata

Question 13.
Short Cut keys Shift + Ctrl + R is used for ________
Answer:
Create Organisation

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 14.
Choose the statement which is NOT True
(a) We can create a new group but a new sub group can not be created
(b) We can not create a new group but a new sub group can be created
(c) We cannot delete a group or a sub group
(d) We cannot create a sub group of a sub group
Answer:
(a) We can create a new group but a new sub group can not be created

Question 15.
______________ is prepared by an account holder to check whether all cheques deposited by him are cleared and all cheques
issued by him are presented on not.
(a) Bank Reconciliation statement
(b) Trading, Profit and Loss Account & Balance Sheet
(c) Cash Book and Pass Book
(d) Trial Balance
Answer:
(a) Bank Reconciliation statement

Question 16.
Sub Group “Sundry Debtors” coming under ________ Group
Answer:
Current Asset

Question 17.
Choose the right statement
(a) Once organisation is created, the financial year can be changed whenever necessary
(b) Once organisation is created, the financial year can not be changed.
Answer:
(b) Once organisation is created, the financial year can not be changed.

Question 18.
Create is mandatory in GNUkhata
(a) Internal Auditor
(b) Operator
(c) Manager
(d) Admin
Answer:
(d) Admin

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 19.
Which one of the following is free and open source software for Accounting
(a) Tally
(b) PeechTree
(c) GNUKhata
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) GNUKhata

Question 20.
Which accounting software can be easily transformed into Indian languages?
Answer:
GNUKhata

Question 21.
When we open GNUKhata for the first time, we will see ______
(a) Create Organisation window
(b) Voucher Entry window
(c) Welcome screen
(d) User name and Password window
Answer:
(c) Welcome screen

Question 22.
Which type of organisation can be created in GNUKhata?
(a) Profit Making Organisations
(b) Not for Profit Organisations
(c) (a) and (b)
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(c) (a) and (b)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 23.
Only ______ user can log in as ‘Admin’
(а) One
(b) Two
(c) Many
(d) None
Answer:
(a) One

Question 24.
Write path for deleting an organisation.
Answer:
Log in as ‘Admin user’ → Administration menu → Select ‘Delete Organisation’.

Question 25.
The sub Group ‘Plant and Machinery’ is coming under _______________ group.
Answer:
Fixed Assets

Question 26.
Which among the following is not a Profit and loss A/c Group in GnuKhata.
(a) Direct Income
(b) Direct Expenses
(c) Indirect Income
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 27.
There are system generated ledger accounts in GNUkhata
(a) One
(b) Two
(c) Three
(d) Four
Answer:
(d) Four

Question 28.
In GNUKhata, while creating a Ledger account, we have to enter opening balance only if _________
(a) The account belongs to Trading, P/La/c group
(b) The account belongs to a Balance sheet group
(c) It is a cash account
(d) It is a Liability account
Answer:
(b) The account belongs to a Balance sheet group

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 29.
Contra Voucher is used to record.
(a) Deposits or withdrawals of cash from the bank
(b) Transfer of fund from one bank to another
(c) Transfer of cash to petty cash
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write the Path to display Trial Balance.
Answer:
Report → Trial Balance → Enter Date → Select Trial Balance Type → Click on view button

Question 2.
What is BRS?
Answer:
A Bank Reconciliation Statement (BRS) is a Statement prepared by the depositor for the purpose of reconciling the cash book balance with the pass book balance on a certain date.

Question 3.
There are four levels of users in GNUKhata. Who are they?
Answer:

  1. Admin
  2. Manager
  3. Operator.
  4. IntemalAuditor.

Question 4.
Match the following
Group Name Sub-Group Name

Group NameSub-Group Name
(a) Fixed Assets(i) Sundry Creditors
(b) Current Liability(ii) Loans and Advances
(c) Investments(iii) Furniture
(d) Current Assets(iv) Fixed Bank Deposits

Answer:
(a)- (iii); (b) – (i); (c) – (iv); (d) – (ii)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 5.
List down the Income and Expenditure account groups in GNUKhata
Answer:

  • Direct Income
  • Direct Expenses
  • Indirect Income
  • Indirect Expenses

Question 6.
Identify the group and sub group under which the following ledger accounts are to be created.
(a) Depreciation
(b) Carriage inward
(c) Bills Receivable
(d) Drawings
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 1

Question 7.
List down any two features of GNUKhata.
Answer:

  1. It is free and open source accounting software.
  2. It is based on double entry book keeping.
  3. All financial reports can be prepared.
  4. Display of dual ledger facility.
  5. Attachment of source document to vouchers is possible.
  6. Linking of sales ad purchases tranactions to invoice.
  7. Export or import of data from spread sheet is possible.
  8. It ensures password security and data audit facility.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 8.
Define Groups and Sub Groups in GNUKhata.
Answer:
Grouping of account is a method of organising the large number of ledger accounts into sequential arrangement. GNUKhata has 29 predefined Groups and Sub Groups. Out of these, 13 are Groups and 16are Sub Groups.

Question 9.
What are the three buttons in Right side of the GNUKhata welcome screen?
Answer:

  1. Select Existing Organisation
  2. Create Organisation
  3. Language

Question 10.
What is the use of ‘Theme’ tab in GNUKhata Menu Bar?
Answer:
‘Theme’ tab is used to change the theme Background of the screen.

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are the specialities of system generated Ledger Accounts
Answer:

  1. GNUKhata has four system-generated ledger account.
  2. We cannot change the name of these accounts.
  3. We can not delete these accounts.

Question 2.
What are the limitations of GNUKhata?
Answer:

  1. Only trained employees can use GNUKhata.
  2. Updations and additions in GNUKhata Software may seriously affect the accounting system.

Question 3.
Mr. Roby prepared a chart for grouping the ledger account. Some errors are identified by his teacher. Help him to rectify the errors.

Ledger AccountGroup
(a) Office expensesDirect Expenses
(b) Carriage InwardDirect Expenses
(c) SalaryIndirect Expenses
(d) Sales TaxDirect Expenses
(e) PurchasesIndirect Expenses

Answer:

Ledger AccountGroup
(a) Office expensesIndirect Expenses
(b) Carriage InwardDirect Expenses
(c) SalaryIndirect Expenses
(d) Sales TaxIndirect Expenses
(e) PurchasesDirect Expenses

Question 4.
Three options are available to view Trail Balance. What are they?
Answer:

  1. Net Trial Balance
  2. Gross Trial Balance
  3. Extended Trial Balance

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 5.
Define the following
(a) Credit note voucher
(b) Journal voucher
(c) Sales voucher
Answer:

(a) Credit noteFor recording a reduction in the price charged to a customer. Function key: Ctrl + 3
(b) JournalFor recording rectifying entries, transfer entries, adjustment entries, purchase of fixed assets on credit and sale of fixed assets on credit.
Function key: F9
(c) SalesFor recording the return of goods by a customer
Function key: Ctrl + 1

Question 6.
Write the Debit and Credit for the following accounting Transactions
(a) Returned goods to Vinu Rs. 5000
(b) Price of goods sold to Mohan reduced by Rs. 500
(c) Vinu returned goods worth Rs. 3000
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 2

Question 7.
What is the importance of ‘Admin’ user in GNUKhata?
Answer:

  • Only one user can login as Admin
  • The creator of organisation is always considered as Admin User
  • The ‘Admin’ user can create the other users ‘Admin’ user

Question 8.
List down the major Sub Groups in the Group ‘Fixed Assets”?
Answer:

  • Building
  • Furniture
  • Land
  • Plant and Machinery

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 9.
Match the following
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 3
Answer:
(a) → ii → x
(b) → iii → y
(c) → i → z

Question 10.
Rearrange the diagram in the right way
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 4
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 5

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How to record the opening balance amount in opening Stock Account?
Answer:
stage 1:

  • Step 1 → Click on Master tab.
  • Step 2 → Select Edit account option from the drop down list.
  • Step 3 → Select Stock at the beginning from the edit account window.
  • Step 4 → Click on Edit Button.
  • Step 5 → Enter opening balance amount.
  • Step 6 → Click on Save button to save the amount.

Stage 2:

  • Step 1 → Click on Transaction tab.
  • Step 2 → Select Journal option to activate Journal Voucher.
  • Step 3 → Enter voucher number.
  • Step 4 → Enter opening date.
  • Step 5 → Select Opening stock a/c in Dr. Account and enter opening stock amount.
  • Step 6 → Select stock at the beginning a/c in the Cr. account and enter the opening stock amount.
  • Step 7 → Give narration.
  • Step 8 → Click on Save button or Press Enter key.

Question 2.
What are the reasons behind the difference in pass book balance and cash book balance.
(a) Cheques issued to suppliers, but not cleared
(b) Cheques deposited, but not honoured
(c) Accounts directly deposited by customers in bank account through electronic transfer
(d) Charges levied by the bank
(e) Interest on deposits credited by the bank
Answer:
S

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 3.
Give a brief explanation about Bank Reconciliation Statement in GNUKhata
Answer:

  1. Bank Reconciliation Statement is done to identify why there is difference between the two balances (Cash Book balance and pass book balance)
  2. The date of transaction is the Transaction Date
  3. The date on which a particular transaction appears in a Pass Book is called the Clearance Date.
  4. The period for which Bank Reconciliation is done is called Reconciliation Period.
  5. The reconciliation is done by comparing the Trans-action Date and Clearance Date.

Question 4.
GNUKhata provides the facility to view Single Ledger Account and Dual Ledger Account. Explain.
Answer:
GNUKhata provides the facility to view two ledger accounts simultaneously for comparing entries. We can view side by side:

  • Two different Ledger accounts for the same period.
  • Two different ledger accounts, each for different period.
  • Same ledger accounts for different periods.

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What do you mean by ‘Year End Activities’?
Answer:
Year End Activities consists of the following Year End Activities

  • Closing Ledger Accounts.
  • Opening Ledger Accounts for the next year.

(A) Closing of Accounts:
GNUKhata has a module to Close books at the click of a mouse, when this module is activated, balances in all expenses and incomes accounts are transferred to Profit and Loss/ Income & Expenditure account and the accounts are closed. After Close
books is done, transactions cannot be recorded but ledger accounts can be viewed.

(B) Opening Ledger Accounts for the next year:
GNUKhata has a module to Roll over ledger accounts at the click of a mouse. This module opens accounts for the next year automatically and since it is automatic, it is error free. When Roll over is done.

  • New organisation with the same name and type is created by GNUKhata for the next accounting year.
  • Assets and liabilities accounts automatically open under its respective Groups and Sub Groups with opening balances.
  • Expenses and income accounts are opened under their respective Groups and Sub Groups without opening balances
  • The closing stock gets transferred to the next year as opening stock.

This module can only be activated after close Books is done.

Question 2.
Write the steps in the preparation of final accounts by using GNUKhata.
Answer:

  • Step 1 – Creation of new organisation
  • Step 2 – Creation of Admin and Login
  • Step 3 – Creation of Sub Groups
  • Step 4 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
  • Step5 – Voucher Entry
  • Step 6 – Editing opening stock and Closing stock account
  • Step 7 – Display Ledger Accounts
  • Step 8 – Display Trial Balance
  • Step 9 – Display P & L Account
  • Step 10 – Display Balance Sheet

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 3.
What are the different vouchers in GNUKhata?
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 6
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Five mark q3 img 38

Question 4.
Write the Journal entry, voucher Type and Short cut keys of the following transactions.

    1. Cash purchases worth Rs. 10,000
    2. Sold goods to Akhil Rs. 6, 000
    3. Akhil returned goods worth Rs. 2,000
    4. Price of goods sold to Akhil reduced by Rs. 500
    5. Credit Purchases from Linjo Rs, 8,000
    6. Returned goods to Linjo Rs. 3,000
  1. Linjo reduced the price of goods sold to us by Rs. 1,000
  2. Cash received from Akhil Rs.3,000
  3. Cash paid to Linjo Rs. 4,000
  4. Cash sales ₹ 800

Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 7

Question 5.
Menu Bar has several Tabs. Can you list down a few of them? Also, mention the short cut keys and activities of such Tabs.
Answer:
Menubar has the following Tabs, The shortcuts for and the activities included in these Tabs are:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 8
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 9

Question 6.
Create an organisation with the following particulars.

  • Name: JOSHWIN ZIAN Enterprises
  • Accounting Year: 01-01-2018 to 31-12-2018
  • Type of organisation: Profit Making
  • Maintain Inventory: No
  • Records Admin Name and Password: Appu, Appose
  • Security Question & answer: Best friends name? Chikku
  • Address: 1234, M. C. Road, Velappaya, Tcr.

Answer:

  • Step1 – Start GNUKhata (Application → Office → GNUKhata)
  • Step 2 – Click on “Create Organisation”.
  • Step 3 – Enter Organisation Name (JOSHWIN ZIAN Enterprises), Press Enter/Tab
  • Step 4 – Select the case, Use down arrow key to select any one of the case and press Enter
  • Step 5 – Select organisation type – ‘Profit making’ and press Enter/Tab
  • Step 6 – Enter From date – 01-01-2018, Press Enter
  • Step 7- Skip the box of Inventory
  • Step 8 – Click on Proceed or Press Enter to open Create Admin window
  • Step 9 – Enter user Name – Appu, Password – Appose and Press Enter/ Tab
  • Step 10 – Enter security Question – “Best friends’s Name’, Press Enter/Tab
  • Step 11 – Enter Answer to security Question Chikku, Press Enter to Login as Admin
  • Step 12 – Select Edit organisation particulars from Master Menu
  • Step13 – Enter Organisation – 1234, MC Road, Velappaya, TCr, and Click on Save

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Practical Work Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Create an organisation with the following particulars

  • Name: TALLMEN WELFARE ASSOCIATION
  • Accounting year: 1-1-2018 to 31-12-2018
  • Type of organisation: Not for profit
  • Maintain Inventory Records: No
  • Admin Name & password: Visal, TCR2018
  • Security Question and Answer Mothers’maiden name? Meenakshy

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Procedure:
Step 1 – Start GNUKhata
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create New Organisation
Click on ‘Create Organisation’ Tab Enter the following informations.

  • Organisation Name: TALLMEN WELFARE ASSOCATION
  • Case: As-Is
  • Organisation type: Not for Profit
  • Financial year: 1-1 -2018 to 31-12-2018
  • Inventory: (Leave it blank)

Click on the Proceed button. Now the organisation is created

Step 3 – Create Admin and Login
Press Enter or Alt+Shift+P to Open Create Admin module.

  • User Name: Visal
  • Password: TCR2018
  • Confirm Password: Retype the password
  • Security Question: Mothers’ Maiden name
  • Answer to the security Question: Meenakshy

Press enter to Login as Admin

Step 4 – Select Edit organisation Particulars from Master Menu. Enter the address of the organisation. Press Enter key to save the details.
Output:

Question 2.
Create an organisation with the following particulars:

  • Name: Mahindra Enterprises
  • Accounting year: 1-04-2018 to 31-3-2019
  • Type of organisation: Profit-making
  • Maintain inventory Records: No
  • Admin Name & Password: Vinesh, Vinumon
  • Security Question & answer: Best friend’s name? Rohit
  • Address: 268, Poonkunnam, Thrissur

Procedure:
Step 1 – Start GNUKhata
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create New Organisation Click on ‘Create Organisation’ Tab
Enter the following informations.

  • Organisation Name: Mahindra Enterprises
  • Case: As-Is
  • Organisation Type: Profit Making
  • Financial year: 1-04-2018 to 31-3-2019
  • Inventory : (Leave it blank)

Click on the Proceed button, is created. Now the organisation

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Step 3 – Create Admin and Login
Press Enter or Alt+Shift+P to Open Create Admin module.

  • User Name: Vinesh
  • Password: Vinumon
  • Confirm Password: Retype the password
  • Security Question: Best friend’s name?
  • Answer to the security Question: Rohit

Press enter to log in as Admin

Step 4 – Select Edit organisation Particulars from Master Menu. Enter the address of the organisation
Press Enter key to save the details.
Output:

Question 3.
Create the following ledger accounts of Najim Traders
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 10
procedure:
Step 1 – Create a New Organisation ‘Najim Traders’- Profit Making with other imaginary data.

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master menu → Create Account
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 11

Step 3 – Create all the ledger accounts and save the details

Step 4 – Display ledger Accounts Report → Ledger view
OR
Display Trial Balance ReportTrial balance → (Select the type of Trial balance) → view
Output:

Question 4.
Create the following Ledger accounts of Anusree agencies.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 12
procedure:
Step 1 – Create New Organisation ‘Anusree Agencies’ – Profit Making with other imaginary data
Enter the following information.

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master Menu → Create Account
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 13
Question 5.
Record the following transactions in appropriate vouchers

  • 1/6/2018 – Riyas started a business with cash – Rs. 1,00,000
  • 2/6/2018 – Opened a bank account with Canara Bank – Rs. 30,000
  • 3/6/2018 – Bought furniture for cash – Rs.10,000
  • 4/6/2018 – Purchase goods from Niyastores – Rs,25,000
  • 5/6/2018 – Cash sales – Rs.12,500
  • 6/6/2018 – Paid for stationery – Rs. 500
  • 7/6/2018 – Cash paid to Niya stores – Rs. 20,000
  • 8/6/2018 – Cash withdraw from Canara bank – Rs.10,000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Procedure:
Step 1 – Create a New Organisation – Profit Making – with imaginary data

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master menu → Create Account
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 14
Step 3 – Create all the ledger accounts and save the details

Step 4 – Enter all the transactions in appropriate vouchers

  1. Select the appropriate voucher form Voucher menu
  2. Enter the Voucher Number and date
  3. Select the Debit account name and enter the amount, then press Enter
  4. Select the credit account name and enter the amount
  5. Enter narration and click on Save.

Output:

Question 6.
Enter the following transactions of Royal Enterprises and display Trial Balance
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 15
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Application Office GNUkhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation “Royal Enterprises – Profit making – with Imaginary data.

Step 3 – Create Admin
Enter the details (Imaginary)

Step 4 – Create appropriate Ledger Accounts
Master → Create account → Select Group → Sub Group → Type Account name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 16

Step 5 – Enter all transactions in appropriate vouchers
Voucher menu → (appropriate voucher) → Enter voucher number → Date → Select Debit account → enter debit amount → Press Enter → Select Credit Account → Enter credit amount → Press Enters → Enter narration → Click on Save

Step 6 – Display Trial balance Report → Trial Balance
Output:

Question 7.
From the following Trial Balance, Prepare Trading Profit and loss account and Balance sheet of Athulya Ltd. as on 31/3/2018
Trial Balance as on 1/4/2017
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 17
Transaction during the year 2017 – 18 is given below

  • Sales (Cash) – Rs. 51000
  • Sales (Credit) – Rs. 34000
  • Purchases (Credit) – Rs. 68000
  • Office expenses – Rs. 2400
  • Wages. – Rs. 1.600
  • Cash received from Debtors – Rs. 16,000
  • Cash paid to creditors – Rs. 35,000
  • Discount received – Rs. 1000
  • Salary – Rs. 5000
  • Rent – Rs. 11,000
  • Carriage Outward – Rs. 700
  • Commission Paid – Rs. 500
  • Insurance Premium – Rs. 4000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Other Adjustments:

  • Salalry Prepaid – Rs. 1500
  • Rent outstanding – Rs. 1000
  • Wages Outstnading – Rs. 800
  • Insurance Premium prepaid – Rs. 2000
  • Closing stock – Rs. 3700
  • Depreciation of Machinery – Rs. 10%

Procedure:
Step 1 – Create an organisation Athulya Ltd- Profit making for the year 1 -4-2017 to 31/3/2018 with imaginary data.

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master → Create account
Analysis Table (Trail Balance)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 18
Create all the ledger a/c under appropriate group and sub Group.

Step 3 – Voucher Entry
Enter all the transactions using appropriate voucher type
Voucher menu /Transaction menu → Select appropriate voucher type → Enter voucher number → Enter voucher Date → Enter Debit account and amount → Enter Credit account and amount → Save
Analysis Table (Transactions)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 19
Analysis Table (Transactions)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 20

Step 4 – Enter the value of opening stock and closing stock

  1. Master menu → Edit Account → Select Stock at the beginning a/c → Click Edit Button
  2. Enter 14000 as Opening Balance. Click on Save button
  3. Enter the values of Opening Stock and closing stock through appropriate voucher

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Voucher menu/Transaction menu → Journal
Analysis Table (Stock)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 21

Step 5 – Display Trial Balance
Report → Trial Balance → Enter Date → Type → Click on the View button

Step 6 – Display Profit and loss Account
Report → Profit and loss → Enter Date → Click on View Button

Step 7 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance sheet → Enter Date → Type → Click on View Button
Output:

Question 8.
Prepare a Bank Reconciliation Statement of Cili Traders, a Profit making organisation, for the period 1-1-2018 to 31-3-2018
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 22
While comparing with Cash book with Pass book, the following details were noted.

  1. Clearance date of cheque No.7125 was on 7/4/18
  2. Cheque No. 9614 cleared only on 2/4/2018
  3. Cheque No. 7127 is cleared on 1/4/18
  4. Clearance date of cheque No.4528 was on 12/2/18
  5. Cheque No. 7129 was cleared on 19/3/2018
  6. All other transaction’s clearance date is same as transaction date

procedure:
Step 1 – Start GNUKhata
Application → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Create an organisation → Cili Traders → Profit making → 1-1-18 to 31-12-2018 → Create admin with imaginary data.

Step 3 – Create Ledger accounts
Master Menu → Create Account → Select Group → SubGroup → Account Name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 23

Step 4 – Voucher Entry
Transaction/Voucher → Select appropriate voucher → Number → Date → DebitCredit → Save

Step 5 – Preparation of Bank Reconciliation Statement Press Alt +R

OR

  1. Master → Bank rEconciliation statement → Select Bank’s Name (Canara Bank) → Set Reconciliation period → Click on view button to view Bank reconciliation screen
  2. Enter clearance date → Click on View statement button
  3. To show the cleared Transactions, click on cleared items
  4. To show the uncleared transactions, click on uncleared items

Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 9.
Enter the following transactions of Sibi Traders and Display Final Accounts as on 31/3/2018
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 24
procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Application Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Click on Create organisation → Enter Details → Sibi Traders → Proft Making → 1-1-2018 to 31-12-2018

Step 3 – Create Admin
Enter imaginary data

Step 4 – Creation of Ledger accounts
Master Menu → Create account → Select Group → SubGroup → Type Account name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 25
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 26

Step 5 – Voucher Entry (based on above Analysis Table)
Transaction menu/Voucher menu → Select appropriate voucher → Enter voucher No → Date → Debit account and amount → Credit account and amount → Narration → Save

Step 6 – Display Trial balance
Report → Trial balance
Display Profits and loss Account
Report → Profits Loss account

Step 8 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance sheet
Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 10.
From the following transactions of Fijo and Joshy associates, prepare Trial Balance, Trading Profit, and Loss account and Balance Sheet.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 27
Adjustments

  1. Depreciation of Furniture Rs. 640
  2. Closing stock valued at Rs.2900

Procedure:
Step 1 – Create Organisation
Click on create Organisation Tab Enter the details
Fijo and Joshy Associates – Profit Making- 1/1/2018-31/12/2018. Enter all other details with imaginary data.

Step 2 – Create Ledger Account
Master → Create Account
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 28
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 29
Create all the above ledger accounts under appropriate Groups and Subgroups.

Step 3 – Voucher Entry
Enter the adjustment entries in appropriate voucher type
Voucher menu/Transaction menu → Select Voucher type → Number → Date → Debit & Credit → Save
Analysis Table (Adjustments)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 29
Step 4 – Display Trial Balance
Report → Trial Balance

Step 5 – Display Profit & Loss Account
Reports → Profit & Loss Account

Step 6 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance Sheet
Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 11.
Given below the Trial Balance of Akhil &Athulya associates as a 31/3/2018. Prepare Final Account for the year 2018-19
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 31
Other Information:

  1. Depreciation of Machinery-4500
  2. Rent outstanding-3000
  3. Building depreciated at 1.0%
  4. Salary Outstanding – 3500
  5. Value of closing stock -18000
  6. Value of Motor vehicle depreciated by 5%

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Click on Create Organisation tab. Enter the details
Akhil and Athulya Associates – Profit making 1-4-2018 to 31-3-2019.

Step 3 – Create Admin & Login Use imaginary data.

Step 4 – Creation of new subgroup
Here we need to create a new Sub Group Vehicles under the Group Fixed Assets. Master → Create Account → Select Group Fixed Assets → Select New Sub Group in Sub Group Name → Enter the new Sub Group Name ‘Vehicles’ → Enter the Account Name Motor Vehicles in that Sub Groups Enter the Opening Balance Rs. 1,50, 000 → Save.

Step 5 – Create Ledger Account
Master → Create Account
Analysis Table (Trial Balance)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 32
Create all the ledger accounts under ap¬propriate Groups and Sub Groups

Step 6 – Voucher Entry
Enter all adjustments in appropriate voucher type
Voucher menu/Transaction Menu → Select Voucher → Type → Number → Date Debit account and amount → Credit account and amount → Save.
Analysis Table (Adjustments)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 33

Step 7 – Enter the value of opening stock and closing stock

  1. Master Menu → Edit Account → Select stock at the beginning a/c → Click Edit button
  2. Enter 15000 as opening balances click on. Save button
  3. Enter the values of opening stock and closing stock through appropriate voucher

Voucher Menu/Transaction menu → Journal
Analysis Table (Stock)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 34

Step 8 – Display Trial Balance
Report → Trial Balance

Step 9 – Display profit and loss Account
Report → Profit & Loss

Step 10 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance Sheet
Output:

Question 12.
Enter the following transactions in appropriate vouchers of Jos & Rejina Enterprises and prepare Bank Reconciliation Statement
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 35
Verification of the Cash Book with Bank Pass Book revealed that the Cheque Nos. 8117, 8238 & 5314 were cahsed only on 3rd, 5th and 8th July respectively and the clearance date of all other transactions are same as transaction date.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Application → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Click on Create Organisation → Enter Name → Jos & Rejina Enterprises – Profit Making → (other imaginary data)

Step 3 – Create Admin – Enter the details (imaginary Data)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Step 4 – Create Ledger Account
Master → Create account → Select Group → Sub Group → Type Account name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 36
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 37
Step 5 – VoucherEntry
Transaction / Voucher → Select Appropriate → Enter details.

Step 6 – Preparation of Bank reconciliation statement Press Alt + R
OR

    1. Master → Bank Reconciliation statement → Select Bank’s Name (Union Bank) → Set Reconciliation period → Click on the View button to view Bank Reconciliation screen
    2. Enter clearance data Click on View Statement button
    3. To show the cleared Reconciliation click on cleared items
    4. To know the uncleared Transactions, Click on Uncleared items.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Students can Download Chapter 4 Web Technology Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Specify an attribute of HTML tag.
Answer:
DIR: Indicates documents direction. It can take values rtl or Itr.
Eg. <HTML DIR= “rtl”> This specify that document is to read from right to left.

Question 2.
Mention the default value of size attribute of <BASEFONT>tag.
Answer:
3.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 3.
Name the tag which has ‘Noshade’ attribute.
Answer:
<HR> Tag

Question 4.
Maximum possible value of the size attribute of the <BASEFONT>tag?
Answer:
7.

Question 5.
Salim developed a personal website. In which he has to create an e-mail link. Can you suggest the protocol used to achieve this task?
Answer:
Mailto:
Eg. <A href= “Mailto:[email protected]” >Mail to me</A>.

Question 6.
You want to connect your webpage to the web portal www.yahoo.com. Mention the tag that can be used for this.
Answer:
<A> Anchor Tag
Eg. <A href=”www.yahoo.com”>Yahoo</A>

Question 7.
Specify the main attribute of <IMG> tag used to include an image file in web page.
Answer:
SRC. It specify the name of the image file to be included in the page.
Eg. <IMG SRC=“C:/home,Jpg”>

Question 8.
Select the attribute associated with <IMG> tag from the following: (Name, size, Align, value)
Answer:
Align.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 9.
Write HTML code forgiving hyper link in webpage.
Answer:
<A HREF= “page2.htm”>Page2</A>

Question 10.
The default colour of Vlink is______.
(a) Blue
(b) Green
(c) Red
(d) Yellow
Answer:
(c) Red

Question 11.
The default colour of A link is______.
(a) Blue
(b) Green
(c) Red
(d) Yellow
Answer:
(b) Green

Question 12.
Saritha is assigned with a task of writing explana¬tory notes in an HTML code. Which tag she can utilize.
Answer:
Explanatory notes can be given using <comment> tag. Using two mark up elements. as<!—and →

Question 13.
Pick the odd man out.
(a) BODY
(b) HTML
(c) CENTER
(d) ALIGN
Answer:
(d) ALIGN, all others are tag.

Question 14.
Your school has a web site, www.myschool.org. You want to create a link to this site from your website. Write the code for implementing this.
Answer:
<A href=”www. myschool.org”>My School</A>

Question 15.
HTML was developed by_______.
Answer:
Tim Berners-Lee.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 16.
What are the two major sections of an HTML document?
Answer:
Head section and Body section.

Question 17.
An HTML file is saved with______extension.
(a) .vbp
(b) .mdb
(c) .htm
(d) .fnm
Answer:
(c) .htm or .html

Question 18.
The software used to view web page is______.
(a) Notepad
(b) Web Browser
(c) Web server
(d) Web Editor
Answer:
(b) Web Browser

Question 19.
The default alignment of image in HTML is______.
(a) Left
(b) Right
(c) Center
(d) Inline with content
Answer:
(a) Left

Question 20.
______is an alternative for centralizing a paragraph other than using <P> tag
(a) <ALIGN>
(b) <C>
(c) <CENTER>
(d) <CENTRE
Answer:
(d) <CENTER>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 21.
_______attribute of <A> tag specifies the URL of the hyper linked document.
(a) Name
(b) Target
(c) HREF
(d) SRC
Answer:
(c) HREF

Question 22.
What does HTML stands for?
Answer:
HyperText Markup Language.

Question 23.
Communication on web can be classified into_____and______.
Answer:
Client to Server and Server to Server

Question 24.
The protocol which is responsible for splitting the data into smaller packets is______.
Answer:
TCP

Question 25.
The protocol which is responsible for the routing of data packets through the correct destination is____.
Answer:
IP (Internet Protocol)

Question 26.
TCP / IP stands for_____.
Answer:
Transmission Control Protocol/lntemet Protocal.

Question 27.
Identify the protocol responsible fore-mail commu-nication.
(a) DNS
(b) HTTP
(c) TCP/IP
(d) SMTP
Answer:
(d) SMTP

Question 28.
In server to server communication, authentication is done with help of______.
(a) HTTP
(b) Digital certificate
(c) Client
(d) DNS
Answer:
(b) Digital certificate

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 29.
Which server acts between merchant server and bank server for transferring data in encrypted format?
Answer:
Payment Gateway.

Question 30.
Identify the name of a place where servers and networking systems are placed with high security,
(a) Head office
(b) DNS
(c) Data centre
(d) IIS
Answer:
(c) Data centre

Question 31.
Identify the port number which request for the service of sending e-mail communication.
(a) 22
(b) 25
(c) 53
(d) 80
Answer:
(b) 25

Question 32.
The IP address corresponding to a domain name is present in____server.
Answer:
DNS

Question 33.
Programs embedded in HTML documents are termed as____.
Answer:
Scripts

Question 34.
Running of ______scripts can be blocked by the user.
(a) Client side
(b) Server side
(c) Both client side and server side
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Client side

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 35.
A platform-independent server-side scripting language is_____.
Answer:
PHP

Question 36.
Which among the following tools is used for easy formatting and defining style of a document written in HTML?
(a) Ajax
(b) CSS
(c) JSP
(d) JavaScript
Answer:
(b) CSS

Question 37.
Pick the Odd one from the following list and give reason. (IMG, FONT, BR, ALIGN, PRE)
Answer:
ALIGN which is an attribute, all others are tags.

Question 38.
Choose the correct HTML statement to display an image with file name “kerala.jpg” as the background of the web page.
(a) <IMG src=”kerala.jpg”>
(b) <BODY src=”kerala.jpg”>
(c) <BODY bgcolor=”kerala.jpg”>
(d) <BODY background=”kerala.jpg”>
Answer:
(d) <BODYbackground=”kerala.jpg”>

Question 39.
Two ofthe following HTMLtags have same attribute Align’. Identify them. (<IMG>, <MARQUEE>, <B>, <P>, <BODY>)
Answer:
<IMG> AND <P>

Question 40.
Identify the correct HTML statement to draw a hori-zontal line with half the width of the screen.
(a) <HR width=“50%” size= “3″>
(b) <HR length=“50%” size= “3″>
(c) <HR size= “50%” width= “3″>
(d) <HR width= “50%” length= “3″>
Answer:
(a) <HR width=“50%” size= “3″>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 41.
A student wants to display a poem in a web page just like as he entered in the text editor. Which tag in HTML will help him?
Answer:
<PRE>tag

Question 42.
A student created a webpage about his school. The school name is displayed in the page. He wanted to change the style, colour, and size of the school name. Identify the most appropriate tag in HTML needed for that.
Answer:
<FONT> tag

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A student developed a web page about India. He wanted to display a scrolling text moving from right side to left side with a background colour blue. The text is “I Love My Country”.

  1. Identify the tag needed for it.
  2. Write the HTML statement to do the task.

Answer:

  1. <MARQUEE>
  2. <MARQUEE direction-’left” bgcolor=”blue” > I Love My country </MARQUEE>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Write HTML statement for displaying the following text items:

  1. A2B3
  2. A>B

Answer:

  1. A<SUB> 2 </SUB> B <SUP>3</SUP>
  2. A&gt;

Question 3.
Two HTML tags are given. They are <BODY> and <FONT>. Identify and write the attribute of each from the following list. (Size, Text, Link, Bgcolor, Color).
Answer:
The attributes of <BODY> tag are Text, Link and Bgcolor The attributes of <FONT> tag are size and color.

Question 4.
Write the use of Border and Aft attribute of <IMG> tag.
Answer:
Border: This attribute is used forgiving border to an image.

Alt: This attribute issued forgiving an alternate text. When there is no image in the specified location or the browser doesn’t support the image them this text will be displayed.

Question 5.
When a client send request to a server, the server must know which service is demanded by the client.

  1. How does the server identify the type of service requested?
  2. Write the name of any one of the services in the web server.

Answer:

  1. Port number
  2. Any service like FTP, SMTP, HTTP, etc.

Question 6.
Following are steps for searching the IP address of a domain name by a browser. Rearrange them in proper order.
(a) Look in the local memory of ISP
(b) Look in the DNS servers starting from the root server
(c) Look in the local memory of brower
(d) Look in the local memory of Operating System
Answer:
Correct order is c, d, a, b.

Question 7.
Categorise the following tags into Containertags and empty tags.
<B>, <BR>,<A> ,<FRAME>, <FRAMESET>,<LI>, <HR>
Answer:
1. Container tags:
<B>,<A> <FRAMESET>

2. Empty tags:
<BR>,<HR>,<LI>, <FRAME>.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 8.
Write the HTML statement to get the following output.

  1. Commerce
  2. Humanities

Answer:

  1. <B>Commerce</B>
  2. <l>Humanities</l>

Question 9.
Write the HTML statement to get the following output.

  1. H2S04
  2. a2 + b2
  3. Computer

Answer:

  1. H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub>
  2. a<sup>2</sup> + b <sup>2</sup>
  3. <b>Computer</b>

Question 10.
Write HTML code to display as follows. The <IMG> tag is used for placing images.
Answer:
The & lt IMG &gt tag is used for placing images.

Question 11.
Name some browsers.
Answer:

  1. Internet Explorer
  2. Netscape Navigator
  3. Opera
  4. Eudora

Question 12.
What is a website?
Answer:
A website is a collection of webpages. A webpage is created by using HTML tags.

Question 13.
What is the role of attributes in an HTML tag?
Answer:
Attributes are parameters for providing additional information within a tag. Attribute values specify certain characteristics of the tag.
Eg: <P align=”right”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 14.
What is an HTML?
Answer:
HTML stands for Hyper Text Markup Language. It is used to create webpages. It has two types of tags empty and container. The important thing we have to remember in container tag is first opened tag must be closed last.

Question 15.
Name the main attributes of <HR> tag.
Answer:

  1. Size: It specifies the line thickness.
  2. Width: It specifies the length
  3. Noshade: It specifies no shade is given for the line.
  4. Color: It specifies the color.

Question 16.
Mary wants to display her name in various headings. Name the heading tags available in HTML.
Answer:
Heading can be given in six levels from <H1> to <H6>.The tag <H1 > produces big heading. The tag <H6> produces small heading. The heading size reduce from <H1> to <H6> sequentially.

Question 17.
Differentiate between <FONT>and<BASEFONT>tags.
Answer:
<BASEFONT>tag sets the normal font for the entire document text. The font specified will be taken as the default font for the entire document. The main attributes are size, face, and color.

The <FONT> tag defines the font characteristics of the text enclosed. <Font> tag change the font property of the text enclosed within <Font> and</Font> whereas <BaseForrt> tag specifies the default font characteristics.

Question 18.
Explain the different types of hyperlinks.
Answer:
The two types of Hyper Links are

  1. External Hyper Link: This is used two connect the locations of two different web pages
  2. Internal Hyper Link: This is used to connect the different locations of the same web page.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 19.
Write the HTML code to display the following list:

  1. Form
  2. TextBox
  3. Label
  4. Command Button

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers 1

Question 20.
The body section forms the content displayed in the browser window. Briefly explain any four attributes in the BODY tag.
Answer:

  1. Bgcolor – It is used to set background colour.
  2. Background – It is used to set a background picture.
  3. Text – it is used to set the foreground colour.
  4. Left margin – It is used to set the left margin.

Question 21.
HTML has the facility to provide External links as well as Internal links.

  1. Which tag is used to include an External link?
  2. How will you construct an Internal link?

Answer:
1. Anchor Tag i.e. <a href=”filename”>

2. Internal link is used to link two places of the same web page
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers 2
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers 3

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 22.
Categorise the following tags in HTML and write the criterian for the categorisation.
<BR>, <P>, <BODY>, <B>, <HR>, <IMG>
Answer:

Empty_tagContainer tag
<BR><P>
<HR><BODY>
<IMG><B>

Question 23.
Differentiate empty tags and container tag with example.
Answer:
1. Empty tags: It has opening tag only, no closing tag
Eg: <hr>, <br> etc.

2. Container tag: It as both opening and closing tag.
Eg: <html> </html>
<body></body>etc.

Question 24.
Write True or False

  1. Text is an attribute of <BODY> tag to insert a text matter in the web page.
  2. <EM>tagfunctionssimilarto<l>tag.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True.

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write and explain any four text formatting tags in HTML.
Answer:
Text formatting tags are given below.

  1. <B> – This tag is based to make the text Bold Eg: <B> Computer application </B>
  2. <l>: This tag is used to make the text in italics eg: <l> computer aplication</l>
  3. <U>:This tag is used to underline the text eg: <U> computer aplication</U>
  4. <S>: This tag is used for striking out the text eg: <S> computer aplication</S>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Match the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 4
Answer:
Correct match as given below
<H2> -Heading-Align
<MARQUEE> – Scrolling text – Bgcolor
<IMG> – Inserting picture – Src.

Question 3.
Briefly explain the use of tags <Q>, <PRE> and <ADDRESS> tags.
Answer:

  • <Q>: It is used to give text within double-quotes.
  • <PRE>: This tag is used to display the content as we entered in the text editor.
  • <ADDRESS>: This tag is used to provide information of the author or owner.

Question 4.
Write a HTML code to develop a web page about Kerala state as shown below:

KERALA STATE
God’s Own Country
Capital: Thiruvananthapuram

The specifications for the page are:

  1. The main heading must be of bigger in size, centralised and bold.
  2. Sub headings must be lesser size than main heading and in italics.
  3. There should be a picture at the center of the page with file name“tree.jpg”.
  4. The background colour of the page must me blue.

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 5

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 5.
PHP is a popular scripting language.

  1. Write whether it is client side or server side.
  2. Write a brief note on PHP.

Answer:

  1. Server side
  2. PHP (PHP Hypertext Preprocessor)
    • It is an open-source, general-purpose scripting language.
    • It is a server side scripting language
    • Introduced by Rasmus Lendorf
    • A PHP file with extension .php
    • It support data base programming the default DBMS is MySQL
    • It is platform-independent
    • PHP interpreter in Linux is LAMP(Linux, Apache, MySQL, PHP)

Question 6.
How client side scripting differs from server side scripting?
Answer:
Following are the differences

Client Side ScriptingServer Side Scripting
Script is copied to client browserto the web server
Executed by the clientExecuted by the server and result is get back to the browser window
Used for Client level validationConnect to the database in the server
It is possible to block by the userCannot possible
Client side scripts depends the type and version of the browserIt does not depend the type and version of the browser

Question 7.
Briefly explain the two types of communication on the web.
Answer:
The two types of communication on the web are given below.
1. Client to Web server communication:
This communication is carried out between client to the web server (shopping site). The technology used to protect data that are transferred from client to web server is https.

2. Web sever to web server communication:
This communication is usually carried out between web .sever (seller) to another web server (normally bank). For the safe transaction. Digital certificate issued by third party web sites are used.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 8.
Compare static and dynamic web pages.
Answer:

Static web pagesDynamic web pages
Content and layout is fixedContent and layout is changed frequently
Never use databaseData base is used
Run by browserIt runs on the server and result get back to the client(browser)
Easy to developNot at all easy

Question 9.
Differentiate Empty tag and Containertag.
Answer:
There are two types of tags, opening tag, and closing tag

  • Empty tag: It has only opening tag and no closing tag
    Eg: <br>, <hr>,..
  • Container tag: It has both opening and closing tags. These tag contains some text data Eg:<html>,<head>,<body>,….

Question 10.
Create a webpage using HTML to display the following message. ‘The symbol H2O represents water’.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 6

Question 11.
While designing a webpage Neena wants to explain the meaning of each step. Can you help her?
Answer:
Neena can use Comments while writing the code. It is a good programming practice. Comments improve readability. It is not the part of a program. Comments
<!—and — >
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 7

Question 12.
Complete the following table.

RGB codeColour Name
#0000FF_________
________Yellow
#FF0000_________
#00FF00_________
________White
________Black

Answer:

RGB codeColour Name
#0000FFBlue
#FFFF00Yellow
#FF0000Red
#00FF00Green
#FFFFFFWhite
#000000Black

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 13.
Give HTML tag to display the sentence “WELCOME TO HTML” as centralized heading, having red colour.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 8

Question 14.
Explain the Main attributes of font tag.
Answer:
<FONT>tag defines the font properties of text enclosed
The main attributes are

  1. Face-This specifies the type of font.
  2. Color-This specifies the colour of the text enclosed
  3. Size- This specifies the font size

Eg. <FONT Face= “Arial” size = “3” color= “magenta”>

Question 15.
John visited a website, it is found that when clicking on a particular text the browser open a new web page. Name the feature and Identify the tag used for this purpose. Write the HTML code to link to a file name “main.html”.
Answer:

  1. Hyper Linking. By clicking on hypertext we can see or go to other webpages or to other section of same document.
  2. <A> tag is used
  3. <Ahref=”main.html”>Main</A>

Question 16.
Antony visited his school website, he could not see the picture of his school instead of that there is a text message “Your browser could not support images”. Why it is happened and write the html code for this.
Answer:
Because the browser he used cannot load the image. He can use Alt attribute of IMG Tag.
<IMG SRC =” D:\school.jpg” Alt=“Your browser could not support images”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 17.
Suppose you want to display a picture named school.jpg located in the ‘Photos’ sub directory of the directory ‘My documents’ of C drive in your web page.

  1. Name the tag used for this purpose.
  2. Write HTML code for the web page.

Answer:
1. <IMG>tag. It is used to display images in webpage

2. <HEAD><TITLE>
</HEAD>
<Body>
<IMG SRC= ‘C;/My documents/Photos/School.jpg’>
</Body>
<html>

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain the main list tags in HTML?
Answer:
HTML provides three basic types of lists-unordered, ordered and definition list.
1. Unordered list:
Unordered list arranges the list items with bullet symbols in front. <UL> and </UL> tag encloses an Unondered list. List items are specified by <LI> tag. The tag <UL> can take values square, circle or disc. The default type is disc.
Eg : <UL>
<LI>COMPUTER
<LI>BIOLOGY
</UL>

2. Ordered list:
In Ordered list, the list items are numbered in sequence. <OL> and </OL> tag encloses an Or-dered list. List items are specified by <LI> tag. The tag <OL> can take values as follows

  • type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,….
  • type = i for i, ii, iii,……
  • type = I for I, II, III,……
  • type = a for a, b, c,…
  • type = A for A, B, C,…..

Eg :<OL>
<LI>COMPUTER
<LI>BIOLOGY
</OL>

3. Definition List:
It is formed by a group of definitions and their descriptions. No bullet symbol or number is provided for the list items. The <DL> and </DL> tags enclose the definition list. The <DT> tag contains the definition term and <DD> tag specifies the description.
Eg: <DL>
<DT>Eeheque
<DD>Electronic cheque
</DL>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Explain the use of <BODY> tag and list any four of its attributes
Answer:
Web page contents are given int the body section. Attributes of body tag are:

  1. BGCOLOR-Specifies background color for the document Body
    Eg. <BODY BGCOLOR= “RED”>
  2. BACKGROUND -Sets the image as background for the document body
    Eg. <BODY BACKGROUNG= “C:\result.jpg”>
  3. TEXT-Specifies the color of the text content of the page
    Eg. <BODYTEXT= “Red”>
  4. LINK- Specifies colour of the hyperlinks that are not visited by the user
  5. ALINK-Specifies the colour of hyperlinks
  6. VLINK-Specifies the color of hyperlinks which are already visited by the viewer.
    Eg. < BODY ALINK= “Cyan” LINK=” Magenta” VLINK= “Orange’’> *
  7. Left margin and Right margin-Sets margin from left and top of the document window.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Students can Download Chapter 3 Functions Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Plus Two Computer Application Functions One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
To read a single character for gender i.e. ’rri’ or ’f’.___function is used.
(a) getch()
(b) getchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getline()
Answer:
(b) getchar()

Question 2.
To use getchar(), putchar(), gets() and puts(), which header file is used?
(a) iostream
(b) cstdio
(c) input
(d) output
Answer:
(b) cstdio

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 3.
To use cin and cout, which header file is needed?
(a) iostream
(b) cstdio
(c) input
(d) output
Answer:
(a) iostrem

Question 4.
Predict the output of the following code snippet
#include<cstdio>
int main()
{
char name[ ] = “ADELINE”;
for(int i=0; name[i]!=’\0′;i++)
putchar(name[i]);
}
Answer:
The output is “ADELINE”.

Question 5.
From the following which is equivalent to the function getc(stdin)
(a) putchar()
(b) gets()
(c) getchar()
(d) puts()
Answer:
(c) getchar()

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 6.
From the following which is equivalent to the function putc(ch,stdout)
(a) putchar(ch)
(b) ch=gets()
(c) ch=getchar()
(d) puts(ch)
Answer:
(a) putchar(ch)

Question 7.
To print a single character at a time which function is used?
(a) puts()
(b) putchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(b) putchar()

Question 8.
To read a string____function is used.
(?) puts()
(b) putchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(b) gets()

Question 9.
To print a string_____function is used.
(a) puts()
(b) putchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(b) puts()

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 10.
Consider the following code snippet
main()
{
char str[80];
gets(str);
for(int i=0,len=0;str[i]!-\0′;i++,len++);
cout<<“The length of the string is” <<len;
getch();
}
Select the equivalent for the under lined statement from the following
(a) int len= strlen(str)
(b) int len=strcmp(str)
(c) int len = strcount(str)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) int len= strlen(str)

Question 11.
Arjun wants to read a string with spaces from the following which is suitable
(a) cin>>
(b) cin.getline(str,80)
(c) str=getc(stdin)
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) cin.getline(str,80)

Question 12.
State whether the following statement is true or false. The'<<‘ insertion operator stops reading a string when it encounters a space.
Answer:
True.

Question 13.
The process of dividing big programs into small programs are called____.
Answer:
Modularization.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 14.
The big programs are divided into smaller programs. This smaller programs are called_____.
Answer:
Functions.

Question 15.
The execution of the program begins at____function.
Answer:
main function.

Question 16.
One of the following is not involved in the creation and usage of a user defined function
(a) Define a function
(b) Declare a function
(c) invoke a function
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 17.
The default data type returned by a function is_____.
(a) float
(b) double
(c) int
(d) char
Answer:
(c) int

Question 18.
After the execution of a function, it is returned back to the main function by executing____keyword.
Answer:
return.

Question 19.
Supplying data to a function from the called function by using______.
Answer:
parameters (arguments).

Question 20.
_____keyword is used to give a value back to the called function.
Answer:
return.

Question 21.
____key word is used to specify a function returns nothing.
Answer:
void

Question 22.
One of the following is not necessary in the function declaration. What is it?
(a) name of the function
(b) return type
(c) number and type of arguments
(d) name of the parameters
Answer:
(d) name of the parameters.

Question 23.
A function declaration is also called_____.
Answer:
prototype.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 24.
Considerthe following declaration
int sum(int a , int b)
{
return a+b;
}
From the following which is the valid function call.
(a) n=sum(10)
(b) n=sum(10, 20)
(c) n=sum(10, 20, 30)
(d) n=sum()
Answer:
(b) n=sum(10, 20)

Question 25.
The ability to access a variable or a function from some where in a program is called_____.
Answer:
scope.

Question 26.
A variable ora function declared within a function is have_____scope.
Answer:
local.

Question 27.
A variable or a function declared out side of all the functions is have_____scope.
Answer:
global.

Question 28.
State True/False

  1. A local variable exist till the end of the program
  2. A global variable destroyed when the sub function terminates

Answer:

  1. False
  2. False

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 29.
consider the following declaration
int x;
int main()
{

}
Here x is a____variable.
Answer:
global.

Question 30.
consider the following declaration
int main()
{
int x;

}
Here x is a_____variable.
Answer:
local.

Question 31.
______parameter is used when the function call does not supply a value for parameters.
Answer:
default.

Question 32.
Consider the following function declaration with optional (default) arguments and state legal or illegal and give the reasons

  1. int sum(int x=10, int y, int z)
  2. int sum(int x=10, int y=20, int z)
  3. int sum(int x=10, int y=20, int z=30)
  4. int sum(int x, int y=20, int z)
  5. int sum(int x, int y=20, int z=30)
  6. int sum(int x, int y, int z=30)
  7. int sum(int x=10, int y, int z=30)

Answer:
There is a rule to make an argument as default argument,i.e., to set an argument with a value that must be in the order from right to left. All the arguments in the right side of an argument must be set first to make an argument as a default argument.

  1. illegal, because y and z are not have values
  2. illegal, because z has no value
  3. legal
  4. illegal, because z has no value
  5. legal
  6. legal
  7. illegal, because x has a value but y has no value.

Question 33.
The parameter used to call a function is called_____.
Answer:
actual parameter.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 34.
The parameters appear in a function definition are_____.
Answer:
formal parameters.

Question 35.
After the distribution of answer scripts, the teacher gives the Photostat copy of the mark list to the students to check the marks. If the students make any change that do not affect the original mark list. There is a similar situation to pass the arguments to a function. What is this method?
(a) call by value
(b) call by reference
(c) call by address
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) call by value

Question 36.
Your class teacher gives you the original mark list to check the mark. If you make any change it will affect the original mark list. There is a similar situation to pass the arguments to a function. What is this method?
(a) call by value
(b) call by reference
(c) call by function
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) call by reference

Question 37.
Consider the following function declaration
int sum(int a, int b)
{
Body
}
Here the arguments are passed by______.
Answer:
call by value method.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 38.
Consider the following function declaration
int sum(int &a, int &b)
{
Body
}
Here the arguments are passed by______.
Answer:
call by reference method.

Qn. 39
A function calls it self is known as______
Answer:
recursive function.

Question 40.
Varun wants to copy a string by using strcpy() function. From the following which header file is used for this?
(a) cstdio
(b) cmath
(c) cstring
(d) cctype
Answer:
(c) cstring

Question 41.
____is a named group of statements to perform a job /task and returns a value.
Answer:
Function.

Question 42.
To use the function setw(), from the following which header file is used.
Answer:
iomanip.h

Question 43.
In his C++ program Ajith wants to accept a lengthy text of more than one line. Which function in C++ can be used in this situation.
Answer:
gets() function can be used to accept a lengthy text.

Question 44.
Choose the C++ function which can print a string.
(a) getche()
(b) putchar()
(c) getline()
(d) puts()
Answer:
(d) puts()

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 45.
Which of the following is a console function?
(a) getline()
(b) write()
(c) put()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(d) getchar()

Question 46.
Pick the odd one out and give reason.
(a) abs()
(b) strlen()
(c) strcmp()
(d) strcpy()
Answer:
(a) abs() – it is a mathematical function. All others are string functions.

Question 47.
Consider the following C++ statement and answer the following question:
char Word[10]=”GOOD DAY”;
Identify the correct output statement to display the string
(a) write (word);
(b) cout.write(word);
(c) cout (word);
(d) cout.write (word, 10);
Answer:
(d) cout.write(wond, 10);

Question 48.
When the number -7 is given as the argument of a predefined function in C++, it returns the value 7. Identify the function.
Answer:
abs(): This function returns the absolute value.

Question 49.
Pick out the correct statement for prototype declaration from the following and also explain the various information it contains.
(a) product (int a, int b);
(b) int product (a,b);
(c) int product (int, int);
(d) product (int, int);
Answer:
(c) int product(int, int);
This prototype specifies the return type, name of function, number, and type of arguments.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 50.
One among the following function prototypes is wrongly written. Identify it. Also given reason.
(a) float test (float);
(b) float test (float, int);
(c) test (float);
(d) int test (int);
Answer:
(c) test(float);
Here the prototype contains no return type.

Question 51.
A user defined function definition is given below. Choose the most appropriate function call statement from the options.
float calc(int x, float y)
{
return (x+y) / 2.0;
}
(a) calc (2, 4)
(b) calc (2.5, 4)
(c) calc (2.5, 4.5)
(d) calc (2, 4.5)
Answer:
(d) calc(2, 4.5);

Question 52.
Which of the following statements are FALSE about a local function?
(a) Declared inside a function
(b) Accessible only within the function it is declared
(c) Accessible from anywhere in the program
(d) Declared outside all other functions
Answer:
c and d are false to a local function.

Plus Two Computer Application Functions Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In a C++ program, you forgot to include the header file iostream.h. What are the possible errors occur in that Program? Explain ?
Answer:
Proto type error. To use cin and cout the header file iostream is a must.

Question 2.
Pick the odd one out from the following and give reason.

  • gets()
  • getline()
  • getch()
  • getchar()

Answer:
getline() – It is a stream function where as the others are console functions.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 3.
Consider the following code snippet.
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int n;
cout<<“Enter a number”; cin>>n;
cout<<‘The number is “<<n;
}
Write down the names of the header files that must be included in this program
Answer:
Here cin and cout are used so the header file iostream must be included.

Question 4.
How does C++ support modularity in programming
Answer:
The process of converting big programs into smaller programs is known as modularisation. This small programs are called modules or sub programs or functions. C++ supports modularity in programming called functions.

Question 5.
The following assignment statement will generate a compilation error.
char str[20]; str=”Computer”
Write a correct C++ statement to perform the same task
Answer:
char str[20] = “Computer”;

OR

char str[20];
strcpy(str,”Computer”); (The header file should be included).

Question 6.
float area(const float pi=3.1415, const float r)
{
r=10;
return pi*r;
}
Is there any problem? If yes what is it?
Answer:
There is an error. The error is , Y is a constant T must be initialised and cannot be changed during execution.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 7.
What are the jobs of a return statement in a program.
Answer:
In the case of a sub function a return statement helps to terminate the sub function and return back to the main function or called function. But in the case of a main function it terminates the program.

Question 8.
Match the following

(a) strcmp()(1) cctype
(b) tolower()(2) cstring
(c) sqrt()(3) cstdlib
(d) abort ()(4) cmath

Answer:
(a) 2
(b) 1
(c) 4
(d) 3

Question 9.
How to invoke a function in C++ program.
Answer:
A function can be called or invoked by providing the name of the function followed by the arguments in parenthesis Eg. sum(m,n);

Question 10.
Briefly explain constant arguments Constant arguments.
Answer:
By using the key word const we can make argument (parameter) of a function as a constant argument.
The value of the const argument cannot be modified within the function.

Question 11.
void initialise()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 1

  1. Identify the error in the, above code and explain its reasons.
  2. Correct the errors.

Answer:

  1. K is a local variable in the function initialize() – It is not accessible in main()
  2. Making the variable K as global we can correct the error.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 12.
List down the advantages of modular programming.
Answer:
Merits of modular programming

  • It reduces the size of the program
  • Less chance of error occurrence
  • Reduces programming complexity
  • Improves reusability

Question 13.
Some statements are given below. Analyse these statements and predict the output:
char str1 (15], str2[15];
str1[15]=” DATA”;
str2[15]=” STORAGE”;
strcat (str2, str1);
cout<<str2;
Answer:
The output is STORAGE DATA. The strings str2 and str1 are concatenated.

Question 14.
If char name [ ] = “Rajeev Kumar”; then what will be output of the following statement? cout<<strlen(name);
Answer:
The length(number of characters) is 12 including space.

Question 15.
Choose the value of ‘n’ after executing the following statements in C++.
char s1[ ]=”KIRAN”; char s2[ ]=”kiran”;
int n = strcmp (s1,s2);
cout<<n;
(a) 0
(b) >0
(c) <0
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) <0. Here string 2, i.e. s2 is greaterthan string1 i.e. s1.
strcmp()- It is used to compare two strings and returns an integer.
Syntax: strcmp(string1 ,string2)

  • if it is 0 both strings are equal.
  • if it is greater than 0(i.e. +ve) string1 is greater than string2
  • if it is less than 0(i.e. -ve) string2 is greater than string1

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 16.
C++ has a built-in function with which we get the result of 42.

  1. Identify the name of the function.
  2. Identify the header file for the above function.

Answer:

  1. pow(4, 2);
  2. The header file used is cmath.

Question 17.
Consider the following C++ statements and predict the output.
int p=isalpha(‘5’);
cout<<p;
Answer:
0.
isalpha() – To check whether a character is an alphabet or not. If the character is an alphabet it returns a value 1 otherwise it returns 0.

Question 18.
Predict the output of the following C++ statements:

  1. cout<<toupper(‘a’);
  2. cout<<(char) toupper(‘a’);

Answer:

  1. It prints 65
  2. It prints A

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 19.
Differentiate formal arguments and actual arguments.
Answer:
The parameter used to call a function is called actual parameter. The parameters appear in a function definition are formal parameters.

Plus Two Computer Application Functions Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Suresh wants to print his name and native place using a C++ program. The program should accept name and native place first
Name is: Suresh Kumar
Address is: Alappuzha
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 2

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 2.
“Programming is Fun”. Write a C++ program to read a string like this in lowercase and print it in UPPER CASE. Without using toupper() library function.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 3
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 4

Question 3.
An assignment, Kumar has written a C++ program which reads a line of text and print the number of vowels in it. What will be his program code?
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cctype>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 5

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 4.
Write a program to display the following output
A
BB
CCC
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 6

Question 5.
Distinguish getchar and gets.
Answer:
getchar is a character function but gets is a string function. The header file cstdio must be included. It reads a character from the keyboard.
Eg.
char ch;
ch=getchar();
cout<<ch;
gets is used to read a string from the key board. It reads the characters upto enter key. The header file
cstdio must be included.
char str[80];
cout<<” Enter a string”;
gets(str);

Question 6.
Write a program to check whether a string is palindrome or not. (A string is said to be palindrome if it is the same as the string constituted by reversing the characters of the original string. Eg. “MALAYALAM”, “MADAM”, “ARORA”, “DAD”, etc.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 7

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 7.
Explain multi character function.
Answer:
getline() and write() functions are multi character functions.
1. getline():
It reads a line of text that ends with a newline character. It reads white spaces also.
Eg.
char line[80];
cin.getline(line,80);

2. write():
It is used to display a string.
Eg.
charline[80];
dn.getline(line, 80);
cout.write(line, 80);

Question 8.
Distinguish between get() and put() functions.
Answer:
1. get() function:
get() is an input function. It is used to read a single character and it does not ignore the white spaces and newline character.
Syntax is cin.get(variable);
Eg. char ch;
cin.get(ch);

2. put() function:
put() is an output function. It is used to print a character.
Syntax is cout.put(variable);
Eg. char ch;
cin.get(ch);
cout.put(ch);

Question 9.
Write a program to read a string and print the number of consonents
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cctype>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 8

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 10.
Write a program to read a string and print the num¬ber of spaces.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 9
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 10

Question 11.
Write a program to count the number of words in a sentence
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 11

Question 12.
Write a program to input a string and display its reversed string using console I / O functions only. For example if the input is “AND” the output should be “DNA”.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 12

Question 13.
Write a program to input a word(say COMPUTER) and create a triangle as follows.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 13
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstring>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 14

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 14.
Write a program to input a line of text and display the first characters of each word. Use only console I /O functions. For example, if the input is “Save Water, Save Nature”, the output should be “SWSN”.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 15

Question 15.
Consider the following code snippet
char ch;
cout<< “Enter an alphabet”; cin>>ch;
cout<<toupper(ch);
What is the output of the above code? Give a sample output. If the above code is used in a computer that has no cctype file, how will you modify the code to get the same output?
Answer:
It reads a character and convert it into uppercase.
Eg:
Enter an alphabet: a
The output is A.
If a computer has no cctype header file the code is as follows.
char ch;
cout<< “Enter an alphabet”; cin>>ch;
if (ch>=97 && ch<<122)
cout<

Question 16.
Read the following program
# include<iostream.h>
int main()
{
cout<<sum(2, 3);
}
int sum(int x, int y)
{return (x + y);}
On compilation on the program, an error will be dis-played. Identify and explain the reason. How can you rectify the problem
Answer:
The compilation of the program starts from the first line and next line and so on( i.e. line by line). While compiling the line cout<<sum(2, 3); The compiler does not understand the word sum(2, 3) because it is not declared yet hence the error prototype required. To rectify this problem there are two methods
First method
Give the function definition just before the main function as follows.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int sum(int x, int y)
{return (x+y);}
int main()
{
cout<<sum(2, 3);
}

Second Method
Give the function declaration(prototype only) in the main function as follows.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int sum(int, int);
cout<<sum(2, 3);
}
int sum(int x, int y)
{return (x+y);}

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 17.
Considering the following function definition;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 16
The expected, desired output is 5! = 120
What will be the actual output of the program? It is not the same as above, why? What modification are required in the program to get the desired output.
Answer:
The output is 0! = 120
Because the address of variable ‘a’ is given to the variable ‘n’ of the function fact(call by reference method). So the function changes its value (i.e. n- -) to 0. Hence the result.

To get the desired result call the function as call by value method in this method the copy of the value of the variable ‘a’ is given to the function. So the actual value of ‘a’ will not changed. So instead of int fact(int &n) just write int fact(int n), i.e., no need of & symbol.

Question 18.
A function is defined as follows
int sum (int a, int b=2)
{return (a+b);}
Check whether each of the following function calls is correct or wrong, Justify your answer

  1. cout<<sum(2, 3);
  2. cout<<sum( 2);
  3. cout<<sum();

Answer:
Here the function is declared with one optional argument. So the function call with minimum one argument is compulsory.

  1. 0 It is valid. Here a becomes 2 and b becomes 3.
  2. It is also valid . Here a becomes 2 and b takes the default value 2.
  3. It is not a valid call. One argument is compulsory.

Question 19.
How do two functions exchange data between them? Compare the two methods of data transfer from calling function to called function.
Answer:
There are two methods they are call by value and call by reference
1. call by value:
In call by value method, a copy of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will not affect the original value.

2. call by reference:
In call by reference method, the reference of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will affect the original value.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 20.
Write down the operation performed by the following statements

  1. int l=strten(“Computer Program”);
  2. charch [] = tolower(“My School”);
  3. cout<<(strcmp(“High”, “Low”)>0 ?

toupper(“High”):tolower(“Low”));
Answer:

  1. The built in function strlen find the length of the string i.e. 16 and assigns it to the variable I.
  2. This is an error because tolower is a character function.
  3. This is also an error because tolower and toupper are character functions.

Question 21.
A line of given length with a particular character is to be displayed. For example, ********** is a line with ten asterisks (*). Define a function to achieve this output
Answer:
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
void line (char ch, int n)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 17

Question 22.
Read the following function
int fib(int n)
{
if (n<3)
return 1;
else
return (fib(n-1) + fib(n-2));
}

  1. What is the speciality of this function
  2. How does it work ?
  3. What will be the output of the following code?

for (int i=1; i<5; i++)
cout<<fib(i)<<‘\t’;
Answer:
1. This function is a recursive function. That means the function calls itself.

2. It works as follows
if i = 1, The function fib calls with value 1. i.e. fib(1) returns 1
if i = 2, The function fib calls with value 2. i.e. fib(2) returns 1
if i = 3, The function fib calls with value 3. i.e. fib(3) returns fib(2) + fib(1) i.e. it calls the function again. So the result is 1 + 1 = 2
if i = 4, The function fib calls with value 4. i.e. fib(4) returns fib(3) + fib(2) i.e. it calls the function again. So the result is 2 + 1 = 3

3. The output will be as follows
1 1 2 3.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 23.
Explain scope rules of functions and variables in a C++ program
Answer:
1. Local variable or function:
A variable or function declared inside a function is called local variable or function. This cannot be accessed by the outside of the function.
Eg.
main()
{
int k;//local variable ,
cout<<sum(a,b); // local function
}

2. Global variable or function:
A variable or function declared out side of a function is called global variable or function. This can be accessed by any statements.
Eg.
int k; // global variable
int sum(inta, int b); //global function
main()
{
}

Question 24.
Briefly explain default arguments.
Answer:
A default value can be set for a parameter(argument) of a function. When the user does not give a value the function will take the default value. An important thing remember is an argument cannot have a default value unless all arguments on its right side must have default value.

Functions with valid default arguments are given below

  • float area(int x, int y, int z=30);
  • float area(int x, int y=20, int z=30);
  • float area(int x=10, int y=20, int z=30);

Functions with invalid default arguments are given below

  • float area(int x=10, int y, int z);
  • float area(intx, inty=20, int z);
  • float area(int x=10, int y=20, int z);

Question 25.
Write a program to read a character and check whether it is alphabet or not. If it is an alphabet check whether it is upper case or lower case?
Answer:
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 18

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 26.
Write a program to read 2 strings and join them
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 19

Question 27.
Write a program to read 2 strings and compare it.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cstring>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 20

Question 28.
Write a program to read a string and display the number of alphabets and digits and special characters.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 21
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 22

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 29.
A. void change(int&);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 23
B. void change(int);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 24

  1. Predict the output of both programs.
  2. Justify your predictions.

Answer:
1. A. Output
value = 40
B. output
value = 0

2. In the first case (A) the argument x is passed by reference method. So the changes made in the function reflects in main()

In the second case (B) the argument x is passed by value method. So the changes made in the function will not reflect in main().

Question 30.
Write a program to read 2 strings and join them using string function
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstring>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 25

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 31.
Differentiate the outputs of the folloiwng C++ statements and also give reason

  1. cout< <strcmp(“world”, “WORLD”);
  2. cout<<strcmpi(“world”, “WORLD”);

Answer:

  1. >0 Here first string “world” is greater than “WORLD”.
  2. It prints 0. Because strcmpi is same as strcmp() but it is not case sensitive. That means uppercase and lowercase are treated as same.

Question 32.
Match the following.

1. strcmp()a. To combine two strings
2. strcpy ()b. To get 5 from 25
3. strcat ()c. To get 10 from -10
4. sqrt ()d. To change a to A
5. abs()e. To compare two strings
6. toupper()f. To copy one string another

Answer:
1-e, 2-f, 3-a, 4-b, 5-c, 6-d.

Question 33.
Write a C++ program to find the sum of first ‘N’ natural numbers using a user defined function.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int sum(int n)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 26

Question 34.
Write the need for function prototype in a C++ program.
Answer:
When the function is defined after the main function then there is an error called “function should have a prototype”. This is because of the function is defined after the main function. To resolve this a prototype should be declared inside the main function.

Question 35.
Write suitable function prototype after reading the following cases.

  • Case I : The function Volume() takes two arguments, one is float the other is int and it returns its volume.
  • Case II : A function Big() has no arguments and no return type.
  • Case III: A function PrintO takes two floating point type arguments and nothing is returned.

Answer:

  • Case I: float Volume(float,int);
  • Case II: void BigO; or void Big(void);
  • Case III : void Print(float,float) or void Print(double,double);

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 36.
Find the error in the following C++ program and rectify it.
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main ()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 27
Answer:
Error 1: Here function prototype is missing.
Error 2: no need for variable z.
Error 3: no need of the statement z = x*y;
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int multi(int, int);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 28

Question 37.
Consider the following function definition.
int add (int a, int b=2, int c=5)
{
int s = a + b + c;
cout<<“Sum is :”<<s;
}
Predict the output of the above code forthe following function calls:

  1. add (5, 8, 10);
  2. add (5, 8);
  3. add (5);

Answer:

  1. add(5, 8, 10). Here a = 5, b = 8 and c = 10. Then It prints 23(5 + 8 + 10)
  2. add(5, 8). Here a = 5, b = 8 and no value for c then c will take the default value 5. Hence it prints 18(5 + 8 + 5(default value for c)).
  3. add(5). Here a = 5 and no values for b and c, then b and c will take the default values 2 and 5 respectively. Hence it prints 12(5 + 2 + 5(default values for b and c)).

Question 38.
Consider the following C++ program, predict the output and justify it.
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
intsqr(int&);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 29
Answer:
The output are 25 and 6. Here the function uses call by reference method. The function call sqr(a) passes the original value to the function sqr. The function changes the value of b(here a and b are same) to 6. That means a also becomes 6.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 39.
Differentiate local variable and global variable in C++ program.
Answer:
1. Local scope:
A variable declared inside a block can be used only in the block. It cannot be used any other block.
Eg: int sum(int n1,int n2)
{
int s;
s=n1+n2;
return(s);
}
Here the variable s is declared inside the function sum and has local scope;

2. Global scope:
A variable declared outside of all blocks can be used anywhere in the program.
Eg:
int s;
intsum(int n1,int n2)
{
s=n1+n2;
return(s);
}
Here the variable s is declared out side of all functions and we can use variable s any where in the program.

Question 40.
Consider the following C++ code fragment and identify the local function and global function. Also justify your selection.
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 30
Answer:
Here the function print() is declared inside a function hence it is a local function but the function sum() is declared outside of all functions hence it is called global function.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 41.
Read the following C++ program and identify the error and give reason.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
void disp(int);
int main()
int x=10; disp (x); return 0;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 31
Answer:
The variable ‘x’ will not be printed because it is declared in the main() function. That is x is a local variable.

Plus Two Computer Application Functions Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What will be the output of the following code if the userenterthe value “GOOD MORNING”

  1. char String [80];
    gets(string);
    cout<<string;
  2. char String [80]; cin>>string;
    cout<<string;
  3. char ch;
    ch=getchar();
    cout<<ch;
  4. char String [80];
    cin.getline(string,9);
    cout<<string;

Answer:

  1. GOOD MORNING
  2. GOOD
  3. G
  4. GOOD MORN

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 2.
Read a string and print the number of vowels.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cctype>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 32

Question 3.
Describe in detail about the unformatted console i/o functions.
Answer:

  1. Single character functions: This function is used to read or print a character at a time.
    • getchar(): It reads a character from the keyboard and store it in a character variable.
      Eg. char ch;
      ch=getchar();
    • putchar(): This function is used to print a character on the screen.
      Eg. char ch;
      ch=getcharO;
      putchar(ch);
  2. String functions: This function is used to read or print a string.
    • gets(): This function is used to read a string from the keyboard and store it in a character variable.
      Eg. char str[80];
      gets(str);
    • puts(): This function is used to display a string on the screen.
      Eg. char str[80];
      gets(str);
      puts(str);

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 4.
Write a program to input a string and find the number of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, special characters, and white spaces.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 33
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 34

Question 5.
Write a program to input a string and replace all lowercase vowels by the corresponding uppercase letters.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 35
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 36

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 6.
A list of C++ built in functions are given. Classify them based on the usage and prepare a table with proper group names.

  • strcmp()
  • sin()
  • getch()
  • isalpha()
  • pow()
  • puts()
  • strcat()
  • tolower()
  • getchar()
  • isalnum()
  • sqrt()
  • exp()
  • write()

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 37

Question 7.
The factorial of a number, say N is the product of first N natural numbers. Thus, factorial of 5 can be obtained by taking the product of 5 and factorial of 4. Similarly factorial of 4 be found out by taking the product of 4 and factorial of 3. At last the factorial of 1 is 1 itself. Which technique is applicable to find the factorial of a number in this fashion? Write a C++ function to implement this technique. Also explain the working of the function by giving the number 5 as input.
Answer:
A function calls itself is known as recursion.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int fac(int);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 38
The working of this program is as follows. If the value of n is 5 then it calls the function as fac(5). The function returns value 5*fac(4). That means this function calls the function again and returns 5*4*fac(3). This process continues until the value n=1. So the result is 5*4*3*2*1 = 120.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 8.
Read the following program
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int a = 0;
int main ()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 39
Write down the value displayed by the output of the above program with suitable explanation. What are the inferences drawn regarding the scope of variables?
Answer:
The output is 061.
1. Global variable: A variable declared out side of all functions it is known as global variable.

2. Local variable: A variable declared inside of a function it is known as local variable.

If a variable declared inside a function(main or other) with the same name of a global variable. The function uses the value of local variable and does not use the value of the global variable.

Here int a=0 is a global variable. In the main function the global variable ‘a’ is used. There is no local vari-able so the value of ‘a’, 0 is displayed. The statement ‘a++’ makes the value of ‘a’ is 1. It calls the function showval with argument ‘a=1’.

The argument ‘x’ will get this value i.e. ‘x=T. But in the function showval there is a local variable ‘a’ its value is 5 is used. So this function returns 6 and it will be displayed. After this the value 1 of the global variable ‘a’ will be displayed. Hence the result 061.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 9.
The following are function calling statements. Some of them will be executed, while some other generate compilation error. Write down your opinion on each of them with proper justification
Answer:

  1. char ch=getch();
  2. sqrt(25);
  3. strcat (“Computer”, “Program”);
  4. double num = pow(2, 3, 5)
  5. put char(getchar());

Answer:

  1. getch get a character from the console(key board) but does not echo to the screen. So we can’t read a character from the console.
  2. It returns the square root of 25.
  3. It concatenates Program to computer, i.e. we will get a string “computer program”
  4. The function pow should contains only two arguments. But here it contains 3 arguments so it is an error. We can write this function as follows Double num = pow(pow(2, 3, 5)
  5. It reads a character from the console and display it on the screen.

Question 10.
Short notes about character functions and string functions
Answer:
a. Character functions:
1. isalnum(): It is used to check whether a character is alphabet or digit. It returns a non zero value if it is an alphabet or digit otherwise it returns zero.

2. isalpha(): It is used to check whether a character is alphabet or not. It returns a non zero value if it is an alphabet otherwise it returns zero.

3. isdigit(): It is used to check whether a character is digit or not. It returns a non zero value if it is digit otherwise it returns zero.

4. islower(): It is used to check whether a character is lower case alphabet or not. It returns a non zero value if it is a lower case alphabet otherwise it returns zero.

5. isupper(): It is used to check whether a character is upper case alphabet or not. It returns a non zero value if it is an upper case alphabet otherwise it returns zero.

6. tolower(): It is used to convert the alphabet into lowercase.

7. toupper(): It is used to convert the alphabet into upper case.

b. String functions:
1. strcpy(): This function is used to copy one string into another.

2. strcat(): This function is used to concatenate(join) second string into first string.

3. strlen(): This function is used to find the length of a string.

4. strcmp(): This function is used to compare 2 strings. If the first string is less than second string then it returns a negative value. If the first string is equal to the second string then it returns a value zero and if the first string is greater than the second string then it returns a positive value.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 11.
Write a program to perform the following operations on a string

  1. Length of a string
  2. Search a character
  3. Display the string

Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
void len()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 40
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 41
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 42
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 43

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 12.
Write functions to perform the following operations.

  1. sqrt()
  2. power of 2 numbers
  3. sin
  4. cos

Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cmath>
using namespace std;
void sqroot()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 44
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 45
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 46

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 13.
Read the following C++ programs and answer the questions:
Case I
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 47

Case II
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 48

  1. Identify the type of function call in each case.
  2. How do they differ?

Answer:

  1. In case I the method used is Call by value and in Case II is Call by reference.
  2. There are two methods they are call by value and call by reference

a. call by value:
In call by value method, a copy of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will not affect the original value.

b. call by reference:
In call by reference method, the reference of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will affect the original value.